Mechanical engineering and materials Books

Book SynopsisThis comprehensive and unique book is intended to cover the vast and fast-growing field of electrical and electronic materials and their engineering in accordance with modern developments. Basic and pre-requisite information has been included for easy transition to more complex topics. Latest developments in various fields of materials and their sciences/engineering, processing and applications have been included. Latest topics like PLZT, vacuum as insulator, fiber-optics, high temperature superconductors, smart materials, ferromagnetic semiconductors etc. are covered. Illustrations and examples encompass different engineering disciplines such as robotics, electrical, mechanical, electronics, instrumentation and control, computer, and their inter-disciplinary branches. A variety of materials ranging from iridium to garnets, microelectronics, micro alloys to memory devices, left-handed materials, advanced and futuristic materials are described in detail.Table of ContentsPreface xxxvAcknowledgement xxxviiAbout the Authors xxxixAbbreviations xli1 General Introduction to Electrical and Electronic Materials 12 Atomic Models, Bonding in Solids, Crystal Geometry, and Miller Indices 333 Solid Structures, Characterization of Materials, Crystal Imperfections, and Mechanical Properties of Materials 714 Conductive Materials: Electron Theories, Properties and Behaviour 1095 Conductive Materials: Types and Applications 1536 Semiconducting Materials: Properties and Behaviour 1857 Semiconducting Materials: Types and Applications 2298 Semiconducting Materials: Processing and Devices 2639 Dielectric Materials: Properties and Behaviour 30110 Dielectric Materials: Types and Applications 34311 Magnetic Materials: Properties and Behaviour 37912 Magnetic Materials: Types and Applications 42313 Superconductive Materials 44914 Passive Components (Resistors) 47715 Passive Components (Capacitors) 50316 Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Fabrication 53317 Optical Properties of Materials, and Materials for Opto-Electronic Devices 56118 Specific Materials for Electrical, Electronics, Computers, Instruments, Robotics, and Other Applications 59319 Recent Advances and Emerging Trends in Electrical and Electronic Materials 631Appendix I: SI Prefixes of Multiples and Submultiples 677Appendix II: Greek Alphabet 679Appendix III: Conventions to be Followed While Using SI UNIT 681Appendix IV: Physical Constants 683Appendix V: Conversion Factors 685Glossary of Terminologies 687Answers to Numerical Questions 699Answers to Objective Questions 705Index 709

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn introduction to the state-of-the-art of the diverse self-assembly systems Self-Assembly: From Surfactants to Nanoparticles provides an effective entry for new researchers into this exciting field while also giving the state of the art assessment of the diverse self-assembling systems for those already engaged in this research. Over the last twenty years, self-assembly has emerged as a distinct science/technology field, going well beyond the classical surfactant and block copolymer molecules, and encompassing much larger and complex molecular, biomolecular and nanoparticle systems. Within its ten chapters, each contributed by pioneers of the respective research topics, the book: Discusses the fundamental physical chemical principles that govern the formation and properties of self-assembled systems Describes important experimental techniques to characterize the properties of self-assembled systems, particularly the nature of molecuTable of ContentsList of Contributors xi Preface xv Acknowledgments xxi 1 Self-Assembly from Surfactants to Nanoparticles – Head vs. Tail 1Ramanathan Nagarajan 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Classical Surfactants and Block Copolymers 4 1.2.1 Tanford Model for Surfactant Micelles 4 1.2.2 de Gennes Model for Block Copolymer Micelles 11 1.2.3 Surfactant Self-Assembly Model Incorporating Tail Effects 13 1.2.4 Star Polymer Model of Block Copolymer Self-Assembly Incorporating Headgroup Effects 15 1.2.5 Mean Field Model of Block Copolymer Self-Assembly Incorporating Headgroup Effects 17 1.2.6 Tail Effects on Shape Transitions in Surfactant Aggregates 20 1.2.7 Headgroup Effects on Shape Transitions in Block Copolymer Aggregates 22 1.3 Self-Assembly of Nonclassical Amphiphiles Based on Head−Tail Competition 24 1.3.1 Dendritic Amphiphiles 25 1.3.2 DNA Amphiphiles 27 1.3.3 Peptide Amphiphiles 29 1.3.4 Protein−Polymer Conjugates 31 1.3.5 Amphiphilic Nanoparticles 34 1.4 Conclusions 37 Acknowledgments 37 References 38 2 Self-Assembly into Branches and Networks 41Alexey I. Victorov 2.1 Introduction 41 2.2 Rheology and Structure of Solutions Containing Wormlike Micelles 44 2.2.1 Viscoelasticity of Entangled Wormlike Micelles 44 2.2.2 Growth of Nonionic Micelles 50 2.2.3 Growth of Ionic Micelles 51 2.2.4 Persistence Length of an Ionic Micelle 52 2.2.5 Networks of Branched Micelles 53 2.2.6 Ion-Specific Effect on Micellar Growth and Branching 55 2.3 Branching and Equilibrium Behavior of a Spatial Network 56 2.3.1 The Entropic Network of Chains 56 2.3.2 The Shape of Micellar Branch and the Free Energy 61 2.4 Conclusions 66 Acknowledgments 69 References 69 3 Self-Assembly of Responsive Surfactants 77Timothy J. Smith and Nicholas L. Abbott 3.1 Introduction 77 3.2 Redox-Active Surfactants 77 3.2.1 Reversible Changes in Interfacial Properties 78 3.2.2 Reversible Changes in Bulk Solution Properties 82 3.2.3 Control of Biomolecule-Surfactant Assemblies 84 3.2.4 Spatial Control of Surfactant-Based Properties 87 3.3 Light-Responsive Surfactants 90 3.3.1 Interfacial Properties 90 3.3.2 Bulk Solution Properties 90 3.3.3 Biomolecule-Surfactant Interactions 91 3.3.4 Spatial Control of Surfactant-Based Properties Using Light 93 3.4 Conclusion 93 Acknowledgments 96 References 96 4 Self-Assembly and Primitive Membrane Formation: Between Stability and Dynamism 101Martin M. Hanczyc and Pierre-AlainMonnard 4.1 Introduction 101 4.2 Basis of Self-Assembly of Single-Hydrocarbon-Chain Amphiphiles 104 4.2.1 van derWaals Forces and Hydrophobic Effect 104 4.2.2 Headgroup-to-Headgroup Interactions 105 4.2.3 Interactions Between the Amphiphile Headgroups and Solute/Solvent Molecules 106 4.3 Types of Structures 106 4.3.1 Critical Aggregate Concentration 107 4.3.2 Packing Parameter 108 4.4 Self-Assembly of a Single Type of Single-Hydrocarbon-Chain Amphiphile 109 4.4.1 Single Species of Single-Hydrocarbon-Chain Amphiphile 109 4.4.2 Mixtures of Single-Hydrocarbon-Chain Amphiphiles 110 4.4.2.1 Mixtures of Amphiphiles with the Same Functional Headgroups 111 4.4.2.2 Mixtures of Single-Hydrocarbon Chain Amphiphiles and Neutral Co-surfactants 111 4.4.2.3 Mixtures of Charged Single Hydrocarbon Chain Amphiphiles 112 4.4.2.4 Mixtures of Single-Chain Amphiphiles and Lipids 113 4.4.3 Mixtures of Single-Hydrocarbon-Chain Amphiphiles and Other Molecules 114 4.4.4 Self-Assembly on Surfaces 115 4.5 Catalysis Compartmentalization with Single-Hydrocarbon-Chain Amphiphiles 116 4.5.1 Enclosed Protocell Models 118 4.5.2 Interfacial Protocell Models 120 4.5.3 Membranes as Energy Transduction Systems 124 4.5.3.1 Linking Light Energy Harvesting and Chemical Conversion 124 4.5.3.2 Formation of Chemical Gradients 125 4.5.3.3 Energy Harvesting and Its Conversion into High-Energy Bonds of Phosphate-Chemicals 125 4.6 Dynamism 126 4.7 Conclusion 128 Acknowledgments 129 References 129 5 ProgrammingMicelles with Biomolecules 137Matthew P. Thompson and Nathan C. Gianneschi 5.1 Introduction 137 5.2 Peptide-Containing Micelles 138 5.2.1 Peptide Amphiphiles 139 5.2.2 Peptide−Polymer Amphiphiles (PPAs) 141 5.3 DNA-Programmed Micelle Systems 151 5.3.1 Lipid-Like DNA Amphiphiles 154 5.3.2 DNA−Polymer Amphiphiles 159 5.4 Summary 172 References 172 6 Protein Analogous Micelles 179Lorraine Leon andMatthew Tirrell 6.1 Introduction 179 6.2 Physicochemical Properties of Peptide Amphiphiles 181 6.2.1 The Role of Secondary Structures in PAMs 182 6.2.2 The Role of Different Tails in PAMs 185 6.2.3 The Role of Multiple Headgroups in PAMs 186 6.2.4 Stabilizing Spherical Structures 187 6.2.5 Electrostatic Interactions 188 6.2.6 Mixed Micelles 188 6.2.7 Stimuli-Responsive PAMs 190 6.3 PAMs in Biomedical Applications 192 6.3.1 Tissue Engineering and RegenerativeMedicine 192 6.3.2 Diagnostic and Therapeutic PAMs 195 6.4 Conclusions 199 Acknowledgments 199 References 200 7 Self-Assembly of Protein−Polymer Conjugates 207Xuehui Dong, Aaron Huang, Allie Obermeyer, and Bradley D. Olsen 7.1 Introduction 207 7.2 Helical Protein Copolymers 209 7.3 β-Sheet Protein Copolymers 215 7.4 Cyclic Protein Copolymers 220 7.5 Coil-Like Protein Copolymers 223 7.6 Globular Protein Copolymers 229 7.7 Outlook 236 Acknowledgments 237 References 237 8 Multiscale Modeling and Simulation of DNA-Programmable Nanoparticle Assembly 257Ting Li, Rebecca J.McMurray, and Monica Olvera de la Cruz 8.1 Introduction 257 8.2 A Molecular Dynamics Study of a Scale-Accurate Coarse-Grained Model with Explicit DNA Chains 259 8.3 Thermally Active Hybridization 263 8.4 DNA-Mediated Nanoparticle Crystallization in Wulff Polyhedra 268 8.5 Conclusions 272 Acknowledgments 273 References 273 9 Harnessing Self-Healing Vesicles to Pick Up, Transport, and Drop Off Janus Particles 277Xin Yong, Emily J. Crabb, Nicholas M. Moellers, Isaac Salib, Gerald T.McFarlin, Olga Kuksenok, and Anna C. Balazs 9.1 Introduction 277 9.2 Methodology 279 9.3 Results and Discussion 285 9.3.1 Selective Pick-Up of a Single Particle 285 9.3.1.1 Symmetric Janus Particles and Pure Hydrophilic Particles 285 9.3.1.2 Asymmetric Janus Particles 288 9.3.2 Interaction between Multiple Particles and a Lipid Vesicle 291 9.3.3 Depositing Janus Particles on Patterned Surfaces 295 9.3.3.1 Step Trench 295 9.3.3.2 Wedge Trench 298 9.3.3.3 “Sticky” Stripe 301 9.4 Conclusions 303 Acknowledgments 304 References 304 10 Solution Self-Assembly of Giant Surfactants: An Exploration on Molecular Architectures 309Xue-Hui Dong, Yiwen Li, Zhiwei Lin, Xinfei Yu, Kan Yue, Hao Liu, Mingjun Huang,Wen-Bin Zhang, and Stephen Z. D. Cheng 10.1 Introduction 309 10.2 Molecular Architecture of Giant Surfactants 311 10.3 Giant Surfactants with Short Nonpolymeric Tails 312 10.4 Giant Surfactants with a Single Head and Single Polymer Tail 315 10.5 Giant Surfactants with Multiheads and Multitails 319 10.6 Giant Surfactants with Block Copolymer Tails 321 10.7 Conclusions 324 Acknowledgments 325 References 325 Index 331

Read more less

Book SynopsisChemistry as a Game of Molecular Construction: The Bond-Click Way utilizes an innovative and engaging approach to introduce students to the basic concepts and universal aspects of chemistry, with an emphasis on molecules' beauty and their importance in our lives. Offers a unique approach that portrays chemistry as a window into mankind's material-chemical essence Reveals the beauty of molecules through the click method, a teaching methodology comprised of the process of constructing molecules from building blocks Styles molecular construction in a way that reveals the universal aspect of chemistry Allows students to construct molecules, from the simple hydrogen molecule all the way to complex strands of DNA, thereby showing the overarching unity of matter Provides problems sets and solutions for each chapterTable of ContentsFOREWORD xv PREFACE xvii Comments to the Teachers/Students xvii A Conversation on the Textbook and Its Intended Readers xx LECTURE 1 MOLECULAR BLUES 1 1.1 Conversation on Contents of Lecture 1 1 1.2 The Universal Aspect of Chemistry 2 1.3 Love, Addiction, Psychological Balance, etc. 2 1.4 The Chemical Mechanism of Neurotransmission 8 1.5 Molecules of Pleasure, Wellness, and Pair Bonding 10 1.6 More Chemical Control 13 1.7 The Chemical Matter 15 1.8 Molecular Architecture and Its Emergent Properties 18 1.8.1 Diamond, Graphite, and More 18 1.8.2 And There Was Light… 19 1.9 Chirality, and the Magic by Which Molecules Recognize Others in Nature 21 1.10 Our Genetic Code Is Chemical 23 1.11 Chemistry and Its Emergent Expressions 24 1.12 References and Notes 26 1.A Appendix 29 1.A.1 Proposed Demonstrations 29 1.A.2 References for Appendix 1.A 31 1.R Retouches 31 1.R.1 More Drugs Looking like PEA 31 1.R.2 The Atomic Hypothesis 32 1.R.3 The Uncertainty Principle, The Exclusion Rule, and Valence 32 1.R.4 Units of Size 33 1.R.5 References for Retouches 33 LECTURE 2 THE CHEMICAL BOND AND THE LEGO PRINCIPLE 35 2.1 Conversation on Contents of Lecture 2 35 2.2 The Periodic Table: The Storehouse of Atoms 36 2.2.1 The Chemical Language 38 2.3 The LEGO Principle 40 2.3.1 The Covalent Bond in H2 41 2.4 The Bonding Capability of Atoms and The Law of Nirvana for Main Group Elements 44 2.4.1 The Valence Shell and Connectivity in a Family 45 2.4.2 The Octet and Duet Rules: The Law of Nirvana 46 2.5 Making Molecules Using the Available Atom Connectivity and The Law of Nirvana 48 2.5.1 Using the Table of Connectivity to Make Molecules That Attain Nirvana 50 2.5.2 Bonding in Atoms with Multiple Connectivity 53 2.6 The Principle of Conservation of the Number of Atoms in Chemical Reactions 56 2.7 Summary 57 2.8 References 59 2.A Appendix 59 2.R Retouches 60 2.R.1 Elements versus Atoms 60 2.R.2 Electron Pairing 61 2.R.3 Enzymes and Catalysis 61 2.R.4 Alchemy 62 2.R.5 References for Retouches 63 2.P Problem Set 63 LECTURE 3 ELECTRON-DEFICIENT MOLECULES, GIANT MOLECULES, AND CONNECTIVITY OF LARGE FRAGMENTS 65 3.1 Conversation on Contents of Lecture 3 65 3.2 Electron-Deficient Molecules 66 3.2.1 Electron-Deficient Free Radicals 68 3.3 The Power of Multiple Connectivity: SiO2—A Giant Molecule 69 3.3.1 SiO2—A Giant Molecule 69 3.3.2 Definitions of Terms That Follow from the SiO2 Story: Stoichiometry and Polymers 71 3.4 SiO2 and Glass Making 73 3.5 Glass Making from Water Glass 74 3.6 Must We Work So Hard to Construct Large Molecules? 75 3.6.1 Creating Larger Modular Building Blocks 75 3.6.2 Making New Molecules from the New Modular Fragments 75 3.7 Summary 80 3.8 References 81 3.A Appendix 81 3.A.1 Proposed Demonstrations 81 3.A.2 References for Appendix 3.A 82 3.R Retouches 82 3.R.1 Formal Charges 82 3.R.2 Multiple Bonds to Silicon 83 3.R.3 The Lone-Pair Bond Weakening Effect 83 3.R.4 The O2 Molecule and Its Magnetism 84 3.R.5 References for Retouches 86 3.P Problem Set 86 LECTURE 4 CONSTRUCTING MOLECULAR WORLDS OF CARBON–HYDROGEN FROM LARGE LEGO FRAGMENTS 87 4.1 Conversation on Contents of Lecture 4 87 4.2 Molecular Chains Involving Only C and H 89 4.2.1 Extended Chains 89 4.2.2 Branched Chains and Isomerism 91 4.2.3 Isomers of Octane (C8H18) 93 4.2.4 Some Applications of Alkanes 94 4.3 Molecular Rings and Cages Made From CH2 and CH Fragments 96 4.3.1 Molecular Rings Made of CH2 Fragments 96 4.3.2 Molecular Cages Made of CH Fragments 97 4.4 Molecular Planes and Cages Made from C Fragments 100 4.5 Isomers of Rings and Cages 105 4.6 Infinity of Molecular Worlds Made from C and H 106 4.7 Summary 108 4.8 References 108 4.R Retouches 108 4.R.1 Atomic Weight, Isotopes, Atomic Mass Unit, and Molecular Weights 108 4.R.2 Avogadro’s Number 109 4.R.3 The Mole Concept 110 4.R.4 Calculation of CO2 Emission by a Car 111 4.R.5 The Molecule Benzene, Kekul´e’s Dream, and Resonance Theory 112 4.R.6 Resonance Theory and Collective Bonding 114 4.R.7 References for Retouches 115 4.P Problem Set 115 LECTURE 5 CONSTRUCTING MOLECULAR WORLDS OF LIFE FROM LARGE LEGO FRAGMENTS 117 5.1 Conversation on Contents of Lecture 5 117 5.2 Alcohols, Aldehydes, Ketones, Ethers, and Amines 120 5.2.1 Alcohols 120 5.2.2 Ethers 122 5.2.3 Amines 124 5.2.4 Biogenic Amines: Our Neurotransmitters 124 5.2.5 Aldehydes, Ketones, Acids, and Esters 128 5.2.6 Fats (Lipids): Fatty Acids, Prostaglandins, Triglycerides, Cholesterol, Cortisone, etc. 130 5.2.7 Amino Acids, Peptides, Proteins, and Enzymes 136 5.3 Summary 145 5.4 References 145 5.A Appendix 146 5.A.1 The Natural Amino Acids (NAAs) 146 5.R Retouches 146 5.R.1 P450 Enzymes and Grapefruit Juice 146 5.R.2 The Discovery of O2 146 5.R.3 References for Retouches 150 5.P Problem Set 150 LECTURE 6 ELECTRON RICHNESS, DNA AND RNA MOLECULES, AND SYNTHETIC POLYMERS 153 6.1 Conversation on Contents of Lecture 6 153 6.2 Electron Richness: A Different State of Nirvana 155 6.2.1 “Who Is Who in Electron Richness” 155 6.2.2 Examples of Electron-Rich Molecules 156 6.2.3 Phosphoric and Sulfuric Acids 157 6.3 DNA and RNA Strands 159 6.3.1 Formation of DNA and RNA Strands 161 6.3.2 DNA and RNA Nucleotide-Based Drugs 161 6.4 Synthetic Polymers 164 6.4.1 Constructing Polymers Using the LEGO Principles 165 6.4.2 Polymers and Additives 171 6.5 Summary 172 6.6 References and Notes 173 6.A Appendix 174 6.A.1 Proposed Demonstrations 174 6.A.2 References for Appendix 6.A 175 6.R Retouches 175 6.R.1 To Be or Not to Be in Octet? This Is the Question 175 6.P Problem Set 177 LECTURE 7 THE 3D STRUCTURE OF MOLECULES, ELECTRONEGATIVITY, HYDROGEN BONDS, AND MOLECULAR ARCHITECTURE 179 7.1 Conversation on Contents of Lecture 7 179 7.2 3D Structures of Molecules 186 7.2.1 Selection Rules of 3D Molecular Structures 186 7.2.2 Lone Pairs Count in 3D Structure Determination 189 7.2.3 A Multiple Bond Counts as a Single Space Unit 191 7.2.4 Isomerism in Double-Bonded Molecules 192 7.2.5 Nature’s Usage of Cis and Trans Isomers 194 7.3 Handedness (Chirality) and Isomerism 195 7.3.1 Handedness (Chirality) in Nature 197 7.4 Extension of the 3D Rules to Conformations 200 7.5 The Architecture of Matter and Its Origins 202 7.5.1 The Electronegativity of Atoms 203 7.5.2 Polarity Trends in Bonds 204 7.5.3 Molecular Polarity 205 7.5.4 Intermolecular Interactions and the Hydrogen Bond 206 7.5.5 Properties of Water 207 7.5.6 H-Bonds in Proteins 208 7.6 H-Bonding and Our Genetic Code 209 7.7 Summary 213 7.8 References and Note 214 7.A Appendix 215 7.A.1 The Periodic Table of Electronegativity Values 215 7.A.2 Proposed Demonstrations for Lecture 7 215 7.A.3 References for Appendix 7.A 218 7.R Retouches 218 7.R.1 Electron Pair Repulsion 218 7.R.2 Pictorial Description of Lone Pairs 218 7.R.3 The Nature of the Double Bond 219 7.R.4 Conformations of C2H6 219 7.R.5 Other Intermolecular Forces 220 7.R.6 More on DNA 221 7.R.7 References for Retouches 225 7.P Problem Set 225 LECTURE 8 THE IONIC BOND AND IONIC MATTER 227 8.1 Conversation on Contents of Lecture 8 227 8.2 Ionic Bonds versus Covalent Bonds 232 8.2.1 The Formation of Ionic Bonds. How and When? 232 8.2.2 Construction of Ionic Bonds by “Click-Clack” 235 8.2.3 Ionic Molecules Containing Complex Ions 236 8.2.4 Why Are Ionic Materials Generally Solids? 238 8.2.5 Ionic Liquids? 240 8.2.6 Solubility and Insolubility of Ionic Materials 240 8.3 The Use of Ionic Matter in Living Organisms 242 8.3.1 Soluble Ionic Material Takes Care of Biological Communication 242 8.3.2 The Insoluble Ionic Material Makes Our Skeleton and Teeth 243 8.4 Covalent Molecules that Form Ions in Solution: Acids and Bases 244 8.4.1 Acids in Water: A Proton Transfer Reaction from the Acid to Water 244 8.4.2 Bases in Water: A Proton Transfer Reaction from Water to the Base 248 8.4.3 A Proton Transfer Reaction from Acids to Bases 249 8.4.4 A Few Facts About Our Acids and Bases 250 8.5 Summary 251 8.6 References and Notes 252 8.A Appendix 253 8.A.1 Proposed Demonstrations for Lecture 8 253 8.A.2 References for Appendix 8.A 254 8.R Retouches 255 8.R.1 Energetic Aspects of Ionic Bonding 255 8.R.2 Energy Units and Bond Energy Calculation for Ionic Bonds 257 8.R.3 Dissolution of Ionic Solids in Water 259 8.R.4 Concentration, the pH Scale, and Indicators 260 8.R.5 Symbolic Representations of Chemical Reactions Using Curved Arrows 262 8.R.6 References for Retouches 264 8.P Problem Set 264 LECTURE 9 BONDING IN TRANSITION METALS, SPECTROSCOPY, AND MOLECULAR DIMENSIONS 265 9.1 Conversation on Contents of Lecture 9 265 9.2 The 18-Electron Rule for Transition Metal Bonding 275 9.2.1 An Example of a Transition Metal Complex That Obeys the 18e Rule 276 9.2.2 Electron Counts of Ligand Contributions 277 9.3 Construction of Transition Metal Complexes That Obey the 18e Rule 279 9.4 Transition Metal Complexes with 14–16e 280 9.4.1 Comments on TM-Based Catalysts 282 9.5 3D Shapes of Transition Metal Complexes 283 9.6 Bridging Transition Metal and Organic Molecules: Bonding Capabilities of Fragments of Transition Metal Complexes 285 9.7 Summary of Transition Metal Complexes 288 9.8 Spectroscopy or How Do Chemists “Listen to Molecules”? 288 9.8.1 The Electromagnetic Radiation Spectrum 288 9.8.2 Energy Levels of Molecules as the Basis of Spectroscopy 291 9.8.3 X-Ray Crystallography and 3D Molecular Information 294 9.9 Summary of Spectroscopic Methods 297 9.10 References and Notes 297 9.A Appendix 298 9.A.1 Radii Values for Transition Metals in Covalent and Ionic Bonds 298 9.A.2 Bond Dissociation Energies and Their Usage as Building Blocks 298 9.A.3 Proposed Demonstrations for Lecture 9 300 9.A.4 References for Appendix 9.A 302 9.R Retouches 302 9.R.1 Why the 18e Rule, and Why Are Many TM Complexes Colored? 302 9.R.2 High-Spin Complexes 304 9.R.3 The Active Species of CYP 450 305 9.R.4 The “Life” of a Catalyst: The Catalytic Cycle 305 9.R.5 The Relation Between the Energy of the Photon and the Frequency of the Light 308 9.R.6 References for Retouches 308 9.P Problem Set 308 LECTURE 10 CHEMISTRY, THE TWO-FACED JANUS—THE DAMAGE IT CAUSES VERSUS ITS IMMENSE CONTRIBUTION TO MANKIND 311 10.1 Conversation on Contents of Lecture 10 311 10.2 Types of Potential Chemical Damage 316 10.2.1 The Ozone Hole 316 10.2.2 The Montreal Protocol 319 10.2.3 Climate Change 319 10.2.4 Acid Rain 321 10.2.5 More Evils and the Other Side of the Chemical Janus 322 10.3 Summary 324 10.4 References and Notes 324 10.R Retouches 325 10.R.1 The Electronic Structure of Ozone 325 10.R.2 Reference for Retouches 325 10.P Problem Set 326 LECTURE 11 CHEMISTRY IS EVERYTHING AND EVERYTHING IS CHEMISTRY 327 11.1 Conversation on Contents of Lecture 11 327 11.2 The Birth of Chemistry Is the Nascence of Mankind 328 11.3 Chemistry Is Everything 331 11.4 The Magic of Chemistry and Pathological Science 334 11.5 The Love of Chemistry 337 11.6 Summary 339 11.7 References and Notes 340 11.A Appendix 340 11.A.1 Proposed Demonstrations for Lecture 11 340 11.A.2 References for Appendix 11.A 342 EPILOGUE 343 ANSWERS TO PROBLEM SETS 345 INDEX 377

Read more less

Book SynopsisTextbook concisely introduces engineering thermodynamics, covering concepts including energy, entropy, equilibrium and reversibility Novel explanation of entropy and the second law of thermodynamics Presents abstract ideas in an easy to understand manner Includes solved examples and end of chapter problems Accompanied by a website hosting a solutions manual Table of ContentsPreface xii About the Companion website xiv 1 Introduction: A Brief History of Thermodynamics 1 1.1 What is Thermodynamics? 1 1.2 Steam Engines 2 1.3 Heat Engines 7 1.4 Heat, Work and Energy 8 1.5 Energy and the First Law of Thermodynamics 11 1.6 The Second Law of Thermodynamics 13 1.7 Entropy 15 Further Reading 17 2 Concepts and Definitions 18 2.1 Fundamental Concepts from Newtonian Mechanics 18 2.1.1 Length 19 2.1.2 Mass 19 2.1.3 Time 19 2.2 Derived Quantities: Velocity and Acceleration 19 2.3 Postulates: Newton’s Laws 21 2.4 Mechanical Work and Energy 23 2.4.1 Potential Energy 25 2.4.2 Kinetic Energy 27 2.5 Thermodynamic Systems 29 2.5.1 Closed System 30 2.5.2 Open System 30 2.5.3 Isolated System 30 2.6 Thermodynamic Properties 31 2.6.1 Path Functions 32 2.6.2 Intensive and Extensive Properties 33 2.7 Steady State 35 2.8 Equilibrium 35 2.8.1 Mechanical Equilibrium 37 2.8.2 Thermal Equilibrium 37 2.8.3 Phase Equilibrium 37 2.9 State and Process 38 2.10 Quasi]Equilibrium Process 39 2.11 Cycle 41 2.12 Solving Problems in Thermodynamics 43 2.13 Significant Digits and Decimal Places 43 Further Reading 44 Summary 44 Problems 46 3 Thermodynamic System Properties 49 3.1 Describing a Thermodynamic System 49 3.2 States of Pure Substances 50 3.3 Mass and Volume 51 3.4 Pressure 54 3.5 Temperature 56 3.6 Ideal Gas Equation 57 3.7 Absolute Temperature Scale 58 3.8 Modelling Ideal Gases 62 3.9 Internal Energy 64 3.10 Properties of Liquids and Solids 66 Further Reading 66 Summary 67 Problems 68 4 Energy and the First Law of Thermodynamics 72 4.1 Energy 72 4.2 Forms of Energy 73 4.3 Energy Transfer 75 4.4 Heat 77 4.5 Work 78 4.5.1 Boundary Work 78 4.5.2 Flow Work 86 4.5.3 Shaft Work 87 4.5.4 Spring Work 89 4.5.5 Electrical Work 90 4.6 The First Law for a Control Mass 91 4.7 Enthalpy 95 4.8 Specific Heats 97 4.9 Specific Heats of Ideal Gases 99 4.10 Which should you use, cp or cv? 102 4.11 Ideal Gas Tables 106 4.12 Specific Heats of Liquids and Solids 108 4.13 Steady Mass Flow Through a Control Volume 110 4.14 The First Law for Steady Mass Flow Through a Control Volume 112 4.15 Steady Flow Devices 113 4.15.1 Turbines and Compressors 113 4.15.2 Pumps 115 4.15.3 Nozzles and Diffusers 116 4.16 Transient Analysis for Control Volumes 118 Further Reading 120 Summary 120 Problems 123 5 Entropy 133 5.1 Converting Heat to Work 133 5.2 A New Extensive Property: Entropy 135 5.3 Second Law of Thermodynamics 138 5.4 Reversible and Irreversible Processes 139 5.5 State Postulate 143 5.6 Equilibrium in a Gas 144 5.7 Equilibrium – A Simple Example 149 5.8 Molecular Definition of Entropy 155 5.9 Third Law of Thermodynamics 157 5.10 Production of Entropy 157 5.11 Heat and Work: A Microscopic View 159 5.12 Order and Uncertainty 161 Further Reading 162 Summary 162 Problems 163 6 The Second Law of Thermodynamics 168 6.1 The Postulates of Classical Thermodynamics 168 6.2 Thermal Equilibrium and Temperature 169 6.3 Mechanical Equilibrium and Pressure 171 6.4 Gibbs Equation 173 6.5 Entropy Changes in Solids and Liquids 174 6.6 Entropy Changes in Ideal Gases 175 6.6.1 Constant Specific Heats 175 6.6.2 Ideal Gas Tables 177 6.7 Isentropic Processes in Ideal Gases 180 6.7.1 Constant Specific Heats 180 6.7.2 Ideal Gas Tables 183 6.8 Reversible Heat Transfer 185 6.9 T]S Diagrams 187 6.10 Entropy Balance for a Control Mass 187 6.11 Entropy Balance for a Control Volume 190 6.12 Isentropic Steady Flow Devices 192 6.13 Isentropic Efficiencies 194 6.13.1 Isentropic Turbine Efficiency 194 6.13.2 Isentropic Nozzle Efficiency 195 6.13.3 Isentropic Pump and Compressor Efficiency 196 6.14 Exergy 198 6.14.1 Exergy of a Control Mass 199 6.14.2 Exergy of a Control Volume 201 6.15 Bernoulli’s Equation 204 Further Reading 206 Summary 206 Problems 210 7 Phase Equilibrium 218 7.1 Liquid Vapour Mixtures 218 7.2 Phase Change 219 7.3 Gibbs Energy and Chemical Potential 221 7.4 Phase Equilibrium 223 7.5 Evaluating the Chemical Potential 225 7.6 Clausius–Clapyeron Equation 225 7.7 Liquid–Solid and Vapour–Solid Equilibria 229 7.8 Phase Change on P]v and T]v Diagrams 231 7.9 Quality 234 7.10 Property Tables 235 7.11 Van der Waals Equation of State 247 7.12 Compressibility Factor 251 7.13 Other Equations of State 252 7.13.1 Redlich–Kwong Equation of State 252 7.13.2 Virial Equation of State 253 Further Reading 255 Summary 255 Problems 257 8 Ideal Heat Engines and Refrigerators 267 8.1 Heat Engines 267 8.2 Perpetual Motion Machines 268 8.3 Carnot Engine 269 8.3.1 Two]Phase Carnot Engine 273 8.3.2 Single Phase Carnot Engine 276 8.4 Refrigerators and Heat Pumps 278 8.4.1 Carnot Refrigerator 279 8.4.2 Carnot Heat Pump 283 8.5 Carnot Principles 285 Further Reading 288 Summary 288 Problems 289 9 Vapour Power and Refrigeration Cycles 294 9.1 Rankine Cycle 294 9.2 Rankine Cycle with Superheat and Reheat 299 9.3 Rankine Cycle with Regeneration 305 9.3.1 Open Feedwater Heater 305 9.3.2 Closed Feedwater Heater 310 9.4 Vapour Refrigeration Cycle 312 Further Reading 316 Summary 316 Problems 318 10 Gas Power Cycles 324 10.1 Internal Combustion Engines 324 10.2 Otto Cycle 325 10.3 Diesel Cycle 331 10.4 Gas Turbines 334 10.5 Brayton Cycle 336 10.6 Brayton Cycle with Regeneration, Reheat and Intercooling 340 10.6.1 Regeneration 340 10.6.2 Reheat 342 10.6.3 Intercooling 344 Further Reading 345 Summary 345 Problems 346 Appendices 351 Appendix 1: Properties of Gases 351 Appendix 2: Properties of Solids 352 Appendix 3: Properties of Liquids 353 Appendix 4: Specific Heats of Gases 354 Appendix 5: Polynomial Relations for Ideal Gas Specific Heat as a Function of Temperature 355 Appendix 6: Critical Properties of Fluids 356 Appendix 7: Ideal Gas Tables for Air 357 Appendix 8: Properties of Water 360 Appendix 9: Properties of R]134a 373 Appendix 10: Generalised Compressibility 379 Index 381

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Ceramic Engineering and Science Proceeding has been published by The American Ceramic Society since 1980. This series contains a collection of papers dealing with issues in both traditional ceramics (i.e., glass, whitewares, refractories, and porcelain enamel) and advanced ceramics. Topics covered in the area of advanced ceramic include bioceramics, nanomaterials, composites, solid oxide fuel cells, mechanical properties and structural design, advanced ceramic coatings, ceramic armor, porous ceramics, and more.Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi Creep, Fatigue, and Damage Characterization Anisotropic Creep Behavior of a Unidirectional All-Oxide CMC 3Katia Artzt, Stefan Hackemann, Ferdinand Flucht, and Marion Bartsch Indicators for the Damage Evolution at Intermediate Temperature under Air of a SiC/[Si-B-C] Composite Subjected to Cyclic and Static Loading 15 Eiie Racie, Nathalie Godin, Pascal Reynaud, Mohamed R'Mili, Gilbert Fantozzi, Lionel Marcin, Florent Bouillon, and Myriam Kaminski Durability Results from Ceramic Matrix Composite with Differing Porosity Levels 27G. Ojard, I. Smyth, U. Santhosh, J. Ahmad, and Y. Gowayed Effects of Stress Concentrators on Damage Evolution in SiC/SiC Composites 37Christopher Baker, Emmanuel Maillet, Matthew Appleby, Richard Smith, Gregory N. Morscher, and Thomas Cook Advancements in Acoustic Micro Imaging for the Non-Destructive Inspection of Ceramic Components and Devices 45John H. Richtsmeier and Thomas J. McClenahan Effect of Specimen Geometry on Microstructural Fracture Behavior in Nano Composites under HVEM 57Hisashi Serizawa, Tamaki Shibayama, and Hidekazu Murakawa Processing and Properties of Carbides Effects on Mechanical and Thermal Properties by Varying the Interconnectivity of SiC in a Si:SiC Composite System 67A. L. Marshall Microstructure-Property Relationships in SiC/Diamond Composites as a Function of Diamond Content 75A. L. Marshall, A. F. Liszkiewicz, S. M. Salamone, P. G. Karandikar, and M. K. Aghajanian Effect of SiC:B4C Ratio on the Properties of Si-Cu/SiC/B4C Composites 83S. M. Salamone, M. K. Aghajanian, S. E. Horner, and J. Q. Zheng Plastic Deformation and Cracking Resistance of SiC Ceramics Measured by Indentation 91James Wade, Phoebe Claydon, and Houzheng Wu Fabrication of SiC Fiber-Reinforced SiC Matrix Composites by Low Temperature Melt Infiltration Method using Si-Hf and Si-Y Alloy 101Yosuke Okubo, Toyohiko Yano, Katsumi Yoshida, Takuya Aoki, and Toshio Ogasawara Processing and Properties of Non-Carbides Development of Electrical Porcelain Insulators from Ceramic Minerals in Uganda 115Peter W. Olupot, Stefan Jonsson, and Joseph K. Byaruhanga The Mechanical Properties of Sandwich Structures based on a Metal Ceramic Core and Fiber Metal Laminate Skin Material 127K. Myers, M. Curl, P. Cortes, B. Hetzel, and K.M. Peters Alkali Treatment on Sugarcane Bagasse to Improve Properties of Green Composites of Sugarcane Bagasse Fibers-Polypropylene 139Juliana Anggono, Niko Riza Habibi, and dan Suwandi Sugondo Characteristics of a Zirconia-Spinel Composite Processed by a Current-Activated Pressure-Assisted Densification Method 151Mahmood Shirooyeh, Javier E. Garay, and Terence G. Langdon Oxidation and Healing Enhancement of Oxidation Resistance of Graphite Foams by SiC Coating for Concentrated Solar Power Applications 163Taeil Kim, Dileep Singh, and Mrityunjay Singh Spark Plasma Sintering of Ceramic Matrix Composites with Self-Healing Matrix 177Jerome Magnant, Laurence Maill6, Rene Pailler, and Alain Guette Advanced Ceramic Composite using Self-Healing and Fiber- Reinforcement 187Wataru Nakao, Daisuke Maruoka, Shingo Ozaki, Makoto Nanko, and Toshio Osada Delamination, Chipping, and Wear Applying Fracture Mechanics Methods to Model Coating Delamination 197M. Prabhakar Rao, Xuemei Wang, Robert G. Hutchinson, and G.V. Srinivasan A New Analysis of the Edge Chipping Resistance of Brittle Materials 209G. D. Quinn and J. B. Quinn Tribological Background for the Use of Niobium Carbide (NbC) as Cutting Tools and For Wear Resistant Tribosystems 225Mathias Woydt and Hardy Mohrbacher Author Index 233

Read more less

Book SynopsisMULTISCALE BIOMECHANICS Model biomechanical problems at multiple scales with this cutting-edge technology Multiscale modelling is the set of techniques used to solve physical problems which exist at multiple scales either in space or time. It has been shown to have significant applications in biomechanics, the study of biological systems and their structures, which exist at scales from the macroscopic to the microscopic and beyond, and which produce a myriad of overlapping problems. The next generation of biomechanical researchers therefore has need of the latest multiscale modelling techniques. Multiscale Biomechanics offers a comprehensive introduction to these techniques and their biomechanical applications. It includes both the theory of multiscale biomechanical modelling and its practice, incorporating some of the latest research and surveying a wide range of multiscale methods. The result is a thorough yet accessible resource for researchers lookTable of ContentsContents Preface xiii List of Abbreviations xvii Part I Introduction 1 1 Introduction 3 1.1 Introduction to Biomechanics 3 1.2 Biology and Biomechanics 3 1.3 Types of Biological Systems 6 1.3.1 Biosolids 6 1.3.2 Biofluids 7 1.3.3 Biomolecules 8 1.3.4 Synthesized Biosystems 9 1.4 Biomechanical Hierarchy 10 1.4.1 Organ Level 10 1.4.2 Tissue Level 11 1.4.3 Cellular and Lower Levels 12 1.4.4 Complex Medical Procedures 13 1.5 Multiscale/Multiphysics Analysis 13 1.6 Scope of the Book 17 Part II Analytical and Numerical Bases 21 2 Theoretical Bases of Continuum Mechanics 23 2.1 Introduction 23 2.2 Solid Mechanics 23 2.2.1 Elasticity 24 2.2.2 Plasticity 28 2.2.3 Damage Mechanics 31 2.2.4 Fracture Mechanics 36 2.2.5 Viscoelasticity 53 2.2.6 Poroelasticity 59 2.2.7 Large Deformation 63 2.3 Flow, Convection and Diffusion 72 2.3.1 Thermodynamics 72 2.3.2 Fluid Mechanics 74 2.3.3 Gas Dynamics 78 2.3.4 Diffusion and Convection 81 2.4 Fluid–Structure Interaction 83 2.4.1 Lagrangian and Eulerian Descriptions 83 2.4.2 Fluid–Solid Interface Boundary Conditions 84 2.4.3 Governing Equations in the Eulerian Description 85 2.4.4 Coupled Lagrangian–Eulerian (CLE) 86 2.4.5 Coupled Lagrangian–Lagrangian (CLL) 87 2.4.6 Arbitrary Lagrangian–Eulerian (ALE) 88 3 Numerical Methods 93 3.1 Introduction 93 3.2 Finite Difference Method (FDM) 93 3.2.1 One-Dimensional FDM 94 3.2.2 Higher Order One-Dimensional FDM 95 3.2.3 FDM for Solving Partial Differential Equations 98 3.3 Finite Volume Method (FVM) 99 3.4 Finite Element Method (FEM) 102 3.4.1 Basics of FEM Interpolation 102 3.4.2 FEM Basis Functions/Shape Functions 103 3.4.3 Properties of the Finite Element Interpolation 105 3.4.4 Physical and Parametric Coordinate Systems 106 3.4.5 Main Types of Finite Elements 106 3.4.6 Governing Equations of the Boundary Value Problem 109 3.4.7 Numerical Integration 112 3.5 Extended Finite Element Method (XFEM) 113 3.5.1 A Review of XFEM Development 113 3.5.2 Partition of Unity 114 3.5.3 Enrichments 115 3.5.4 Signed Distance Function 115 3.5.5 XFEM Approximation for Cracked Elements 115 3.5.6 Boundary Value Problem for a Cracked Body 117 3.5.7 XFEM Discretisation of the Governing Equation 118 3.5.8 Numerical Integration 119 3.5.9 Selection of Enrichment Nodes for Crack Propagation 121 3.5.10 Incompatible Modes of XFEM Enrichments 122 3.5.11 The Level Set Method for Tracking Moving Boundaries 123 3.5.12 XFEM Tip Enrichments 124 3.5.13 XFEM Enrichment Formulation for Large Deformation Problems 132 3.6 Extended Isogeometric Analysis (XIGA) 133 3.6.1 Introduction 133 3.6.2 Isogeometric Analysis 133 3.6.3 Extended Isogeometric Analysis (XIGA) 136 3.6.4 XIGA Governing Equations 138 3.6.5 Numerical Integration 140 3.7 Meshless Methods 142 3.7.1 Why Going Meshless 142 3.7.2 Meshless Approximations 143 3.7.3 Meshless Solutions for the Boundary Value Problems 158 3.8 Variable Node Element (VNE) 166 4 Multiscale Methods 171 4.1 Introduction 171 4.2 Homogenization Methods 172 4.2.1 Introduction 172 4.2.2 Representative Volume Element (RVE) 173 4.2.3 Mathematical Homogenization 174 4.2.4 Computational Homogenization 181 4.3 Molecular Dynamics (MD) 195 4.3.1 Introduction 195 4.3.2 Statistical Mechanics 196 4.3.3 MD Equations of Motion 211 4.3.4 Models for Atomic Interactions – MD Potentials 215 4.3.5 Measures for Determining the State of MD Systems 222 4.3.6 Stress Computation in MD 223 4.3.7 Molecular Statics 226 4.3.8 Sample MD Simulation of a Polymer 227 4.4 Sequential Multiscale Method 229 4.4.1 Introduction 229 4.4.2 Multiscale Modelling of CNT Reinforced Concrete 230 4.4.3 Molecular Dynamics Simulation of CNTs 231 4.4.4 Simulation of CNT-Reinforced Calcium Silicate Hydrate 242 4.4.5 Micromechanical Simulation of CNT-Reinforced Cement 247 4.4.6 Mesoscale Simulation of CNT-Reinforced Concrete 250 4.4.7 Macroscale Simulation of CNT-Reinforced Concrete 256 4.5 Concurrent Multiscale Methods 258 4.5.1 Introduction 258 4.5.2 Quasi-Continuum Method (QC) 260 4.5.3 Bridging Domain Method (BDM) 267 4.5.4 Bridging Scale Method (BSM) 271 4.5.5 Disordered Concurrent Multiscale Method (DCMM) 272 4.5.6 Variable Node Multiscale Method (VNMM) 281 4.5.7 Enriched Multiscale Method (EMM) 288 Part III Biomechanical Simulations 297 5 Biomechanics of Soft Tissues 299 5.1 Introduction 299 5.2 Physiology of Soft Tissues 300 5.2.1 Soft Tissues, Skin 300 5.2.2 Artery 303 5.2.3 Heart Leaflet 303 5.2.4 Brain Tissue 304 5.3 Hyperelastic Models of Soft Tissues 305 5.3.1 Introduction 305 5.3.2 Description of Deformation and Definition of Invariants 307 5.3.3 Isotropic neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Model 309 5.3.4 Isotropic Mooney–Rivlin Hyperelastic Model 312 5.3.5 Hyperelastic Models for Multiscale Simulation of Tendon 313 5.3.6 Anisotropic Hyperelastic Models for Fibrous Tissues 316 5.3.7 Polyconvex Undamaged Functions for Fibrous Tissues 319 5.3.8 Damaged Soft Tissue 321 5.4 Multiscale Modelling of Undamaged Tendon 328 5.4.1 Fibril Scale 330 5.4.2 Fibre Scale 330 5.4.3 Tissue Scale 332 5.5 Multiscale Analysis of a Human Aortic Heart Valve 336 5.5.1 Introduction 336 5.5.2 Organ Scale Simulation 337 5.5.3 Simulation in the Tissue Scale 342 5.5.4 Cell Scale Analysis 347 5.6 Modelling of Ligament Damage 349 5.7 Modelling of the Peeling Test: Dissection of the Medial Tissue 355 5.8 Healing in Damaged Soft Tissue 359 5.8.1 Introduction 359 5.8.2 Physical Foundation of Tissue Healing 360 5.8.3 Solution Procedure 369 5.8.4 Numerical Analysis 372 5.9 Hierarchical Multiscale Modelling of a Degraded Arterial Wall 383 5.9.1 Definition of the Problem 383 5.9.2 Multiscale Model 387 5.9.3 Hyperelastic Material Models 389 5.9.4 Computational Framework of the Hierarchical Multiscale Homogenization 390 5.9.5 Numerical Results 394 5.10 Multiscale Modelling of the Brain 401 5.10.1 Introduction 401 5.10.2 Biomechanics of the Brain 402 5.10.3 Multiscale Modelling of the Brain (neo-Hookean Model) 403 5.10.4 Viscoelastic Modelling of the Brain 414 6 Biomechanics of Hard Tissues 423 6.1 Introduction 423 6.1.1 Hard Tissues 423 6.1.2 Chemical Composition of Bone 423 6.1.3 Multiscale Structure of Bone 423 6.1.4 Bone Remodelling 428 6.1.5 Contents of the Chapter 429 6.2 Concepts of Fracture Analysis of Hard Tissues 429 6.2.1 Numerical Studies of Bone Fracture 430 6.2.2 Constitutive Response of the Bone 433 6.2.3 Poroelastic Nature of Bone Tissues 433 6.2.4 Plasticity and Damage 433 6.2.5 Hyperelastic Response 435 6.3 Simulation of the Femur Bone at Multiple Scales 435 6.3.1 Microscale Simulation of the Trabecular Bone 436 6.3.2 Two-dimensional XFEM Mesoscale Fracture Simulation of the Cortical Bone 437 6.3.3 Macroscale Simulation of the Femur 443 6.4 Healing in Damaged Hard Tissue 446 6.4.1 Introduction 446 6.4.2 Physical Foundation of Bone Tissue Healing 448 6.4.3 Solution Procedure 455 6.4.4 Numerical Analysis 458 7 Supplementary Topics 467 7.1 Introduction 467 7.2 Shape Memory Alloy (SMA) Stenting of an Artery 468 7.2.1 Stenting Procedures 468 7.2.2 SMA Constitutive Equations 469 7.2.3 Contact Mechanics 471 7.2.4 Modelling of Stenting 471 7.2.5 Basics of Modelling 472 7.3 Multiscale Modelling of the Eye 474 7.4 Pulsatile Blood Flow in the Aorta 477 7.4.1 Description of the Problem 477 7.5 Shape Memory Polymer Drug Delivery System 479 7.6 Artificial Intelligence in Biomechanics 483 7.6.1 Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning 483 7.6.2 Deep Learning 484 7.6.3 Physics-Informed Neural Networks (PINNs) 485 7.6.4 Biomechanical Applications of Artificial Intelligence 487 References 489 Index 519

Read more less

Book SynopsisWith Over 60 tables, most with graphic illustration, and over 1000 formulas, Formulas for Dynamics, Acoustics, and Vibration will provide an invaluable time-saving source of concise solutions for mechanical, civil, nuclear, petrochemical and aerospace engineers and designers.Table of ContentsPreface xi 1 Definitions, Units, and Geometric Properties 1 1.1 Definitions 1 1.2 Symbols 8 1.3 Units 11 1.4 Motion on the Surface of the Earth 18 1.5 Geometric Properties of Plane Areas 19 1.6 Geometric Properties of Rigid Bodies 30 1.7 Geometric Properties Defined by Vectors 40 References 41 2 Dynamics of Particles and Bodies 43 2.1 Kinematics and Coordinate Transformations 43 2.2 Newton’s Law of Particle Dynamics 50 2.2.1 Constant Mass Systems 50 2.2.2 Variable Mass Systems 57 2.2.3 Particle Trajectories 58 2.2.4 Work and Energy 63 2.2.5 Impulse 65 2.2.6 Armor 68 2.2.7 Gravitation and Orbits 71 2.3 Rigid Body Rotation 73 2.3.1 Rigid Body Rotation Theory 73 2.3.2 Single-Axis Rotation 73 2.3.3 Multiple-Axis Rotation 84 2.3.4 Gyroscopic Effects 85 References 87 3 Natural Frequency of Spring–Mass Systems, Pendulums, Strings, and Membranes 89 3.1 Harmonic Motion 89 3.2 Spring Constants 91 3.3 Natural Frequencies of Spring–Mass Systems 99 3.3.1 Single-Degree-of-Freedom 99 3.3.2 Two-Degree-of-Freedom System 113 3.4 Modeling Discrete Systems with Springs and Masses 117 3.4.1 Springs with Mass 117 3.4.2 Bellows 118 3.5 Pendulum Natural Frequencies 119 3.5.1 Mass Properties from Frequency Measurement 120 3.6 Tensioned Strings, Cables, and Chain Natural Frequencies 121 3.6.1 Equation of Motion 121 3.6.2 Cable Sag 123 3.7 Membrane Natural Frequencies 126 3.7.1 Flat Membranes 126 3.7.2 Curved Membranes 131 References 132 4 Natural Frequency of Beams 134 4.1 Beam Bending Theory 134 4.1.1 Stress, Strain, and Deformation 134 4.1.2 Sandwich Beams 136 4.1.3 Beam Equation of Motion 137 4.1.4 Boundary Conditions and Modal Solution 137 4.1.5 Beams on Elastic Foundations 141 4.1.6 Simplification for Tubes 141 4.2 Natural Frequencies and Mode Shapes of Single-Span and Multiple-Span Beams 142 4.2.1 Single-Span Beams 142 4.2.2 Orthogonality, Normalization, and Maximum Values 150 4.2.3 Beams Stress 150 4.2.4 Two-Span Beams 151 4.2.5 Multispan Beams 151 4.3 Axially Loaded Beam Natural Frequency 158 4.3.1 Uniform Axial Load 158 4.3.2 Linearly Varying Axial Load 159 4.4 Beams with Masses, Tapered Beams, Beams with Spring Supports, and Shear Beams 162 4.4.1 Beams with Masses 162 4.4.2 Tapered and Stepped Beams 162 4.4.3 Spring-Supported Beams 167 4.4.4 Shear Beams 167 4.4.5 Effect of Shearing Force on the Deflections of Beams 170 4.4.6 Rotary Inertia 170 4.4.7 Multistory Buildings 174 4.5 Torsional and Longitudinal Beam Natural Frequencies 176 4.5.1 Longitudinal Vibration of Beams and Springs 176 4.5.2 Torsional Vibration of Beams and Shafts 179 4.5.3 Circular Cross Section 179 4.5.4 Noncircular Cross Sections 182 4.6 Wave Propagation in Beams 183 4.7 Curved Beams, Rings, and Frames 184 4.7.1 Complete Rings 184 4.7.2 Stress and Strain of Arcs 189 4.7.3 Supported Rings and Helices 190 4.7.4 Circular Arcs, Arches, and Bends 190 4.7.5 Lowest Frequency In-Plane Natural Frequency of an Arc 196 4.7.6 Shallow Arc 197 4.7.7 Portal Frames 198 References 199 5 Natural Frequency of Plates and Shells 203 5.1 Plate Flexure Theory 203 5.1.1 Stress and Strain 203 5.1.2 Boundary Conditions 203 5.1.3 Plate Equation of Motion 205 5.1.4 Simply Supported Rectangular Plate 206 5.1.5 Plates on Elastic Foundations 207 5.1.6 Sandwich Plates 207 5.1.7 Thick Plates and Shear Deformation 207 5.1.8 Membrane Analogy and In-Plane Loads 208 5.1.9 Orthogonality 208 5.2 Plate Natural Frequencies and Mode Shapes 209 5.2.1 Plate Natural Frequencies 209 5.2.2 Circular and Annular Plates 209 5.2.3 Sectorial and Circular Orthotropic Plates 214 5.2.4 Rectangular Plates 214 5.2.5 Parallelogram, Triangular and Point-Supported Plates 215 5.2.6 Rectangular Orthotropic Plates and Grillages 215 5.2.7 Stiffened Plates 231 5.2.8 Perforated Plates 232 5.3 Cylindrical Shells 234 5.3.1 Donnell Thin Shell Theory 235 5.3.2 Natural Frequencies of Cylindrical Shells 237 5.3.3 Infinitely Long Cylindrical Shell Modes (j=0) 241 5.3.4 Simply Supported Cylindrical Shells without Axial Constraint 243 5.3.5 Cylindrical Shells with Other Boundary Conditions 246 5.3.6 Free–Free Cylindrical Shell 248 5.3.7 Cylindrically Curved Panels 249 5.3.8 Effect of Mean Load on Natural Frequencies 250 5.4 Spherical and Conical Shells 250 5.4.1 Spherical Shells 250 5.4.2 Open Shells and Church Bells 252 5.4.3 Shallow Spherical Shells 252 5.4.4 Conical Shells 254 References 254 6 Acoustics and Fluids 260 6.1 Sound Waves and Decibels 260 6.1.1 Speed of Sound 260 6.1.2 Acoustic Wave Equation 264 6.1.3 Decibels and Sound Power Level 276 6.1.4 Standards for Measurement 277 6.1.5 Attenuation and Transmission Loss (TL) 278 6.2 Sound Propagation in Large Spaces 285 6.2.1 Acoustic Wave Propagation 285 6.2.2 Sound Pressure on Rigid Walls 288 6.2.3 Mass Law for Sound Transmission 289 6.3 Acoustic Waves in Ducts and Rooms 289 6.3.1 Acoustic Waves in Ducts 289 6.3.2 Mufflers and Resonators 298 6.3.3 Room Acoustics 302 6.4 Acoustic Natural Frequencies and Mode Shapes 305 6.4.1 Structure-Acoustic Analogy 306 6.5 Free Surface Waves and Liquid Sloshing 310 6.6 Ships and Floating Systems 319 6.6.1 Ship Natural Frequencies (1/Period) 319 6.7 Added Mass of Structure in Fluids 321 6.7.1 Added Mass Potential Flow Theory 328 6.7.2 Added Mass 329 6.7.3 Added Mass of Plates and Shells 330 References 331 Further Reading 335 7 Forced Vibration 336 7.1 Steady-State Forced Vibration 336 7.1.1 Single-Degree-of-Freedom Spring–Mass Response 336 7.1.2 Multiple-Degree-of-Freedom Spring–Mass System Response 344 7.1.3 Forced Harmonic Vibration of Continuous Systems 347 7.1.4 General System Response 357 7.2 Transient Vibration 359 7.2.1 Transient Vibration Theory 359 7.2.2 Continuous Systems and Initial Conditions 365 7.2.3 Maximum Transient Response and Response Spectra 371 7.2.4 Shock Standards and Shock Test Machines 374 7.3 Vibration Isolation 374 7.3.1 Single-Degree-of-Freedom Vibration Isolation 374 7.3.2 Two-Degree-of-Freedom Vibration Isolation 377 7.4 Random Vibration Response to Spectral Loads 379 7.4.1 Power Spectral Density and Fourier Series 380 7.4.2 Complex Fourier Transform and Random Response 381 7.5 Approximate Response Solution 385 7.5.1 Equivalent Static Loads 389 7.5.2 Scaling Mode Shapes to Load 389 References 391 8 Properties of Solids, Liquids, and Gases 392 8.1 Solids 392 8.2 Liquids 402 8.3 Gases 405 8.3.1 Ideal Gas Law 405 References 409 A Approximate Methods for Natural Frequency 410 A.1 Relationship between Fundamental Natural Frequency and Static Deflection 410 A.2 Rayleigh Technique 413 A.3 Dunkerley and Southwell Methods 415 A.4 Rayleigh–Ritz and Schmidt Approximations 415 A.5 Galerkin Procedure for Continuous Structures 416 References 417 B Numerical Integration of Newton’s Second Law 418 References 421 C Standard Octaves and Sound Pressure 422 C.1 Time History and Overall Sound Pressure 422 C.2 Peaks and Crest 423 C.3 Spectra and Spectral Density 424 C.4 Logarithmic Frequency Scales and Musical Tunings 424 C.5 Human Perception of Sound (Psychological Acoustics) 426 References 427 D Integrals Containing Mode Shapes of Single-Span Beams 429 Reference 429 E Finite Element Programs 435 E.1 Professional/Commercial Programs 435 E.2 Open Source /Low-Cost Programs 436 Index 439

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book explores the domain of reliability engineering in the context of machine tools. Failures of machine tools not only jeopardize users' ability to meet their due date commitments but also lead to poor quality of products, slower production, down time losses etc.Table of ContentsPreface xi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Basic Reliability Terms and Concepts 2 1.2 Machine Tool Failure 6 1.3 Machine Tool Reliability: Manufacturers’ View Point 7 1.4 Machine Tool Reliability: Users’ View Point 11 1.5 Organization of the Book 12 2 Basic Reliability Mathematics 17 2.1 Functions Describing Lifetime as a Random Variable 17 2.2 Probability Distributions Used in Reliability Engineering 21 2.2.1 Exponential Distribution 21 2.2.2 Weibull Distribution 22 2.2.3 Normal Distribution 23 2.2.4 The Lognormal Distribution 23 2.3 Life Data Analysis 24 2.3.1 Empirical Methods 27 2.3.2 Unbiased Estimation of Parameters 28 2.4 Stochastic Models for Repairable Systems 28 2.5 Simulation Approach for Reliability Engineering 31 2.6 Use of Bayesian Methods in Reliability Engineering 32 2.7 Closing Remarks 33 3 Machine Tool Performance Measures 35 3.1 Identifying Performance Measures 36 3.2 Mechanism to Link Users’ Operational Measures with Machine Reliability and Maintenance Parameters 41 3.2.1 Availability Model 42 3.2.2 Performance Rate Model 45 3.2.3 Quality Rate Model 46 3.3 Closing Remarks 53 4 Expert Judgement Based Parameter Estimation Method for Machine Tool Reliability Analysis 55 4.1 Expert Judgement as an Alternative Source of Data in Reliability Studies 57 4.2 Expert Judgement Based Parameter Estimation Methods 58 4.2.1 Non-Repairable Component 59 4.2.2 Repairable Assembly 74 4.3 Some Desirable Properties of A “Good” Estimator 79 4.4 Closing Remarks 80 5 Machine Tool Maintenance Scenarios, Models and Optimization 81 5.1 Overview of Maintenance 82 5.1.1 Maintenance Models 84 5.1.2 Maintenance Optimization Techniques 86 5.2 Machine Tool Maintenance 87 5.3 Machine Tool Maintenance Scenarios 89 5.4 Preventive Maintenance Optimization Models for Different Maintenance Scenarios 91 5.4.1 Preventive Maintenance Optimization in Maintenance Scenario 1 (MSc 1) (Replacement model) 93 5.4.2 Preventive Maintenance Optimization in Maintenance Scenario 2 (MSc 2) (Repair-Replacement Model) 99 5.4.3 Preventive Maintenance Optimization in Maintenance Scenario 3 (MSc 3) (Overhauling Model) 104 5.5 Closing Remarks 110 6 Reliability and Maintenance Based Design of Machine Tools 113 6.1 Optimal Reliability Design 115 6.2 Optimal reliability design of machine tools 122 6.2.1 Machine Tool Functional Design 126 6.2.1.1 Special Purpose Machine Tool Design 126 6.2.1.2 General Purpose Machine Tool Design 126 6.2.1.3 Customized Machine Tool Design 126 6.2.2 Simultaneous Optimization of Reliability and Maintenance Under Three Functional Design Scenarios 127 6.2.2.1 Simultaneous Optimization for Special Purpose Machine Tool 127 6.2.2.2 Simultaneous Optimization for General Purpose Machine Tool Design Scenario 133 6.2.2.3 Simultaneous Optimization for Customized Machine Tool Design 137 6.3 Failure Mode and Effects Analysis 139 6.3.1 Cost Based FMEA Approach 145 6.4 Closing Remarks 155 7 Machine Tool Maintenance and Process Quality Control 157 7.1 Development of Statistical Process Control (SPC) 158 7.2 Economic Design of Control Chart 159 7.3 Process failure 165 7.4 Joint Optimization of Maintenance Planning and Quality Control Policy 166 7.4.1 Problem Description 169 7.4.2 Assumptions and Conditions 171 7.4.3 Integration Approaches 172 7.5 Joint Optimization of Maintenance Planning and Quality Control Policy Using X -Control Chart 172 7.5.1 Expected Cost Model for Corrective Maintenance due to FC1 174 7.5.2 Expected Cost Per Preventive Maintenance for a System 176 7.5.3 Determination of the Expected Cost Associated with the Process Quality Control 177 7.5.3.1 Expected Process Cycle Length 178 7.5.3.2 Expected Process Quality Control Cost (E[Cprocess–failure]) Model 182 7.5.4 Numerical Illustration 185 7.5.4.1 Sensitivity Analysis 186 7.5.5 Comparative Study of Integrated Model with Stand-alone Models 190 7.5.5.1 Maintenance Models 190 7.5.5.2 Statistical Process Control (SPC) Model 191 7.5.5.3 Comparison of Results 191 7.6 Joint Optimization of Preventive Maintenance and Quality Policy Incorporating Taguchi Quadratic Loss Function 192 7.6.1 Optimization Model 193 7.6.2 Numerical Example 196 7.6.2.1 Sensitivity Analysis 198 7.7 Joint Optimization of Preventive Maintenance and Quality Policy based on Taguchi Quadratic Loss Function Using CUSUM Control Chart 200 7.7.1 Optimization Model 201 7.7.2 Numerical Example 203 7.8 Extension of the Joint Optimization of Maintenance Planning and Quality Control Policy for Multi-component System 207 7.8.1 Problem Description 207 7.8.2 Joint Optimization of Maintenance Planning and Quality Control Policy Using Taguchi Loss Function Approach for a Multi-component System 208 7.8.3 Expected Cost Model for Corrective Maintenance due to FC1 for Multicomponent 209 7.8.4 Expected Cost per Preventive Maintenance for Multi-component System 209 7.8.5 Expected Cost Model for Quality Loss due to Process Failure (E[TCQ]process-failure)M-C 210 7.8.6 Numerical Example 214 7.9 Closing Remarks 216 8 Joint Optimization of Integrated Maintenance Scheduling and Quality Control Policy with Production Scheduling 219 8.1 Production Scheduling 220 8.2 Exploring the Link Between Production Scheduling and Maintenance 226 8.3 The Optimal Scheduling Problem 231 8.3.1 Expression for Expected Penalty Cost Incurred due to Batch Schedule Tardiness 232 8.3.2 Expression for Inventory Carrying Cost of Raw Material 233 8.3.3 Optimization Problem for Batch Scheduling 234 8.4 Joint Optimization of Preventive Maintenance and Quality Control Policy 235 8.5 Integration of Production Scheduling with Jointly Optimized Preventive Maintenance and Quality Control Policy 235 8.5.1 Expression for Expected Penalty Cost Incurred due to Batch and Maintenance Delay 236 8.5.2 Expression for Inventory Carrying Cost of Raw Material for an Integrated Model 240 8.5.3 Joint Optimization of Preventive Maintenance and Quality Control Policy with Production Scheduling 241 8.6 Numerical Illustration 242 8.6.1 Solution Procedure for the Integrated Problem 244 8.7 Solving Larger Problem 247 8.7.1 The Backward Forward Heuristic Algorithm 247 8.7.2 Genetic Algorithm 252 8.7.3 Numerical Illustration for Integrated Model for Large Number of Batches 252 8.8 Extension of the Integrated Approach Multiple Machine in Series 257 8.9 Closing Remarks 263 9 Machine Tool Reliability: Future Research Directions 267 9.1 Moving towards Servitization 268 9.2 Multi Agent-Based Systems 271 9.3 Closing Remarks 274 References 277 Appendices Appendix A1: Java Code for Estimating Expected Number of Failures 297 Appendix A2: ‘MATLAB’ Genetic Algorithm Code for Joint Optimization of Production Scheduling and Maintenance Planning 303 Index 309

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis issue contains 13 papers from The American Ceramic Society's 38th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 26-31, 2014 presented in Symposium 3 - 12th International Symposium on Solid Oxide Fuel Cells: Materials, Science, and Technology.Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix SOFC as the Central Control and Essential Supply of a Plant Factory AKA Vertical Farming 1Ling-yuan Tseng, Shun-yu Wang, Vincent Chang, Ming-fu Chu, and Terry T.T. Chen High-Temperature Direct Fuel Cell Material Experience 9Chao-Yi Yuh and Mohammad Farooque Recoverable Performance of Plasma-Sprayed Metal-Supported Solid Oxide Fuel Cell 23Chang-Sing Hwang, Chun-Huang Tsai, Chun-Liang Chang, Chih-Ming Chuang, Sheng-Fu Yang, Shih-Wei Cheng, Zong-Yang Chuang Shie, and Ruey-Yi Lee Investigation of Carbon Deposition Behavior on Ferritic Alloys in Low S/C Ratio using Direct Heating Method 33Takuya Ito, Kenjiro Fujita, Yoshio Matsuzaki, Mitsutoshi Ueda, and Toshio Maruyama Interaction of Perovskite Type Lanthanum-Calcium-Chromites-Titanates La1-xCaxCr1-yTiyO3-_ with Solid Electrolyte Materials 44Charif Belda, Egle Dietzen, Mihails Kusnezoff, Nikolai Trofimenko, Uladimir Vashook, Alexander Michaelis, and Ulrich Guth Synthesis of SmBa0.5Sr0.5Co2O5+_ Powder and Its Application as Composite Cathode for Intermediate Temperature Solid Oxide Fuel Cell 55Tai-Nan Lin, Maw-Chwain Lee, and Ruey-yi Lee Characterization and Performance of a High-Temperature Glass Sealant for Solid Oxide Fuel Cell 65Chien-Kuo Liu, Ruey-Yi Lee, Kun-Chao Tsai, Szu-Han Wu, and Kin-Fu Lin Adjustment of Process Parameters for Attaining a Dense Gadolinium-Doped Ceria Layer for the Production of Microtubular SOFC Cells 77K. Paciejewska, S. Kühn, and S. Mnich Stability Testing Beyond 1000 Hours of Solid Oxide Cells under Steam Electrolysis Operation 87Josef Schefold and Annabelle Brisse Low Temperature Operable Micro-Tubular SOFCs using Gd Doped Ceria Electrolyte and Ni Based Anode 97Toshio Suzuki, Toshiaki Yamaguchi, Hirofumi Sumi, Koichi Hamamoto, and Yoshinobu Fujishiro Fabrication and Characterization of a Micro-Reformer Unit Fully Integrated in Silicon for Ethanol Conversion 105D. Pla, M. Salleras, I. Garbayo, A. Morata, N. Sabaté, N.J. Divins, J. Llorca, and A. Tarancón High-Temperature Long-Term Stable Ordered Mesoporous Electrodes for IT-SOFC 111Laura Almar, Marc Torrell, Alex Morata, Lluís Yedra, Sonia Estradé, Francesca Peiró, Teresa Andreu, and Albert Tarancón Author Index 117

Read more less

Book SynopsisOver 170 contributions (invited talks, oral presentations, and posters) were presented by participants from universities, research institutions, and industry, which offered interdisciplinary discussions indicating strong scientific and technological interest in the field of nanostructured systems. This issue contains 23 peer-reviewed papers that cover various aspects and the latest developments related to nanoscaled materials and functional ceramics.Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi MULTIFUNCTIONAL MATERIALS Oxynitride Glasses as Grain Boundary Phases in Silicon Nitride: Correlations of Chemistry and Properties 3Stuart Hampshire Preparation and Properties of Aluminosilicate Glasses Containing N and F 15Michael J. Pomeroy Comparison of Conventional and Microwave Sintering of Bioceramics 23Anne Leriche, Etienne Savary, Anthony Thuault, Jean-Christophe Hornez, Michel Descamps, and Sylvain Marinel A Novel Additive Manufacturing Technology for High-Performance Ceramics 33Johannes Homa and Martin Schwentenwein Characterization of Matrix Materials for Additive Manufacturing of Silicon Carbide-Based Composites 41Mrityunjay Singh, Michael C. Halbig, and Shirley X. Zhu An Industrial Microwave (Hybrid) System for In-Line Processing of High Temperature Ceramics 49Ramesh D. Peelamedu and Donald A. Seccombe Jr. Comparison of Properties of YSZ Prepared by Microwave and Conventional Processing 61Kanchan L. Singh, Anirudh P. Singh, Ajay Kumar, and S.S. Sekhon Diffusion Bonding and Interfacial Characterization of Sintered Fiber Bonded Silicon Carbide Ceramics using Boron–Molybdenum Interlayers 73H. Tsuda, S. Mori, M. C. Halbig, M. Singh, and R. Asthana Mechanical Behavior of Green Ceramic Tapes used in a Viscoelastic Shaping Process 81Ming-Jen Pan, Stephanie Wimmer, and Virginia DeGiorgi Mechanical Behavior of Foamed Insulating Ceramics 89Vania R. Salvini, Dirceu Spinelli, and Victor C. Pandolfelli Stress Estimation for Multiphase Ceramics Laminates during Sintering 101Kouichi Yasuda,Tadachika Nakayama, and Satoshi Tanaka Advanced Measurements of Indentation Fracture Resistance of Alumina by the Powerful Optical Microscopy for Small Ceramic Products 107Hiroyuki Miyazaki and Yu-ichi Yoshizawa The Microstructure and Dielectric Properties of Sm2O3 Doped Ba0.6Sr0.4TiO3-MgO Compound for Phase Shifters 115Xiaohong Wang, Mengjie Wang, and Wenzhong Lu Dielectric Properties of BaTiO3 Ceramics and Curie-Weiss and Modified Curie-Weiss Affected by Fractal Morphology 123 NANOSTRUCTURED MATERIALS Understanding Diamond Nanoparticle Evolution during Zirconia Spark Plasma Sintering 137Kathy Lu, Wenle Li, and George Li Influence of Ti4+ on the Energetics and Microstructure of SnO2 Nanoparticles 145Joice Miagava, Douglas Gouvêa, Ricardo H. R. Castro, and Alexandra NavrotskyAnnealing Effect on the Structural, Morphological, and Photovoltaic Properties of ZnO-CNTs Nanocomposite Thin Films 153Huda Abdullah, Azimah Omar, Izamarlina Asshaari, Mohd Ambar Yarmo, Mohd Zikri Razali, Sahbudin Shaari, Savisha Mahalingam, and Aisyah Bolhan Investigation of Multilayer Superhard Ti-Hf-Si-N/NbN/Al2O3 Coatings for High Performance Protection 163A. D. Pogrebnjak, A. S. Kaverina, V. M. Beresnev, Y. Takeda, K. Oyoshi, H. Murakami, A. P. Shypylenko, M. G. Kovaleva, M.S. Prozorova, O. V. Kolisnichenko, B. Zholybekov, and D. A. Kolesnikov Influence of the Structure and Elemental Composition on the Physical and Mechanical Properties of (TiZrHfVNb)N Nanostructured Coatings 173A. D. Pogrebnjak, I. V. Yakushchenko, O. V. Bondar, A. A. Bagdasaryan, V. M. Beresnev, D.A. Kolesnikov, G. Abadias, P. Chartier, Y. Takeda, and M. O. Bilokur Effects of Mg Contents on ZnAl2O4 Thin Films by Sol Gel Method and Its Application 185Huda Abdullah, Wan Nasarudin Wan Jalal, Mohd Syafiq Zulfakar, Badariah Bais, Sahbudin Shaari, Mohammad Tariqul Islam, and Sarada Idris Synthesis and Characterization of Si-Doped Carbon Nanotubes 197Qi Zhen, Shaoming Dong, Yanmei Kan, Yue Leng, Jianbao Hu Structural and Morphology of Zn1-xCuxS Films as Anti-Reflecting Coating (ARC) Affected the Cell Performance 205Huda Abdullah, Ili Salwani, and Sahbudin Saari Nanoceramics Processing: Revolutionizing Medicine 213Qi Wang and Thomas J. Webster Author Index 219

Read more less

Book SynopsisA collection of 14 papers from The American Ceramic Society's 38th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 26-31, 2014. This issue includes papers presented in Symposia 6 - Advanced Materials and Technologies for Energy Generation, Conversion, and Rechargeable Energy Storage and Symposium 13 - Advanced Ceramics and Composites for Sustainable Nuclear Energy and Fusion Energy.Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix CERAMICS FOR ENERGY STORAGE AND CONVERSION Towards the Conversion of a Solid Oxide Cell into a High Temperature Battery 3C. M. Berger, O. Tokariev, P. Orzessek, A. Hospach, N. H. Menzler, M. Bram, W. J. Quadakkers, and H.-P. Buchkremer Design and Fabrication of All-Solid-State Rechargeable Lithium Batteries for Future Applications 13Mao Shoji, Jungo Wakasugi, Ryo Osone, Teruaki Nishioka, Hirokazu Munakata, and Kiyoshi Kanamura Nanostructured LiCoO2 Cathode by Hydrothermal Process 23Kuan-Zong Fung, Chung-Ta Ni, Su-Yi Tsai, Mei-Han Chen, A. F. Orliukas, and Gunars Bajars Thermoelectric Properties of Na0.8Co1-xFexO2 Ceramic Prepared by Spark Plasma Sintering 35Cong Chen, Tianshu Zhang, Richard Donelson, Dewei Chu, Thiam Teck Tan, and Sean Li Effects of Sintering Temperature on Thermoelectric Properties of Nanocrystalline Ca0.9Yb0.1MnO3 Prepared by Co-Precipitation Method 43Rezaul Kabir, Ruoming Tian, Danyang Wang, Richard Donelson, Thiam Teck Tan, and Sean Li Effect of Film Thickness on the Photocatalytic Performance of TiO2 Thin Films Deposited by Spin Coating 51W.F. Chen, P. Koshy, B. Zhu, and C.C. Sorrell Effect of Heat Treatment Temperature on Properties of Nanocrystalline, Photoactive, Titania, Thin Films on Polymer and Fused Quartz 61Huynh Chau Pham, Pramod Koshy, Julian Michael Cox, and Charles Christopher Sorrell Development of Electro-Optical Single Crystals for Energy Saving 77Kiyoshi Shimamura, Stelian Arjoca, and Encarnación G. Víllora, Daisuke Inomata, Kazuo Aoki, Akiharu Funaki, Tsubasa Hatanaka, Takeshi Kizaki, and Kunihiro Naoe CERAMICS AND COMPOSITES FOR NUCLEAR ENERGY Modeling Structural Loading of Used Nuclear Fuel under Conditions of Normal Transportation 95Kenneth Geelhood, Harold Adkins, Scott Sanborn, Brian Koeppel, and Nicholas Klymyshyn Flexural Strength of Composite Tubes for SMR Applications using Pure Bending: Draft ASTM Test Method 111Michael G. Jenkins, Janine E. Gallego, and Thomas Nguyen Hoop Tensile Strength of Ceramic Matrix Composite Tubes for LWRS Applications using Elastomeric Inserts: Draft ASTM Test Method 119Michael G. Jenkins and Jonathan A. Salem Ceramic Matrix Composites in Ti-B-Cr and Ti-B-Nb Systems Fabricated “In Situ” by Self-Propagating High-Temperature Synthesis 127Marta Ziemnicka-Sylwester Comparison of Shear Strength of Ceramic Joints Determined by Various Test Methods With Small Specimens 139Chunghao Shih, Yutai Katoh, Jim O. Kiggans, Takaaki Koyanagi, Hesham E. Khalifa, Christina A. Back, Tatsuya Hinoki, and Monica Ferraris Processing and Characterization of Diffusion-Bonded Silicon Carbide Joints using Molybdenum and Titanium Interlayers 151Takaaki Koyanagi, James Kiggans, Chunghao Shih, and Yutai Katoh Author Index 161

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis issue contains 31 papers from The American Ceramic Society''s 38th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 26-31, 2014. This issue includes papers presented in the following Symposia and Focused Sessions: Symposium 2 Advanced Ceramic Coatings for Structural, Environmental, and Functional Applications; Symposium 10 Virtual Materials (Computational) Design and Ceramic Genome; Symposium 11 Advanced Materials and Innovative Processing Ideas for the Industrial Root Technology; Symposium 12 Materials for Extreme Environments: Ultrahigh Temperature Ceramics and Nanolaminated Ternary Carbides and Nitrides; Focused Session 1 - Geopolymers and Chemically Bonded Ceramics; Focused Session 2 Advanced Ceramic Materials and Processing for Photonics and Energy; Focused Session 3 Rare Earth Oxides for Energy, Optical and Biomedical Applications, Focused Session 4 Ion-Transport Membranes; 3rd Global Pacific Rim Engineering CeraTable of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi GEOPOLYMERS AND CHEMICALLY BONDED CERAMICS NaBH4 Geopolymer Composites 3Lars Schomborg, Claus H. Rüscher, J. Christian Buhl, and Florian Kiesel In Situ Carbothermal Reduction/Nitridation Carbon-Nano Powder Added Geopolymer Composites 15Cengiz Bagci, Greg Kutyla, and Waltraud M. Kriven Effect of Si/K Ratio Alkaline Solutions on Mechanical Properties of Geomaterial Compounds 29A. Autef, E. Joussein, G. Gasgnier, and S. Rossignol Sodium Geopolymer Reinforced with Jute Weave 39Kaushik Sankar and Waltraud M. Kriven Potassium Geopolymer Reinforced with Alkali-Treated Fique 61Kaushik Sankar and Waltraud M. Kriven Design of Wool-Geopolymer Pots 79A. Natali Murri, E. Papa, V. Medri, and E. Landi Rice Husk Ash as a Silica Source in a Geopolymer Formulation 87Un Haeng Heo, Kaushik Sankar, Waltraud M. Kriven, and Sean S. Musil Alumina-Based Phosphate Cement 103Henry A. Colorado and Jenn-Ming Yang Investigation of Ettringite Binder Hydration at Early Age for Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Application 111Elodie Prud’homme, Ngoc Lam Nguyen, Marie Michel, Jean-François Georgin, and Jean Ambroise ADVANCED CERAMIC COATINGS Air Plasma Sprayed Catalytic Coatings for DeNOX Applications 127A. Moscatelli, F. Cernuschi, M. Notaro, and S. Capelli Solid Particle Erosion of TBCs: Jet Tester Modeling and Erosion Forecasts 139F. Cernuschi and L. Augello La2Zr2O7 (LZ) Coatings by Liquid Feedstock Plasma Spraying: The Role of Precursors 151William Duarte, Sylvie Rossignol, and Michel Vardelle High Velocity Suspension Flame Spraying of Nano-Structured Materials and Related Industrial Applications 161A. Killinger, A. Rempp, P. Müller, P. Krieg, and R. Gadow Microstructure and High-Strength Glass-Ceramic Coatings 169Marcin Gajek, Janusz Partyka, and Jerzy Lis Investigation of Surface Geometry Thermal Barrier Coatings using Computed X-Ray Tomography 175Navid Asadizanjani, Sina Shahbazmohamadi, and Eric H. Jordan Fabrication of Nanostructure Ba(1-x)Co(x)TiO3 Thin Films Synthesized by Sol-Gel Method for Patch Antenna Application 189Huda Abdullah, Noor Atikah Abdullah, Mohd Syafiq Zulfakar, and Wan Nasarudin Wan Jalal ADVANCED MATERIALS AND INNOVATIVE PROCESSING FOR INDUSTRIAL ROOT TECHNOLOGY Fast Infiltration Process for In-Line Continuous Siliconization 203M. Chiodi and M. Valle Preparation of CrN-Ni Composites by Hot Press Sintering 211T. Fukushima, H. Asami, T. Suzuki, T. Nakayama, H. Suematsu, and K. Niihara Fabrication and Electrical Properties of Cup-Stacked Carbon Nanotubes/Polymer Nanocomposite Films as an Electrode Sensor for Brain-Wave Detection 219Minh Triet Tan Huynh, Hong-Baek Cho, Tadachika Nakayama, Son Thanh Nguyen, Hisayuki Suematsu, Tsuneo Suzuki, Weihua Jiang, and Koichi Niihara Peen Forming of Ceramics – A New Chipless Shaping Technique 229Wulf Pfeiffer and Heiko Höpfel Differences in Pyrocarbon Matrices Made by FB-CVI with Organic Precursors 237Inacio Regiani, Renan Lima Novais, and João Jorge Sousa dos Santos Optimization of the Industrial Synthesis of Silicon Carbide-Reaction Bonded Silicon Nitride (SiC-RBSN) 245Massimo Rosa, Francesco Casaril, Massimiliano Valle, and Stefano Poli MATERIALS FOR EXTREME ENVIRONMENTS: ULTRAHIGH TEMPERATURE CERAMICS AND NANOLAMINATED TERNARY CARBIDES AND NITRIDES Comparison of the Oxidation Protection of HfB2 based Ultra-High Temperature Ceramics by the Addition of SiC or MoSi2 261C.M. Carney and T.S. Key Densification and Mechanical Properties of ZrB2-TiB2 Ultra High Temperature Ceramic Composites 275N. S. Karthiselva, B. S. Murty and Srinivasa Rao Bakshi VIRTUAL MATERIALS (COMPUTATIONAL) DESIGN AND CERAMIC GENOME Simulations of Anisotropic Grain Growth Subject to Thermal Gradients using Q-State Monte Carlo 289J. B. Allen ADVANCED CERAMIC MATERIALS AND PROCESSING FOR PHOTONICS AND ENERGY Highly Photosensitive Fiber Fabricated from Photo-Thermo-Refractive Glass 305Khawlah Al Yahyaei, Peter Hofmann, Clémence Jollivet, Amy Van Newkirk, Rodrigo Amezcua-Correa, Enrique Antonio-Lopez, Daniel Ott, Marc SeGall, Ivan Divliansky, Larissa Glebova, Leonid Glebov, Alan Kost, and Axel Schülzgen RARE EARTH OXIDES Investigation of the Influence of CuO and SnO Doping on the Luminescence of Dy3+ Ions in Phosphate Glass 315José A. Jiménez and Logan Haney ION-TRANSPORT MEMBRANES Manufacturing and Performance of Supported BSCF-Membranes for Oxygen Separation 325Patrick Niehoff, Falk Schulze-Küppers, Stefan Baumann, Robert Vaßen, Hans-Peter Buchkremer, and Wilhelm A. Meulenberg 2nd PACIFIC RIM ENGINEERING CERAMICS SUMMIT Energy Efficiency Challenges Addressed Through the Use of Advanced Refractory Ceramic Materials 339James G. Hemrick Challenges in Model Development for Estimating Internal Stress of Ceramic Laminates During Sintering 349Kouichi Yasuda 3rd GLOBAL YOUNG INVESTIGATORS FORUM Mechanical Reinforcement of Copper Films with Ceramic Nanoparticles 361Annika Leifert, Nasser Mohamed-Noriega, Andreas Meier, Giovanni Mondin, Susanne Dörfler, Julia Grothe, Stefan Kaskel, Benjamin Schumm, Christian Nowka, Silke Hampel, and E. López Cuéllar Author Index 367

Read more less

Book SynopsisA collection of 15 papers from The American Ceramic Society's 38th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 26-31, 2014. This issue includes papers presented in Symposium 5 - Next Generation Bioceramics and Biocomposites and Symposium 9 - Porous Ceramics: Novel Developments and Applications.Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix BIOCERAMICS Influence of the Hydroxyapatite Powder Properties on Its Properties Rheology Behavior 3Y.M.Z. Ahmed, S.M. El-Sheikh, and Z.I. Zaki Nanostructural Ca-Aluminate Based Biomaterials—An Overview 13Leif Hermansson and Jesper Lööf Antimicrobial Effects of Formable Gelatinous Hydroxyapatite-Calcium Silicate Nanocomposites for Biomedical Applications 25Hsin Chen, Dong-Joon Lee, He Zhang, Roland Arnold, and Ching-Chang Ko Use of Inter-Fibril Spaces among Electrospun Fibrils as Ion-Fixation and Nano-Crystallization 33Yuki Shirosaki, Satoshi Hayakawa, Yuri Nakamura, Hiroki Yoshihara, Akiyoshi Osaka, and Artemis Stamboulis Fractographic Analysis of Broken Ceramic Dental Restorations 39G. D. Quinn In Vivo Evaluation of Scaffolds with a Grid-Like Microstructure Composed of a Mixture of Silicate (13-93) and Borate (13-93B3) Bioactive Glasses 53Yifei Gu, Wenhai Huang, and Mohamed N. Rahaman Osteoconductive and Osteoinductive Implants Composed of Hollow Hydroxyapatite Microspheres 65Mohamed N. Rahaman, Wei Xiao, Yongxing Liu, and B. Sonny Bal Deposition of Amorphous CaP on Pure Titanium in DMEM at 37°C 81A. Cuneyt Tas One-Pot Synthesis of Monodisperse Nanospheres of Amorphous Calcium Phosphate (ACP) in a Simple Biomineralization Medium 93A. Cuneyt Tas POROUS CERAMICS Determination of Elastic Moduli for Porous SOFC Cathode Films using Nanoindentation and FEM 111Zhangwei Chen, Finn Giuliani, and Alan Atkinson Mechanical Modeling of Microcracked Porous Ceramics 129Ray S. Fertig III and Seth Nickerson Synthesis and Characterization of Aerogel Glass Materials for Window Glazing Applications 141Tao Gao, Bjørn Petter Jelle, Arild Gustavsen, and Jianying He Reticulated Ceramics under Bending: The Non-Linear Regime before Their Catastrophic Failure 151Ehsan Rezaei, Giovanni Bianchi, Alberto Ortona, and Sandro Gianella Novel Low Temperature Ceramics for CO2 Capture 165Hutha Sarma and Steven Ogunwumi Effects of SiC Particle Size and Sintering Temperature on Microstructure of Porous SiC Ceramics Based on In-Situ Grain Growth 173Katsumi Yoshida, Chin-Chet See, Satoshi Yokoyama, and Toyohiko Yano Author Index 185

Read more less

Book SynopsisA collection of 14 papers from the Armor Ceramics symposium held during The American Ceramic Society''s 38th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 26-31, 2014.Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix Testing Method for Ceramic Armor and Bare Ceramic Tiles 1Erik Carton and Geert Roebroeks Effects of Novel Geometric Designs on the Ballistic Performance of Ceramics 13P. Karandikar, B. Givens, A. Liszkiewicz, S. Wong, and M. Aghajanian Surface Modification of Ballistic Ceramic and Composite Materials by use of Atmospheric Pressure Plasma 23Lionel Vargas-Gonzalez, Victor Rodriguez-Santiago, and Andres A. Bujanda Evaluating the Rock Strike Resistance of Transparent Armor Materials 37Brandon S. Aldinger Ballistic Damage of Alumina Ceramics–Learning from Fragments 49Houzheng Wu, Santonu Ghosh, Claire E.J. Dancer, and Richard I. Todd Characterization of Silicon Carbide Microstructure using Nondestructive Ultrasound Techniques 63V. DeLucca and R. A. Haber Dynamic Electromechanical Response of 4H and 6H Single Crystal Silicon Carbide 75Leslie Lamberson On Microstructure and Electronic Properties of Boron Carbide 87Helmut Werheit Assessing the Carbon Concentration in Boron Carbide: A Combined X-Ray Diffraction and Chemical Analysis 103Kanak Kuwelkar, Vladislav Domnich, and Richard Haber The Effect of SiO2 and B2O3 Additives on the Microstructure and Hardness of Hot-Pressed Boron Carbide 111K. D. Behler, A. Z. Hutchinson III, and J. C. LaSalvia Processing of Boron Rich Boron Carbide by Boron Doping 119Tyler Munhollon, Kanak Kuwelkar, and Rich Haber Densification of Commercial and Rapid Carbothermal Synthesized Boron Carbide 129M. Fatih Toksoy, William Rafaniello, and Richard Haber Optimization of the Spark Plasma Sintering Condition for Transparent Polycrystalline Magnesium Aluminate Spinel 137Minh Vu and Richard Haber A Non-Gruneisen Equations of State for Hydrocode 145Michael Grinfeld Author Index 157

Read more less

Book SynopsisA practical, step-by-step guide to total systems management Systems Engineering Management, Fifth Edition is a practical guide to the tools and methodologies used in the field. Using a total systems management approach, this book covers everything from initial establishment to system retirement, including design and development, testing, production, operations, maintenance, and support. This new edition has been fully updated to reflect the latest tools and best practices, and includes rich discussion on computer-based modeling and hardware and software systems integration. New case studies illustrate real-world application on both large- and small-scale systems in a variety of industries, and the companion website provides access to bonus case studies and helpful review checklists. The provided instructor''s manual eases classroom integration, and updated end-of-chapter questions help reinforce the material.The challenges faced by system engineers are candidly addressTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 Introduction to System Engineering 1 1.1 Definition of a System / 2 1.1.1 The Characteristics of a System / 2 1.1.2 Categories of Systems / 5 1.1.3 System of Systems (SOS) / 8 1.2 The Current Environment: Some Challenges / 9 1.3 The Need for System Engineering / 15 1.3.1 The System Life Cycle / 16 1.3.2 Definition of System Engineering / 18 1.3.3 Requirements for System Engineering / 25 1.3.4 System Architecture / 26 1.3.5 System Science / 26 1.3.6 System Analysis / 27 1.3.7 Some Additional System Models / 28 1.3.8 System Engineering in the Life Cycle (Some Applications) / 32 1.4 Related Terms and Definitions / 34 1.4.1 Concurrent/Simultaneous Engineering / 35 1.4.2 Some Major Supporting Design Disciplines / 36 1.4.3 Logistics and Supply-Chain Management (SCM) / 38 1.4.4 Integrated System Maintenance and Support / 40 1.4.5 Data and Information Management / 43 1.4.6 Configuration Management (CM) / 44 1.4.7 Total Quality Management (TQM) / 45 1.4.8 Total System Value and Life-Cycle Cost (LCC) / 45 1.4.9 Some Additional Terms And Definitions / 46 1.5 System Engineering Management / 47 1.6 Summary / 51 Questions and Problems / 51 2 The System Engineering Process 53 2.1 Definition of the Problem (Current Deficiency) / 55 2.2 System Requirements (Needs Analysis) / 56 2.3 System Feasibility Analysis / 57 2.4 System Operational Requirements / 59 2.5 The Logistics and Maintenance Support Concept / 62 2.6 Identification and Prioritization of Technical Performance Measures (TPMs) / 69 2.7 Functional Analysis / 74 2.7.1 Functional Flow Block Diagrams (FFBDs) / 77 2.7.2 Operational Functions / 80 2.7.3 Maintenance and Support Functions / 80 2.7.4 Application of Functional Analysis / 81 2.7.5 Interfaces with Other Systems in a SOS Configuration / 88 2.8 Requirements Allocation / 90 2.8.1 Functional Packaging and Partitioning / 90 2.8.2 Allocation of System-Level Requirements to the Subsystem Level and Below / 92 2.8.3 Traceability of Requirements (Top-Down/Bottom-Up) / 95 2.8.4 Allocation of Requirements in a SOS Configuration / 95 2.9 System Synthesis, Analysis, and Design Optimization / 97 2.10 Design Integration / 105 2.11 System Test and Evaluation / 108 2.11.1 Categories of Test and Evaluation / 110 2.11.2 Integrated Test Planning / 112 2.11.3 Preparation for Test and Evaluation / 113 2.11.4 Test Performance, Data Collection, Analysis, and Validation / 115 2.11.5 System Modifications / 115 2.12 Production and/or Construction / 117 2.13 System Operational Use and Sustaining Support / 118 2.14 System Retirement and Material Recycling/Disposal / 120 2.15 Summary / 121 Questions and Problems / 122 3 System Design Requirements 125 3.1 Development of Design Requirements and Design-To Criteria / 128 3.2 Development of Specifications / 129 3.3 The Integration of System Design Activities / 135 3.4 Selected Design Engineering Disciplines / 139 3.4.1 Software Engineering / 139 3.4.2 Reliability Engineering / 144 3.4.3 Maintainability Engineering / 159 3.4.4 Human-Factors Engineering / 174 3.4.5 Safety Engineering / 185 3.4.6 Security Engineering / 187 3.4.7 Manufacturing and Production Engineering / 189 3.4.8 Logistics and Supportability Engineering / 191 3.4.9 Disposability Engineering / 199 3.4.10 Quality Engineering / 200 3.4.11 Environmental Engineering / 204 3.4.12 Value/Cost Engineering (Life-Cycle Costing) / 207 3.5 SOS Integration and Interoperability Requirements / 215 3.6 Summary / 216 Questions and Problems / 219 4 Engineering Design Methods and Tools 223 4.1 Conventional Design Practices / 225 4.2 Analytical Methods / 228 4.3 Information Technology, the Internet, and Emerging Technologies / 229 4.4 Current Design Technologies and Tools / 231 4.4.1 The Use of Simulation in System Engineering / 235 4.4.2 The Use of Rapid Prototyping / 235 4.4.3 The Use of Mock-Ups / 236 4.5 Computer-Aided Design (CAD) / 237 4.6 Computer-Aided Manufacturing (CAM) / 245 4.7 Computer-Aided Support (CAS) / 246 4.8 Summary / 248 Questions and Problems / 249 5 Design Review and Evaluation 251 5.1 Design Review and Evaluation Requirements / 252 5.2 Informal Day-to-Day Review and Evaluation / 256 5.3 Formal Design Reviews / 262 5.3.1 Conceptual Design Review / 264 5.3.2 System Design Reviews / 265 5.3.3 Equipment/Software Design Reviews / 266 5.3.4 Critical Design Review / 267 5.4 The Design Change and System Modification Process / 269 5.5 Supplier Review and Evaluation / 272 5.6 Summary / 274 Questions and Problems / 274 6 System Engineering Program Planning 275 6.1 System Engineering Program Requirements / 278 6.1.1 The Need for Early System Planning / 278 6.1.2 Determination of Program Requirements / 280 6.2 System Engineering Management Plan (SEMP) / 282 6.2.1 Statement of Work / 285 6.2.2 Definition of System Engineering Functions and Tasks / 286 6.2.3 System Engineering Organization / 293 6.2.4 Development of a Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) / 296 6.2.5 Specification/Documentation Tree / 303 6.2.6 Technical Performance Measures (TPM) / 309 6.2.7 Development of Program Schedules / 310 6.2.8 Preparation of Cost Projections / 324 6.2.9 Program Technical Reviews and Audits / 328 6.2.10 Program Reporting Requirements / 329 6.3 Determination of Outsourcing Requirements / 332 6.3.1 Identification of Potential Suppliers / 334 6.3.2 Development of a Request for Proposal (RFP) / 336 6.3.3 Review and Evaluation of Supplier Proposals / 337 6.3.4 Selection of Suppliers and Contract Negotiation / 344 6.3.5 Supplier Monitoring and Control / 351 6.4 Integration of Design Specialty Plans / 353 6.5 Interfaces with Other Program Activities / 355 6.5.1 Interface Management / 359 6.6 Management Methods/Tools / 360 6.7 Risk Management Plan / 361 6.8 Global Applications/Relationships / 366 6.9 Summary / 367 Questions and Problems / 369 7 Organization for System Engineering 372 7.1 Developing the Organizational Structure / 373 7.2 Customer, Producer, and Supplier Relationships / 374 7.3 Customer Organization and Functions / 376 7.4 Producer Organization and Functions (the Contractor) / 378 7.4.1 Functional Organization Structure / 379 7.4.2 Product-Line/Project Organization Structure / 383 7.4.3 Matrix Organizational Structure / 384 7.4.4 Integrated Product and Process Development (IPPD) / 387 7.4.5 Integrated Product/Process Teams (IPTs) / 389 7.4.6 System Engineering Organization / 390 7.5 Tailoring the Process / 396 7.5.1 Tailoring the Process / 400 7.5.2 Middle-Out Approach / 401 7.5.3 Managing from the Middle / 404 7.6 Supplier Organization and Functions / 406 7.6.1 Mapping Organization and Systems Structures / 409 7.7 Human Resource Requirements / 411 7.7.1 Creating the Proper Organizational Environment / 411 7.7.2 Leadership Characteristics / 414 7.7.3 The Needs of the Individual / 415 7.7.4 Staffing the Organization / 419 7.7.5 Personnel Development and Training / 421 7.8 Summary / 423 Questions and Problems / 424 8 System Engineering Program Evaluation 426 8.1 Evaluation Requirements / 428 8.2 Benchmarking / 428 8.3 Evaluation of the System Engineering Organization / 431 8.4 Program Reporting, Feedback, and Control / 437 8.5 Summary / 438 Questions and Problems / 439 Appendix A Functional Analysis (Case-Study Examples) 440 Appendix B Cost Process and Models 447 Appendix C Selected Case Studies (Nine Examples) 481 Appendix D Design Review Checklist 529 Appendix E Supplier Evaluation Checklist 530 Appendix F Selected Bibliography 531 Index 539

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis introductory book covers the most fundamental aspects of linear vibration analysis for mechanical engineering students and engineers. Consisting of five major topics, each has its own chapter and is aligned with five major objectives of the book.Table of ContentsSeries Preface ix Preface xi 1 A Crash Course on Lagrangian Dynamics 1 1.1 Objectives 1 1.2 Concept of "Equation of Motion" 1 1.3 Generalized Coordinates 5 1.4 Admissible Variations 13 1.5 Degrees of Freedom 16 1.6 Virtual Work and Generalized Forces 17 1.7 Lagrangian 24 1.8 Lagrange’s Equation 24 1.9 Procedure for Deriving Equation(s) of Motion 24 1.10 Worked Examples 25 1.10.1 Systems Containing Only Particles 25 1.10.2 Systems Containing Rigid Bodies 38 1.11 Linearization of Equations of Motion 57 1.11.1 Equilibrium Position(s) 58 1.11.2 Linearization 59 1.11.3 Observations and Further Discussions 62 1.12 Chapter Summary 63 2 Vibrations of Single-DOF Systems 81 2.1 Objectives 81 2.2 Types of Vibration Analyses 81 2.3 Free Vibrations of Undamped System 83 2.3.1 General Solution for Homogeneous Differential Equation 83 2.3.2 Basic Vibration Terminologies 85 2.3.3 Determining Constants via Initial Conditions 87 2.4 Free Vibrations of Damped Systems 93 2.5 Using Normalized Equation of Motion 94 2.5.1 Normalization of Equation of Motion 94 2.5.2 Classification of Vibration Systems 95 2.5.3 Free Vibration of Underdamped Systems 96 2.5.4 Free Vibration of Critically Damped System 100 2.5.5 Free Vibration of Overdamped System 102 2.6 Forced Vibrations I: Steady-State Responses 108 2.6.1 Harmonic Loading 108 2.6.2 Mechanical Significance of Steady-State Solution 110 2.6.3 Other Examples of Harmonic Loading 115 2.6.4 General Periodic Loading 124 2.7 Forced Vibrations II: Transient Responses 133 2.7.1 Transient Response to Periodic Loading 134 2.7.2 General Loading: Direct Analytical Method 139 2.7.3 Laplace Transform Method 146 2.7.4 Decomposition Method 150 2.7.5 Convolution Integral Method 158 2.8 Chapter Summary 172 2.8.1 Free Vibrations of Single-DOF Systems 172 2.8.2 Steady-State Responses of Single-DOF Systems 173 2.8.3 Transient Responses of Single-DOF Systems 174 3 Lumped-Parameter Modeling 186 3.1 Objectives 186 3.2 Modeling 186 3.3 Idealized Elements 187 3.3.1 Mass Elements 187 3.3.2 Spring Elements 188 3.3.3 Damping Elements 189 3.4 Lumped-Parameter Modeling of Simple Components and Structures 190 3.4.1 Equivalent Spring Constants 191 3.4.2 Equivalent Masses 204 3.4.3 Damping Models 212 3.5 Alternative Methods 218 3.5.1 Castigliano Method for Equivalent Spring Constants 218 3.5.2 Rayleigh–Ritz Method for Equivalent Masses 223 3.5.3 Rayleigh–Ritz Method for Equivalent Spring Constants 227 3.5.4 Rayleigh–Ritz Method for Natural Frequencies 230 3.5.5 Determining Lumped Parameters Through Experimental Measurements 231 3.6 Examples with Lumped-Parameter Models 233 3.7 Chapter Summary 252 4 Vibrations of Multi-DOF Systems 269 4.1 Objectives 269 4.2 Matrix Equation of Motion 269 4.3 Modal Analysis: Natural Frequencies and Mode Shapes 273 4.4 Free Vibrations 284 4.4.1 Free Vibrations of Undamped Systems 284 4.4.2 Free Vibrations of Undamped Unconstrained Systems 293 4.4.3 Free Vibrations of Systems of Many DOFs 296 4.5 Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors 305 4.5.1 Standard Eigenvalue Problem 305 4.5.2 Generalized Eigenvalue Problem 306 4.6 Coupling, Decoupling, and Principal Coordinates 307 4.6.1 Types of Coupling 307 4.6.2 Principal Coordinates 307 4.6.3 Decoupling Method for Free-Vibration Analysis 310 4.7 Forced Vibrations I: Steady-State Responses 319 4.8 Forced Vibrations II: Transient Responses 328 4.8.1 Direct Analytical Method 328 4.8.2 Decoupling Method 331 4.8.3 Laplace Transform Method 347 4.8.4 Convolution Integral Method 349 4.9 Chapter Summary 357 4.9.1 Modal Analyses 357 4.9.2 Free Vibrations of Multi-DOF Systems 357 4.9.3 Steady-State Responses of Multi-DOF Systems 359 4.9.4 Transient Responses of Multi-DOF Systems 359 5 Vibration Analyses Using Finite Element Method 370 5.1 Objectives 370 5.2 Introduction to Finite Element Method 370 5.2.1 Lagrangian Dynamics Formulation of FEM Model 371 5.2.2 Matrix Formulation 374 5.3 Finite Element Analyses of Beams 378 5.3.1 Formulation of Beam Element 379 5.3.2 Implementation Using MATLAB 383 5.3.3 Generalization: Large-Scale Finite Element Simulations 392 5.3.4 Damping Models in Finite Element Modeling 394 5.4 Vibration Analyses Using SOLIDWORKS 395 5.4.1 Introduction to SOLIDWORKS Simulation 396 5.4.2 Static Analysis 398 5.4.3 Modal Analysis 415 5.4.4 Harmonic Vibration Analysis 419 5.4.5 Transient Vibration Analysis 425 5.5 Chapter Summary 428 5.5.1 Finite Element Formulation 428 5.5.2 Using Commercial Finite Element Analysis Software 429 Appendix A Review of Newtonian Dynamics 433 A.1 Kinematics 433 A.1.1 Kinematics of a Point or a Particle 433 A.1.2 Relative Motions 435 A.1.3 Kinematics of a Rigid Body 436 A.2 Kinetics 437 A.2.1 Newton–Euler Equations 437 A.2.2 Energy Principles 438 A.2.3 Momentum Principles 439 Appendix B A Primer on MATLAB 440 B.1 Matrix Computations 440 B.1.1 Commands and Statements 440 B.1.2 Matrix Generation 441 B.1.3 Accessing Matrix Elements and Submatrices 442 B.1.4 Operators and Elementary Functions 444 B.1.5 Flow Controls 446 B.1.6 M-Files, Scripts, and Functions 449 B.1.7 Linear Algebra 452 B.2 Plotting 454 B.2.1 Two-Dimensional Curve Plots 454 B.2.2 Three-Dimensional Curve Plots 456 B.2.3 Three-Dimensional Surface Plots 457 Appendix C Tables of Laplace Transform 459 C.1 Properties of Laplace Transform 459 C.2 Function Transformations 459 Index 461

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn in-depth introduction to the foundations of vibrations for students of mechanical engineering For students pursuing their education in Mechanical Engineering, An Introduction to Mechanical Vibrations is a definitive resource. The text extensively covers foundational knowledge in the field and uses it to lead up to and include: finite elements, the inerter, Discrete Fourier Transforms, flow-induced vibrations, and self-excited oscillations in rail vehicles. The text aims to accomplish two things in a single, introductory, semester-length, course in vibrations. The primary goal is to present the basics of vibrations in a manner that promotes understanding and interest while building a foundation of knowledge in the field. The secondary goal is to give students a good understanding of two topics that are ubiquitous in today's engineering workplace - finite element analysis (FEA) and Discrete Fourier Transforms (the DFT- most often seen in the form of the Fast Fourier Transform or FFT). FEA and FFT software tools are readily available to both students and practicing engineers and they need to be used with understanding and a degree of caution. While these two subjects fit nicely into vibrations, this book presents them in a way that emphasizes understanding of the underlying principles so that students are aware of both the power and the limitations of the methods. In addition to covering all the topics that make up an introductory knowledge of vibrations, the book includes: ? End of chapter exercises to help students review key topics and definitions ? Access to sample data files, software, and animations via a dedicated websiteTable of ContentsPreface xi About the Companion Website xv 1 The Transition from Dynamics to Vibrations 1 1.1 Bead on a Wire: The Nonlinear Equations of Motion 2 1.1.1 Formal Vector Approach using Newton’s Laws 3 1.1.2 Informal Vector Approach using Newton’s Laws 5 1.1.3 Lagrange’s Equations of Motion 6 1.1.3.1 The Bead on a Wire via Lagrange’s Equations 7 1.1.3.2 Generalized Coordinates 9 1.1.3.3 Generalized Forces 9 1.1.3.4 Dampers – Rayleigh’s Dissipation Function 11 1.2 Equilibrium Solutions 12 1.2.1 Equilibrium of a Simple Pendulum 12 1.2.2 Equilibrium of the Bead on the Wire 13 1.3 Linearization 14 1.3.1 Geometric Nonlinearities 14 1.3.1.1 Linear EOM for a Simple Pendulum 15 1.3.1.2 Linear EOM for the Bead on the Wire 17 1.3.2 Nonlinear Structural Elements 18 1.4 Summary 19 Exercises 19 2 Single Degree of Freedom Systems – Modeling 23 2.1 Modeling Single Degree of Freedom Systems 23 2.1.1 Deriving the Equation of Motion 24 2.1.2 Equations of Motion Ignoring Preloads 27 2.1.3 Finding Spring Deflections due to Body Rotations 29 Exercises 34 3 Single Degree of Freedom Systems – Free Vibrations 39 3.1 Undamped Free Vibrations 39 3.2 Response to Initial Conditions 41 3.3 Damped Free Vibrations 44 3.3.1 Standard Form for Second-Order Systems 46 3.3.2 Undamped 47 3.3.3 Underdamped 48 3.3.4 Critically Damped 50 3.3.5 Overdamped 51 3.4 Root Locus 52 Exercises 53 4 SDOF Systems – Forced Vibrations – Response to Initial Conditions 59 4.1 Time Response to a Harmonically Applied Force in Undamped Systems 59 4.1.1 Beating 61 4.1.2 Resonance 63 Exercises 65 5 SDOF Systems – Steady State Forced Vibrations 67 5.1 Undamped Steady State Response to a Harmonically Applied Force 67 5.2 Damped Steady State Response to a Harmonically Applied Force 70 5.3 Response to Harmonic Base Motion 73 5.4 Response to a Rotating Unbalance 77 5.5 Accelerometers 82 Exercises 85 6 Damping 89 6.1 Linear Viscous Damping 89 6.2 Coulomb or Dry Friction Damping 93 6.3 Logarithmic Decrement 96 Exercises 97 7 Systems with More than One Degree of Freedom 101 7.1 2DOF Undamped Free Vibrations – Modeling 101 7.2 2DOF Undamped Free Vibrations – Natural Frequencies 104 7.3 2DOF Undamped Free Vibrations – Mode Shapes 106 7.3.1 An Example 107 7.4 Mode Shape Descriptions 110 7.5 Response to Initial Conditions 112 7.6 2DOF Undamped Forced Vibrations 115 7.7 Vibration Absorbers 116 7.8 The Method of Normal Modes 118 7.9 The Cart and Pendulum Example 123 7.9.1 Modeling the System – Two Ways 124 7.9.1.1 Kinematics 124 7.9.1.2 Newton’s Laws 125 7.9.1.3 Lagrange’s Equation 127 7.10 Normal Modes Example 129 Exercises 132 8 Continuous Systems 137 8.1 The Equations of Motion for a Taut String 137 8.2 Natural Frequencies and Mode Shapes for a Taut String 139 8.3 Vibrations of Uniform Beams 142 Exercises 151 9 Finite Elements 153 9.1 Shape Functions 153 9.2 The Stiffness Matrix for an Elastic Rod 155 9.3 The Mass Matrix for an Elastic Rod 161 9.4 Using Multiple Elements 164 9.5 The Two-noded Beam Element 167 9.5.1 The Two-noded Beam Element – Stiffness Matrix 168 9.5.2 The Two-noded Beam Element – Mass Matrix 171 9.6 Two-noded Beam Element Vibrations Example 173 Exercises 177 10 The Inerter 181 10.1 Modeling the Inerter 181 10.2 The Inerter in the Equations of Motion 184 10.3 An Examination of the Effect of an Inerter on System Response 186 10.3.1 The Baseline Case – p = 0 187 10.3.2 The Case Where the Inerter Adds Mass Equal to the Block’s Mass – p = 1 188 10.3.3 The Case Where p is Very Large 188 10.4 The Inerter as a Vibration Absorber 190 Exercises 193 11 Analysis of Experimental Data 195 11.1 Typical Test Data 195 11.2 Transforming to the Frequency Domain – The CFT 197 11.3 Transforming to the Frequency Domain – The DFT 200 11.4 Transforming to the Frequency Domain – A Faster DFT 202 11.5 Transforming to the Frequency Domain – The FFT 203 11.6 Transforming to the Frequency Domain – An Example 204 11.7 Sampling and Aliasing 207 11.8 Leakage and Windowing 212 11.9 Decimating Data 216 11.10 Averaging FFTs 225 Exercises 228 12 Topics in Vibrations 231 12.1 What About the Mass of the Spring? 231 12.2 Flow-induced Vibrations 233 12.3 Self-Excited Oscillations of Railway Wheelsets 238 12.4 What is a Rigid Body Mode? 249 12.5 Why Static Deflection is Very Useful 251 Exercises 254 Appendix A: Least Squares Curve Fitting 257 Appendix B: Moments of Inertia 261 B.1 Parallel Axis Theorem for Moments of Inertia 262 B.2 Moments of Inertia for Commonly Encountered Bodies 263 Index 265

Read more less

Book SynopsisA planar or two-dimensional (2D) mechanism is the combination of two or more machine elements that are designed to convey a force or motion across parallel planes. For any mechanicalengineer, young or old, an understanding of planar mechanism design is fundamental. Mechanical components and complex machines, such as engines or robots, are often designed and conceptualised in 2D before being extended into 3D. Designed to encourage a clear understanding of the nature and design of planar mechanisms, this book favours a frank and straightforward approach to teaching the basics of planar mechanism design and the theory of machines with fully worked examples throughout. Key Features: Provides simple instruction in the design and analysis of planar mechanisms, enabling the student to easily navigate the text and find the desired material Covers topics of fundamental importance to mechanicalengineering, from planar mechanism kinematics, 2D linkage analysTable of ContentsPreface viii 1 Introduction to Mechanisms 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Kinematic Diagrams 2 1.3 Degrees of Freedom or Mobility 5 1.4 Grashof’s Equation 7 1.5 Transmission Angle 7 1.6 Geneva Mechanism 10 Problems 12 Reference 15 2 Position Analysis of Planar Linkages 16 2.1 Introduction 16 2.2 Graphical Position Analysis 17 2.2.1 Graphical Position Analysis for a 4-Bar 17 2.2.2 Graphical Position Analysis for a Slider-Crank Linkage 19 2.3 Vector Loop Position Analysis 20 2.3.1 What Is a Vector? 20 2.3.2 Finding Vector Components of M∠θ 21 2.3.3 Position Analysis of 4-Bar Linkage 23 2.3.4 Position Analysis of Slider-Crank Linkage 36 2.3.5 Position Analysis of 6-Bar Linkage 47 Problems 49 Programming Exercises 63 3 Graphical Design of Planar Linkages 66 3.1 Introduction 66 3.2 Two-Position Synthesis for a Four-Bar Linkage 67 3.3 Two-Position Synthesis for a Quick Return 4-Bar Linkage 69 3.4 Two-Positions for Coupler Link 72 3.5 Three Positions of the Coupler Link 72 3.6 Coupler Point Goes Through Three Points 75 3.7 Coupler Point Goes Through Three Points with Fixed Pivots and Timing 78 3.8 Two-Position Synthesis of Slider-Crank Mechanism 82 3.9 Designing a Crank-Shaper Mechanism 84 Problems 88 4 Analytical Linkage Synthesis 95 4.1 Introduction 95 4.2 Chebyshev Spacing 95 4.3 Function Generation Using a 4-Bar Linkage 98 4.4 Three-Point Matching Method for 4-Bar Linkage 100 4.5 Design a 4-Bar Linkage for Body Guidance 103 4.6 Function Generation for Slider-Crank Mechanisms 106 4.7 Three-Point Matching Method for Slider-Crank Mechanism 108 Problems 112 Further Reading 114 5 Velocity Analysis 115 5.1 Introduction 115 5.2 Relative Velocity Method 116 5.3 Instant Center Method 123 5.4 Vector Method 137 Problems 146 Programming Exercises 156 6 Acceleration 159 6.1 Introduction 159 6.2 Relative Acceleration 160 6.3 Slider–Crank Mechanism with Horizontal Motion 161 6.4 Acceleration of Mass Centers for Slider–Crank Mechanism 164 6.5 Four-bar Linkage 165 6.6 Acceleration of Mass Centers for 4-bar Linkage 170 6.7 Coriolis Acceleration 171 Problems 176 Programming Exercises 184 7 Static Force Analysis 187 7.1 Introduction 187 7.2 Forces, Moments, and Free Body Diagrams 188 7.3 Multiforce Members 192 7.4 Moment Calculations Simplified 198 Problems 199 Programming Exercises 204 8 Dynamic Force Analysis 207 8.1 Introduction 207 8.2 Link Rotating about Fixed Pivot Dynamic Force Analysis 209 8.3 Double-Slider Mechanism Dynamic Force Analysis 211 Problems 214 9 Spur Gears 219 9.1 Introduction 219 9.2 Other Types of Gears 219 9.3 Fundamental Law of Gearing 220 9.4 Nomenclature 223 9.5 Tooth System 225 9.6 Meshing Gears 226 9.6.1 Operating Pressure Angle 227 9.6.2 Contact Ratio 227 9.7 Noninterference of Gear Teeth 228 9.8 Gear Racks 231 9.9 Gear Trains 232 9.9.1 Simple Gear Train 233 9.9.2 Compound Gear Train 233 9.9.3 Inverted Compound Gear Train 236 9.9.4 Kinetic Energy of a Gear 238 9.10 Planetary Gear Systems 240 9.10.1 Differential 242 9.10.2 Clutch 243 9.10.3 Transmission 243 9.10.4 Formula Method 245 9.10.5 Table Method 248 Problems 249 10 Planar Cams and Cam Followers 255 10.1 Introduction 255 10.2 Follower Displacement Diagrams 257 10.3 Harmonic Motion 259 10.4 Cycloidal Motion 260 10.5 5-4-3 Polynomial Motion 262 10.6 Fifth-Order Polynomial Motion 263 10.7 Cam with In-Line Translating Knife-Edge Follower 265 10.8 Cam with In-Line Translating Roller Follower 266 10.9 Cam with Offset Translating Roller Follower 272 10.10 Cam with Translating Flat-Face Follower 273 Problems 277 Appendix A: Engineering Equation Solver 279 Appendix B: MATLAB 296 Further Reading 306 Index 307

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe first textbook to provide in-depth treatment of electroceramics with emphasis on applications in microelectronics, magneto-electronics, spintronics, energy storage and harvesting, sensors and detectors, magnetics, and in electro-optics and acousto-optics Electroceramics is a class of ceramic materials used primarily for their electrical properties. This book covers the important topics relevant to this growing field and places great emphasis on devices and applications. It provides sufficient background in theory and mathematics so that readers can gain insight into phenomena that are unique to electroceramics. Each chapter has its own brief introduction with an explanation of how the said content impacts technology. Multiple examples are provided to reinforce the content as well as numerous end-of-chapter problems for students to solve and learn. The book also includes suggestions for advanced study and key words relevant to each chapter. Fundamentals ofTable of ContentsPreface xiii About the CompanionWebsite xvii 1 Nature and Types of Solid Materials 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Defining Properties of Solids 1 1.2.1 Electrical Conductance (G) 1 1.2.2 Bandgap, Eg 2 1.2.3 Permeability, 𝜀 3 1.3 Fundamental Nature of Electrical Conductivity 4 1.4 Temperature Dependence of Electrical Conductivity 4 1.4.1 Case of Metals 5 1.4.2 Case of Semiconductors 5 1.4.3 Frequency Spectrum of Permittivity (or Dielectric Constant) 6 1.5 Essential Elements of Quantum Mechanics 7 1.5.1 Planck’ Radiation Law 7 1.5.2 Photoelectric Effect 8 1.5.3 Bohr’sTheory of Hydrogen Atom 10 1.5.4 Matter–Wave Duality: de Broglie Hypothesis 11 1.5.5 Schrödinger’sWave Equation 12 1.5.6 Heisneberg’s Uncertainty Principle 13 1.6 Quantum Numbers 13 1.7 Pauli Exclusion Principle 14 1.8 Periodic Table of Elements 15 1.9 Some Important Concepts of Solid-State Physics 18 1.9.1 Ceramic Superconductivity 18 1.9.2 Superconductivity and Technology 19 1.10 Signature Properties of Superconductors 19 1.10.1 Thermal Behavior of Resistivity of a Superconductor 20 1.10.2 Magnetic Nature of Superconductivity: Meissner–Ochsenfeld Effect 20 1.10.3 Josephson Effect 22 1.11 Fermi–Dirac Distribution Function 24 1.12 Band Structure of Solids 27 Glossary 29 Problems 30 References 31 Further Reading 31 2 Processing of Electroceramics 33 2.1 Introduction 33 2.2 Basic Concepts of Equilibrium Phase Diagram 33 2.2.1 Gibbs’ Phase Rule 34 2.2.2 Triple Point and Interfaces 34 2.2.3 Binary Phase Diagrams 35 2.2.3.1 Totally Miscible Systems 35 2.2.3.2 Systems with Limited Solubility in Solid Phase 37 2.3 Methods of Ceramic Processing 38 2.3.1 Room Temperature Uniaxial Pressing (RTUP) 38 2.3.2 Other Methods for Powder Compaction and Densification 41 2.3.2.1 Hot Isostatic Pressing (HIP) 41 2.3.2.2 Cold Isostatic Pressing (CIP) 41 2.3.2.3 Low Temperature Sintering (LTP) 42 2.3.3 Nanoceramics 42 2.3.4 Thin Film Ceramics 42 2.3.5 Methods for Film Growth 43 2.3.5.1 Solgel Method 43 2.3.5.2 Pulsed Laser Deposition (PLD) Method 44 2.3.5.3 Molecular Beam Epitaxy (MBE) Method 46 2.3.5.4 RF Magnetron Sputtering Method 47 2.3.5.5 Liquid Phase Epitaxy (LPE) Method 49 2.3.6 Single Crystal Growth Methods for Ceramics 49 2.3.6.1 High Temperature Solution Growth (HTSG) Method or Flux Growth Method 50 2.3.6.2 Czochralski Growth Method 51 2.3.6.3 Top Seeded Solution Growth (TSSG) Method 52 2.3.6.4 Hydrothermal Growth 53 2.3.6.5 Some Other Methods of Crystal Growth 53 Glossary 54 Problems 55 References 55 3 Methods for Materials Characterization 57 3.1 Introduction 57 3.2 Methods for Surface and Structural Characterization 57 3.2.1 Optical Microscopes 58 3.2.2 X-ray Diffraction Analysis (XRD) 60 3.2.2.1 XRD Diffractometer: Intensity vs. 2𝜃 Plot 60 3.2.2.2 Laue X-ray Diffraction Method 61 3.2.3 Electron Microscopes 63 3.2.3.1 Transmission Electron Microscope (TEM) 64 3.2.3.2 Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM) 65 3.2.3.3 Scanning Transmission Electron Microscope (STEM) 65 3.2.3.4 X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS) 66 3.2.4 Force Microscopy 68 3.2.4.1 Atomic Force Microscope (AFM) 68 3.2.4.2 Magnetic Force Microscope (MFM) 69 3.2.4.3 Piezoelectric Force Microscope (PFM) 69 Glossary 70 Problems 71 References 71 4 Binding Forces in Solids and Essential Elements of Crystallography 73 4.1 Introduction 73 4.2 Binding Forces in Solids 73 4.2.1 Ionic Bonding 74 4.2.2 Covalent Bonding 74 4.2.3 Metallic Bonding 74 4.2.4 Van der Waals Bonding 75 4.2.5 Polar-molecule-induced Dipole Bonds 75 4.2.6 Permanent Dipole Bonding 75 4.3 Structure–Property Relationship 75 4.4 Basic Crystal Structures 77 4.4.1 Bravais Lattice 78 4.4.2 Miller Indices for Planes and Directions 79 4.4.2.1 Rule for Indexing a Crystal Direction 80 4.5 Reciprocal Lattice 81 4.6 Relationship between d* and Miller Indices for Selected Crystal Systems 81 4.7 Typical Examples of Crystal Structures 82 4.7.1 Sodium Chloride, NaCl 82 4.7.2 Perovskite Calcium Titanate 82 4.7.3 Diamond Structure 83 4.7.4 Zinc Blende (Also Wurtzite) 84 4.8 Origin of Voids and Atomic Packing Factor (apf) 84 4.8.1 apf for a Primitive Cubic Structure (P) 85 4.9 Hexagonal and Cubic Close-packed Structures 85 4.10 Predictive Nature of Crystal Structure 86 4.11 Hypothetical Models of Centrosymmetric and Noncentrosymmetric Crystals 87 4.12 Symmetry Elements 88 4.13 Classification of Dielectric Materials: Polar and Nonpolar Groups 89 4.14 Space Groups 90 Glossary 91 Problems 92 References 93 Further Reading 93 5 Dominant Forces and Effects in Electroceramics 95 5.1 Introduction 95 5.2 Agent–Property Relationship 95 5.3 Electric Field (E), Mechanical Stress (X), and Temperature (T) Diagram: Heckmann Diagram 96 5.3.1 Piezoelectric Zone 97 5.3.2 Pyroelectric Zone 97 5.3.3 Thermoelastic Zone 98 5.4 Electric Field, Mechanical Stress, and Magnetic Field Diagram 99 5.5 Multiferroics Phenomena and Materials 101 5.6 Magnetoelectric (ME) Effect and Associated Issues 103 5.6.1 Basic Formulations Governing the ME Effect 103 5.6.2 Composite ME Materials 104 5.6.3 ME Integrated Structures 104 5.6.4 Experimental Determination 104 5.7 Applications of Multiferroics 105 5.7.1 Ferroelectric and Ferromagnetic Coupled Memory 105 5.7.2 Multiferroic Tunnel Junctions (MTJ) 106 5.8 Magnetostriction and Electrostriction 106 5.8.1 Magnetostriction 106 5.8.2 Electrostriction 107 5.9 Piezoelectricity 108 5.9.1 Crystallographic Considerations for Piezoelectricity 108 5.9.2 Mathematical Representation of Piezoelectric Effects 109 5.9.3 Constitutive Equations for Piezoelectricity 110 5.10 Experimental Determination of Piezoelectric Coefficients 111 5.10.1 Charge Coefficient, d 111 5.10.2 Stress Coefficient, e 112 5.10.3 Piezoelectric Devices and Applications 113 5.10.3.1 Piezoelectric Transducers 114 5.10.3.2 Generation of Sound and an AC Signal 114 5.10.3.3 Surface AcousticWave (SAW) Device 115 5.10.3.4 Piezoelectric Acoustic Amplifier 116 5.10.3.5 Piezoelectric Frequency Oscillator 116 5.10.4 MEMS Actuator 116 Glossary 118 Problems 119 References 120 6 Coupled Nonlinear Effects in Electroceramics 121 6.1 Introduction 121 6.2 Historical Perspective 123 6.3 Signature Properties of Ferroelectric Materials 123 6.3.1 Hysteresis Loop: Its Nature and Technical Importance 124 6.3.2 Temperature Dependence of Ferroelectric Parameters 125 6.3.3 Temperature Dependence of Dielectric Constant 125 6.3.4 Ferroelectric Domains 126 6.3.5 Electrets 126 6.3.6 Relaxor Ferroelectrics 126 6.4 Perovskite and Tungsten Bronze Structures 127 6.4.1 Perovskite Structure 127 6.4.2 Tungsten Bronze Structure 130 6.5 Landau–Ginsberg–Devonshire Mean Field Theory of Ferroelectricity 130 6.6 Experimental Determination of Ferroelectric Parameters 134 6.6.1 Poling of Samples for Experiments 134 6.6.2 Polarization vs. Electric Field 135 6.6.3 CapacitanceMeasurement and C–V Plot 136 6.6.4 Ferroelectric Domains (Experimental Determination) 137 6.7 Recent Applications of Ferroelectric Materials 138 6.8 Antiferroelectricity 139 6.9 Pyroelectricity 143 6.9.1 Historical Perspective 143 6.9.2 Pyroelectric Effect 143 6.9.3 Experimental Determination of Pyroelectric Coefficient 145 6.9.4 Applications of Pyroelectricity 146 6.10 Pyro-optic Effect 147 Glossary 148 Problems 150 References 150 Further Reading 151 7 Elements of a Semiconductor 153 7.1 Introduction 153 7.2 Nature of Electrical Conduction in Semiconductors 153 7.3 Energy Bands in Semiconductors 155 7.4 Origin of Holes and n- and p-Type Conduction 156 7.5 Important Concepts of Semiconductor Materials 158 7.5.1 Mobility, 𝜇 158 7.5.2 Direct and Indirect Bandgap, Eg 159 7.5.3 Effective Mass, m* 160 7.5.4 Density of States and Fermi Energy 161 7.6 Experimental Determination of Semiconductor Properties 162 7.6.1 Determination of Resistivity, 𝜌 162 7.6.2 Four-Point Probe (van der Pauw) Method 163 7.6.3 Two-Point Probe Method 163 7.6.4 Determination of Bandgap, Eg 164 7.6.5 Determination of N- and P-Type Nature: Seebeck Effect 164 7.6.6 Determination of Direct and Indirect Bandgap, Eg 166 7.6.7 Determination of Mobility, 𝜇 166 7.6.7.1 Haynes–Shockley Method 167 7.6.7.2 Hall Effect 168 Glossary 170 Problems 170 References 171 Further Reading 171 8 Electroceramic Semiconductor Devices 173 8.1 Introduction 173 8.2 Metal–Semiconductor Contacts and the Schottky Diode 174 8.2.1 Metal–Metal Contact 174 8.2.2 Metal Semiconductor Contact 175 8.2.3 Schottky Diode 176 8.2.4 Determination of Contact Potential and DepletionWidth 178 8.2.5 Oxide Semiconductor Materials andTheir Properties 179 8.2.6 In Search of UV-blue LED 181 8.2.7 Determination of I–V Characteristics of a LED 182 8.2.8 Thin-film Transistor (TFT) 183 8.3 Varistor Diodes 184 8.3.1 Metal Oxide Varistors 185 8.4 Theoretical Considerations for Varistors 186 8.4.1 Equivalent Circuit of a Varistor 186 8.4.2 Idealized Model of Varistor Microstructure 186 8.4.3 Energy Band Diagram: Grain–Grain Boundary–Grain (G–GB–G) Structure 188 8.5 Varistor-Embedded Devices 190 8.5.1 Voltage Biased Varistor and Embedded Voltage Biased Transistor (VBT) 190 8.5.1.1 Frequency Dependence of IHC 45 VBT Device 194 8.5.1.2 Comparison between a VBT, BJT, and Schottky Transistor 195 8.5.2 Electric Field Tuned Varistor and Its Embedded Electric Field Effect Transistor (E-FET) 196 8.5.2.1 Frequency Dependence of IHC 45 E-FET Device 198 8.5.3 Magnetically Tuned Varistor and Embedded Magnetic Field Effect Transistor (H-FET) 198 8.6 Magnetic Field Sensor 202 8.7 Thermistors 206 8.7.1 Heating Effects in Thermistors 207 Glossary 210 Problems 212 References 213 Further Reading 214 9 Electroceramics and Green Energy 215 9.1 Introduction 215 9.2 What is Green Energy? 215 9.3 Energy Storage and Its Defining Parameters 217 9.3.1 Capacitor as an Energy Storage Device 218 9.3.2 Battery-Supercapacitor Hybrid (BSH) Devices 220 9.3.3 Piezoelectric Energy Harvester 220 9.3.4 MEMS Power Generator 222 9.3.5 Ferroelectric Photovoltaic Devices 222 9.3.6 Solid Oxide Fuel Cells (SOFC) 224 9.3.7 Antiferroelectric Energy Storage 225 Glossary 227 Problems 227 References 228 10 Electroceramic Magnetics 229 10.1 Introduction 229 10.2 Magnetic Parameters 229 10.3 Relationship between Magnetic Flux, Susceptibility, and Permeability 230 10.4 Signature Properties of Ferrites 231 10.4.1 Temperature Dependence of Magnetic Parameters 234 10.5 Typical Structures Associated with Ferrites 234 10.6 Essential Theoretical Concepts 235 10.7 Magnetic Nature of Electron 235 10.7.1 Molecular FieldTheory 236 10.7.2 Antiferromagnetism and Ferrimagnetism 237 10.7.3 Quantum Mechanics and Magnetism 238 10.8 Classical Applications of Ferrites 239 10.9 Novel Magnetic Technologies 239 10.9.1 GMR Effect 240 10.9.2 CMR Effect 241 10.9.3 Spintronics 241 Glossary 242 Problems 243 References 245 Further Reading 245 11 Electro-optics and Acousto-optics 247 11.1 Introduction 247 11.2 Nature of Light 247 11.2.1 Fundamental Optical Properties of a Crystal 248 11.2.2 Electro-optic Effects 249 11.2.3 Selected Electro-optic Applications 251 11.2.3.1 OpticalWaveguides 251 11.2.3.2 Phase Shifters 252 11.2.3.3 Electro-optic Modulators 252 11.2.3.4 Night Vision Devices (NVD) 252 11.2.4 Acousto-optic Effect and Applications 253 Glossary 254 Problems 255 References 255 Further Reading 255 AppendixA Periodic Table of the Elements 257 AppendixB Fundamental Physical Constants and Frequently Used Symbols and Units (Rounded to Three Decimal Points) 259 AppendixC List of Prefixes Commonly Used 261 AppendixD Frequently Used Symbols and Units 263 Index 265

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a broad range of information from basic principles to advanced applications of biosensors and nanomaterials in health care diagnostics This book utilizes a multidisciplinary approach to provide a wide range of information on biosensors and the impact of nanotechnology on the development of biosensors for health care. It offers a solid background on biosensors, recognition receptors, biomarkers, and disease diagnostics. An overview of biosensor-based health care applications is addressed. Nanomaterial applications in biosensors and diagnostics are included, covering the application of nanoparticles, magnetic nanomaterials, quantum dots, carbon nanotubes, graphene, and molecularly imprinted nanostructures. The topic of organ-specific health care systems utilizing biosensors is also incorporated to provide deep insight into the very recent advances in disease diagnostics. Biosensors and Nanotechnology: Applications in Health Care Diagnostics is compTable of ContentsList of Contributors xi Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii Section 1 Introduction to Biosensors, Recognition Elements, Biomarkers, and Nanomaterials 1 1 General Introduction to Biosensors and Recognition Receptors 3Frank Davis and Zeynep Altintas 1.1 Introduction to Biosensors 3 1.2 Enzyme‐ Based Biosensors 4 1.3 DNA‐ and RNA‐Based Biosensors 5 1.4 Antibody‐Based Biosensors 7 1.5 Aptasensors 8 1.6 Peptide‐Based Biosensors 10 1.7 MIP‐Based Biosensor 11 1.8 Conclusions 12 References 13 2 Biomarkers in Health Care 17Adama Marie Sesay, Pirkko Tervo, and Elisa Tikkanen 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Biomarkers 18 2.2.1 Advantage and Utilization of Biomarkers 18 2.2.2 Ideal Characteristics of Biomarkers 19 2.3 Biological Samples and Biomarkers 20 2.4 Personalized Health and Point‐of‐Care Technology 22 2.5 Use of Biomarkers in Biosensing Technology 24 2.6 Biomarkers in Disease Diagnosis 26 2.7 Conclusions 29 References 30 3 The Use of Nanomaterials and Microfluidics in Medical Diagnostics 35Jon Ashley and Yi Sun 3.1 Introduction 35 3.2 Nanomaterials in Medical Diagnostics (Bottom‐Up Approach) 36 3.2.1 Carbon Nanomaterials 37 3.2.2 Metallic Nanoparticles 39 3.2.2.1 Quantum Dots 39 3.2.2.2 Magnetic Nanoparticles (Fe2O3, FeO, and Fe3O4) 41 3.2.2.3 Gold Nanoparticles 41 3.2.2.4 Silver Nanoparticles 42 3.2.2.5 Nanoshells 42 3.2.2.6 Nanocages 43 3.2.2.7 Nanowires 43 3.2.3 Polymer‐Based Nanoparticles 44 3.3 Application of Microfluidic Devices in Clinical Diagnostics (Top‐Down Approach) 45 3.3.1 Unique Features of Microfluidic Devices 45 3.3.2 Applications of Microfluidic Devices in Medical Diagnostics 46 3.3.2.1 Types of Microfluidic POC Devices 47 3.3.2.2 Benchtop Microfluidic Instruments 47 3.3.2.3 Small, Lightweight Microfluidic Devices 49 3.3.2.4 Simple Un‐instrumented Microfluidic Systems 50 3.4 Integration of Microfluidics with Nanomaterials 52 3.5 Future Perspectives of Nanomaterial and Microfluidic‐Based Diagnostics 53 References 54 Section 2 Biosensor Platforms for Disease Detection and Diagnostics 59 4 SPR‐Based Biosensor Technologies in Disease Detection and Diagnostics 61Zeynep Altintas and Wellington M. Fakanya 4.1 Introduction 61 4.2 Basic Theoretical Principles 63 4.3 SPR Applications in Disease Detection and Diagnostics 66 4.3.1 SPR Biosensors in Cancer Detection 66 4.3.2 SPR Sensors in Cardiac Disease Detection 68 4.3.3 SPR Sensors in Infectious Disease Detection 71 4.4 Conclusions 72 References 74 5 Piezoelectric‐Based Biosensor Technologies in Disease Detection and Diagnostics 77Zeynep Altintas and Noor Azlina Masdor 5.1 Introduction 77 5.2 QCM Biosensors 78 5.3 Disease Diagnosis Using QCM Biosensors 80 5.3.1 Cancer Detection Using QCM Biosensors 82 5.3.2 Cardiovascular System Disorder Detection Using Biosensors 85 5.3.3 Pathogenic Disease Detection Using QCM Biosensors 88 5.4 Conclusions 90 References 91 6 Electrochemical‐Based Biosensor Technologies in Disease Detection and Diagnostics 95Andrea Ravalli and Giovanna Marrazza 6.1 Introduction 95 6.2 Electrochemical Biosensors: Definitions, Principles, and Classifications 96 6.3 Biomarkers in Clinical Applications 102 6.3.1 Electrochemical Biosensors for Tumor Markers 102 6.3.2 Electrochemical Biosensors for Cardiac Markers 110 6.3.3 Electrochemical Biosensors for Autoimmune Disease 115 6.3.4 Electrochemical Biosensors for Autoimmune Infectious Disease 116 6.4 Conclusions 118 References 118 7 MEMS‐Based Cell Counting Methods 125Mustafa Kangul, Eren Aydın, Furkan Gokce, Ozge Zorlu, Ebru Ozgur, and Haluk Kulah 7.1 Introduction 125 7.2 MEMS‐Based Cell Counting Methods 126 7.2.1 Optical Cell Counting Methods 126 7.2.1.1 Quantification of the Cells by Detecting Luminescence 127 7.2.1.2 Quantification of the Cells via High‐Resolution Imaging Techniques 130 7.3 Electrical and Electrochemical Cell Counting Methods 131 7.3.1 Impedimetric Cell Quantification 133 7.3.2 Voltammetric and Amperometric Cell Quantification 135 7.4 Gravimetric Cell Counting Methods 136 7.4.1 Deflection‐Based Cell Quantification 136 7.4.2 Resonant‐Based Cell Quantification 138 7.4.2.1 Theory of the Resonant‐Based Sensors 138 7.4.2.2 Actuation and Sensing Methods of Resonators in MEMS Applications 140 7.4.2.3 Resonator Structure Types Used for Cell Detection Applications 145 7.5 Conclusion and Comments 149 References 151 8 Lab‐on‐a‐Chip Platforms for Disease Detection and Diagnosis 155Ziya Isiksacan, Mustafa Tahsin Guler, Ali Kalantarifard, Mohammad Asghari, and Caglar Elbuken 8.1 Introduction 155 8.2 Continuous Flow Platforms 156 8.3 Paper‐Based LOC Platforms 161 8.4 Droplet‐Based LOC Platforms 166 8.5 Digital Microfluidic‐Based LOC Platforms 169 8.6 CD‐Based LOC Platforms 172 8.7 Wearable LOC Platforms 174 8.8 Conclusion and Outlook 176 References 177 Section 3 Nanomaterial’s Applications in Biosensors and Diagnostics 183 9 Applications of Quantum Dots in Biosensors and Diagnostics 185Zeynep Altintas, Frank Davis, and Frieder W. Scheller 9.1 Introduction 185 9.2 Quantum Dots: Optical Properties, Synthesis, and Surface Chemistry 186 9.3 Biosensor Applications of QDs 187 9.4 Other Biological Applications of QDs 191 9.5 Water Solubility and Cytotoxicity 194 9.6 Conclusion 196 References 197 10 Applications of Molecularly Imprinted Nanostructures in Biosensors and Diagnostics 201Deniz Aktas‐Uygun, Murat Uygun, and Sinan Akgol 10.1 Introduction 201 10.2 Molecular Imprinted Polymers 202 10.3 Imprinting Approaches 204 10.4 Molecularly Imprinted Nanostructures 205 10.5 MIP Biosensors in Medical Diagnosis 207 10.6 Diagnostic Applications of MIP Nanostructures 210 10.7 Conclusions 212 References 213 11 Smart Nanomaterials: Applications in Biosensors and Diagnostics 219Frank Davis, Flavio M. Shimizu, and Zeynep Altintas 11.1 Introduction 219 11.2 Metal Nanoparticles 221 11.3 Magnetic Nanoparticles 226 11.4 Carbon Nanotubes 231 11.5 Graphene 235 11.6 Nanostructured Metal Oxides 242 11.7 Nanostructured Hydrogels 247 11.8 Nanostructured Conducting Polymers 254 11.9 Conclusions and Future Trends 260 References 262 12 Applications of Magnetic Nanomaterials in Biosensors and Diagnostics 277Zeynep Altintas 12.1 Introduction 277 12.2 MNP‐Based Biosensors for Disease Detection 279 12.3 MNPs in Cancer Diagnosis and Therapy 284 12.4 Cellular Applications of MNPs in Biosensing, Imaging, and Therapy 289 12.5 Conclusions 290 References 291 13 Graphene Applications in Biosensors and Diagnostics 297Adina Arvinte and Adama Marie Sesay 13.1 Introduction 297 13.2 Graphene and Biosensors 298 13.2.1 Structure 298 13.2.2 Preparation 299 13.2.3 Properties 301 13.2.4 Commercialization in the Field of Graphene Sensors 302 13.2.5 Latest Developments in Graphene‐based Diagnosis 303 13.3 Medical Applications of Graphene 303 13.3.1 Electrochemical Graphene Biosensors for Medical Diagnostics 304 13.3.1.1 Glucose Detection 304 13.3.1.2 Cysteine Detection 307 13.3.1.3 Cholesterol Detection 309 13.3.1.4 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2) 310 13.3.1.5 Glycated Hemoglobin 312 13.3.1.6 Neurotransmitters 312 13.3.1.7 Amyloid‐Beta Peptide 315 13.3.2 Electrochemical Graphene Aptasensors 316 13.3.2.1 Nucleic Acids 316 13.3.2.2 Cancer Cell 318 13.3.3 Optical Graphene Sensors for Medical Diagnostics 319 13.4 Conclusions 322 Acknowledgments 322 References 322 Section 4 Organ-Specific Health Care Applications for Disease Cases Using Biosensors 327 14 Optical Biosensors and Applications to Drug Discovery for Cancer Cases 329Zeynep Altintas 14.1 Introduction 329 14.2 Biosensor Technology and Coupling Chemistries 332 14.3 Optical Biosensors for Drug Discovery 335 14.4 Computational Simulations and New Approaches for Drug–Receptor Interactions 341 14.5 Conclusions 343 References 344 15 Biosensors for Detection of Anticancer Drug–DNA Interactions 349Arzum Erdem, Ece Eksin, and Ece Kesici 15.1 Introduction 349 15.2 Electrochemical Techniques 351 15.3 Optical Techniques 356 15.4 Electrochemical Impedance Spectroscopy Technique 358 15.5 QCM Technique 360 15.6 Conclusions 361 Acknowledgments 361 References 361 Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisAdvances in theories, methods and applications for shale resource use Shale is the dominant rock in the sedimentary record. It is also the subject of increased interest because of the growing contribution of shale oil and gas to energy supplies, as well as the potential use of shale formations for carbon dioxide sequestration and nuclear waste storage. Shale: Subsurface Science and Engineering brings together geoscience and engineering to present the latest models, methods and applications for understanding and exploiting shale formations. Volume highlights include: Review of current knowledge on shale geology Latest shale engineering methods such as horizontal drilling Reservoir management practices for optimized oil and gas field development Examples of economically and environmentally viable methods of hydrocarbon extraction from shale Discussion of issues relating to hydraulic fracking, carbon seTable of ContentsContributors vii Preface ix Acknowledgments xi Part I: Shale and Clay Overview 1. Mudrock Components and the Genesis of Bulk Rock Properties: Review of Current Advances and Challenges 3Kitty L. Milliken and Nicholas W. Hayman 2. Chemical Composition of Formation Water in Shale and Tight Reservoirs: A Basin‐Scale Perspective 27Yousif Kharaka, Kathleen Gans, Elisabeth Rowan, James Thordsen, Christopher Conaway, Madalyn Blondes, and Mark Engle 3. From Nanofluidics to Basin‐Scale Flow in Shale: Tracer Investigations 45Yifeng Wang 4. Metals in Oil and Gas‐Bearing Shales: Are They Potential (Future) Ore Deposits? 59Mark J. Rigali and James L. Krumhansl 5. Coupled Thermal–Hydraulic–Mechanical and Chemical Modeling of Clayed Rocks 69Leonardo do N. Guimarães, Antonio Gens, and Marcelo Sánchez 6. Thermo‐Hydro‐Mechanical Testing of Shales 83Alessio Ferrari and Enrique Romero Morales 7. Geomechanics of Shale Repositories: Mechanical Behavior and Modeling 99Miguel A. Mánica, Daniel F. Ruiz, Jean Vaunat, and Antonio Gens 8. Generation and Self‐Sealing of the Excavation‐Damaged Zone (EDZ) Around a Subsurface Excavation in a Claystone 125Paul Bossart, Christophe Nussbaum, and Kristof Schuster 9. Shale and Wellbore Integrity 145J. William Carey and Malin Torsæter Part II: Unconventional Oil and Gas 10. Characterization of Unconventional Resource Shales (Mudstones): The Necessity of Multiscale Scientific Integration 163Roger M. Slatt 11. Wellbore Mechanics and Stability in Shale 197Amin Mehrabian, Vinh X. Nguyen, and Younane N. Abousleiman 12. Modeling Hydraulic Fracturing of Unconventional Reservoirs 213Ahmad Ghassemi and Zhennan Zhang 13. Flow of Gas and Liquid in Natural Media Containing Nanoporous Regions 235Timothy J. Kneafsey and Sharon Borglin 14. Factors Affecting Hydrocarbon and Water Mobility in Shales 255Charles Bryan and Pat Brady 15. Dynamics of Matrix‐Fracture Coupling During Shale Gas Production 273I. Yucel Akkutlu and Asana Wasaki Index 287

Read more less

Book SynopsisApplied Nanoindentation in Advanced Materials is a comprehensive, self-contained reference covering applied aspects of nanoindentation in advanced materials. With contributions from leading researchers in the field, this book is divided into three parts.Table of ContentsList of Contributors xvii Preface xxiii Part I 1 1 Determination of Residual Stresses by Nanoindentation 3P-L. Larsson 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Theoretical Background 5 1.3 Determination of Residual Stresses 12 1.3.1 Low Hardening Materials and Equi-biaxial Stresses 12 1.3.2 General Residual Stresses 13 1.3.3 Strain-hardening Effects 15 1.3.4 Conclusions and Remarks 15 References 16 2 Nanomechanical Characterization of Carbon Films 19Ben D. Beake and TomaszW. Liskiewicz 2.1 Introduction 19 2.1.1 Types of DLC Coatings and their Mechanical Properties 19 2.1.2 Carbon Films Processing Methods 20 2.1.3 Residual Stresses in Carbon Films 21 2.1.4 Friction Properties of Carbon Films 22 2.1.5 Multilayering Strategies 23 2.1.6 Applications of Carbon Films 24 2.1.7 Optimization/testing Challenges 24 2.2 Factors Influencing Reliable and Comparable Hardness and Elastic Modulus Determination 24 2.2.1 The International Standard for Depth-sensing Indentation: EN ISO 14577–4 : 2007 24 2.2.2 Challenges in Ultra-thin Films 27 2.2.3 Indenter Geometry 28 2.2.4 Surface Roughness 28 2.3 Deformation in Indentation Contact 30 2.3.1 The Relationship Between H/E and Plastic and ElasticWork in Nanoindentation 30 2.3.2 Variation in H/E and Plasticity Index for Different DLC Films 31 2.3.3 Cracking and Delamination 32 2.3.4 Coatings on Si: Si Phase Transformation 33 2.4 Nano-scratch Testing 34 2.4.1 Scan Speed and Loading Rate 35 2.4.2 Influence of Probe Radius 36 2.4.3 Contact Pressure 36 2.4.4 Role of the Si Substrate in Nano-scratch Testing 38 2.4.5 Failure Behaviour of ta-C on Si 40 2.4.6 Film Stress and Thickness 43 2.4.7 Repetitive Nano-wear by Multi-pass Nano-scratch Tests 44 2.4.8 Load Dependence of Friction 46 2.5 Impact and Fatigue Resistance of DLC Films Using Nano-impact Testing 46 2.5.1 Compositionally Graded a-C and a-C:H Coatings on M42 Tool Steel 49 2.5.2 DLC/Cr Coating on Steel 51 2.5.3 PACVD a-C:H Coatings on M2 Steel 51 2.5.4 DLC Films on Si-film Thickness, Probe Geometry, Impact Force and Interfacial Toughness 52 2.6 Wear Resistance of Amorphous Carbon Films Using Nano-fretting Testing 54 2.6.1 Nano-fretting: State-of-the-art 55 2.6.2 Nano-fretting of Thin DLC Films on Si 55 2.6.3 Nano-fretting of DLC Coatings on Steel 57 2.7 Conclusion 58 References 59 3 Mechanical Evaluation of Nanocoatings under Extreme Environments for Application in Energy Systems 69E.J. Rubio, G. Martinez, S.K. Gullapalli, M. Noor-A-Alam and C.V. Ramana 3.1 Introduction 69 3.2 Thermal Barrier Coatings 70 3.2.1 Nanoindentation Characterization of TBCs 72 3.2.2 Mechanical Properties of Hafnium-based TBCs 74 3.3 Nanoindentation Evaluation of Coatings for Nuclear Power Generation Applications 76 3.3.1 Evaluation ofW-based Materials for Nuclear Application 77 3.4 Conclusions and Outlook 80 Acknowledgments 81 References 81 4 Evaluation of the Nanotribological Properties of Thin Films 83ShojiroMiyake and MeiWang 4.1 Introduction 83 4.2 Evaluation Methods of Nanotribology 83 4.3 Nanotribology Evaluation Methods and Examples 84 4.3.1 Nanoindentation Evaluation 84 4.3.2 Nanowear and Friction Evaluation 88 4.3.2.1 Nanowear Properties 89 4.3.2.2 Frictional Properties with Different Lubricants 91 4.3.2.3 Nanowear and Frictional Properties, Evaluated with and without Vibrations 95 4.3.3 Evaluation of the Force Modulation 98 4.3.4 Evaluation of the Mechanical and Other Physical Properties 102 4.4 Conclusions 108 References 108 5 Nanoindentation on Tribological Coatings 111Francisco J.G. Silva 5.1 Introduction 111 5.2 Relevant Properties on Coatings for Tribological Applications 116 5.3 How can Nanoindentation Help Researchers to Characterize Coatings? 116 5.3.1 Thin Coatings Nanoindentation Procedures 118 5.3.2 Hardness Determination 120 5.3.3 Young’s Modulus Determination 123 5.3.4 Tensile Properties Determination 124 5.3.5 Fracture Toughness inThin Films 125 5.3.6 Coatings Adhesion Analysis 126 5.3.7 Stiffness and Other Mechanical Properties 127 5.3.8 Simulation and Models Applied to Nanoindentation 128 References 129 6 Nanoindentation of Macro-porous Materials for Elastic Modulus and Hardness Determination 135Zhangwei Chen 6.1 Introduction 135 6.1.1 Nanoindentation Fundamentals for Dense Materials 135 6.1.2 Introduction to Porous Materials 137 6.1.3 Studies of Elastic Properties of Porous Materials 138 6.2 Nanoindentation of Macro-porous Bulk Ceramics 140 6.3 Nanoindentation of Bone Materials 143 6.4 Nanoindentation of Macro-porous Films 144 6.4.1 Substrate Effect 145 6.4.2 Densification Effect 147 6.4.3 Surface Roughness Effect 149 6.5 Concluding Remarks 151 Acknowledgements 151 References 151 7 Nanoindentation Applied to DC Plasma Nitrided Parts 157Silvio Francisco Brunatto and CarlosMaurício Lepienski 7.1 Introduction 157 7.2 Basic Aspects of DC Plasma Nitrided Parts 160 7.2.1 The Potential Distribution for an Abnormal Glow Discharge 160 7.2.2 Plasma-surface Interaction in Cathode Surface 161 7.2.3 Electrical Configuration Modes in DC Plasma Nitriding 162 7.3 Basic Aspects of Nanoindentation in Nitrided Surfaces 163 7.4 Examples of Nanoindentation Applied to DC Plasma Nitrided Parts 167 7.4.1 Mechanical Polishing: Nanoindentation in Niobium 169 7.4.2 Surface Roughness: Nanoindentation in DC Plasma Nitrided Parts 170 7.4.2.1 Nanoindentation in DC Plasma Nitrided Niobium 170 7.4.2.2 Nanoindentation in DC Plasma Nitrided Titanium 174 7.4.2.3 Nanoindentation in DC Plasma Nitrided Martensitic Stainless Steel 175 7.4.3 Nitrogen-concentration Gradients: Nanoindentation in DC Plasma Nitrided Tool Steel 176 7.4.4 Crystallographic Orientation: Nanoindentation in DC Plasma Nitrided Austenitic Stainless Steels 177 7.5 Conclusion 178 Acknowledgements 179 References 179 8 Nanomechanical Properties of Defective Surfaces 183Oscar Rodríguez de la Fuente 8.1 Introduction 183 8.1.1 The Role of Surface Defects in Plasticity 183 8.1.2 Experimental Techniques for Visualization and Generation of Surface Defects 184 8.1.3 Approaches to Study and Probe Nanomechanical Properties 185 8.2 Homogeneous and Heterogeneous Dislocation Nucleation 186 8.2.1 Homogeneous Dislocation Nucleation 186 8.2.2 Heterogeneous Dislocation Nucleation 188 8.3 Surface Steps 190 8.3.1 Studies on Surface Steps 191 8.4 Subsurface Defects 194 8.4.1 Sub-surface Vacancies 195 8.4.2 Sub-surface Impurities and Dislocations 195 8.5 Rough Surfaces 197 8.6 Conclusions 200 Acknowledgements 200 References 200 9 Viscoelastic and Tribological Behavior of Al2O3 Reinforced Toughened Epoxy Hybrid Nanocomposites 205Mandhakini Mohandas and AlagarMuthukaruppan 9.1 Introduction 205 9.2 Experimental 206 9.2.1 Materials 206 9.2.2 FTIR Analysis 208 9.2.3 Results and Discussion 209 9.2.3.1 Viscoeleastic Properties 210 9.2.3.2 Hardness and Modulus by Nanoindentation 214 9.3 Conclusion 219 References 220 10 Nanoindentation of Hybrid Foams 223Anne Jung, Zhaoyu Chen and Stefan Diebels 10.1 Introduction 223 10.1.1 Motivation 223 10.1.2 State of the art of Nanoindentation of Metal and Metal Foam 226 10.2 Sample Material and Preparation 230 10.2.1 Al Material and Coating Process 230 10.2.2 Sample Preparation for Nanoindentation 231 10.3 Nanoindentation Experiments 232 10.3.1 Experimental Setup 232 10.3.2 Results and Discussion 232 10.4 Conclusions and Outlook 239 Acknowledgements 240 References 240 11 AFM-based Nanoindentation of Cellulosic Fibers 247Christian Ganser and Christian Teichert 11.1 Introduction 247 11.2 Experimental 248 11.2.1 AFM Instrumentation 248 11.2.2 AFM-based Nanoindentation 250 11.2.3 Comparison with Results of Classical NI 255 11.2.4 Sample Preparation 256 11.3 Mechanical Properties of Cellulose Fibers 257 11.3.1 Pulp Fibers 257 11.3.2 Swollen Viscose Fibers 259 11.4 Conclusions and Outlook 265 Acknowledgments 265 References 266 12 Evaluation of Mechanical and Tribological Properties of Coatings for Stainless Steel 269A.Mina, J.C. Caicedo,W. Aperador, M. Mozafari and H.H. Caicedo 12.1 Introduction 269 12.2 Experimental Details 270 12.3 Results and Discussion 271 12.3.1 Crystal Lattice Arrangement of β-TCP/Ch Coatings 271 12.3.2 Surface Coating Analysis 272 12.3.3 Morphological Analysis of the β-TCP-Ch Coatings 274 12.3.4 Mechanical Properties 276 12.3.5 Tribological Properties 279 12.3.6 SurfaceWear Analysis 280 12.3.7 Adhesion Behaviour 281 12.4 Conclusions 283 Acknowledgements 283 References 283 13 Nanoindentation in Metallic Glasses 287Vahid Nekouie, Anish Roy and Vadim V. Silberschmidt 13.1 Introduction 287 13.1.1 Motivation 287 13.1.2 Nanoindentation Studies of Metallic Glasses 288 13.1.2.1 Pile-up and Sink-in 291 13.1.2.2 Indentation Size Effect 293 13.2 Experimental Studies 296 13.2.1 Nano Test Platform III Indentation System 296 13.2.2 Calibration 297 13.2.2.1 Frame Compliance 298 13.2.2.2 Cross-hair Calibration 298 13.2.2.3 Indenter Area Function 298 13.2.3 Experimental Procedure 301 13.2.4 Results and Discussion 301 13.3 Conclusions 307 References 308 Part II 313 14 Molecular Dynamics Modeling of Nanoindentation 315C.J. Ruestes, E.M. Bringa, Y. Gao and H.M. Urbassek 14.1 Introduction 315 14.2 Methods 316 14.2.1 The Indentation Tip 318 14.2.2 Control Methods Used in Experiment and in MD Simulations 319 14.2.3 Penetration Rate 320 14.3 Interatomic Potentials 321 14.3.1 Elastic Constants 321 14.3.2 Generalized Stacking Fault Energies 322 14.4 Elastic Regime 324 14.5 The Onset of Plasticity 325 14.5.1 Evolution of the Dislocation Network 325 14.5.2 Contact Area and Hardness 327 14.5.3 Indentation Rate Effect 328 14.5.4 Tip Diameter Effect 329 14.6 The Plastic Zone: Dislocation Activity 329 14.6.1 Face-centered Cubic Metals 329 14.6.2 Body-centered Cubic Metals 330 14.6.3 Quantification of Dislocation Length and Density 331 14.6.4 Pile-up 333 14.6.5 Geometrically-necessary Dislocations and the Identification of Intrinsic Length-scales from Hardness Simulations 334 14.7 Outlook 336 Acknowledgements 337 References 337 15 Continuum Modelling and Simulation of Indentation in Transparent Single Crystalline Minerals and Energetic Solids 347J.D. Clayton, B.B. Aydelotte, R. Becker, C.D. Hilton and J. Knap 15.1 Introduction 347 15.2 Theory: MaterialModelling 349 15.2.1 General Multi-field Continuum Theory 349 15.2.2 Crystal Plasticity Theory 350 15.2.3 Phase FieldTheory for Twinning 351 15.3 Application: Indentation of RDX Single Crystals 352 15.3.1 Review of PriorWork 353 15.3.2 New Results and Analysis 354 15.4 Application: Indentation of Calcite Single Crystals 356 15.4.1 Review of PriorWork 359 15.4.2 New Results and Analysis 361 15.5 Conclusions 364 Acknowledgements 365 References 365 16 NanoindentationModeling: From Finite Element to Atomistic Simulations 369Daniel Esqué- de los Ojos and Jordi Sort 16.1 Introduction 369 16.2 Scaling and Dimensional Analysis Applied to IndentationModelling 370 16.2.1 Geometrical Similarity of Indenter Tips 370 16.2.2 Dimensional Analysis 371 16.2.3 Dimensional Analysis Applied to Extraction of Mechanical Properties 372 16.3 Finite Element Simulations of Advanced Materials 374 16.3.1 Nanocrystalline Porous Materials and Pressure-sensitive Models 375 16.3.2 Finite Element Simulations of 1D Structures: Nanowires 378 16.3.3 Continuum Crystal Plasticity Finite Element Simulations: Nanoindentation of Thin Solid Films 380 16.4 Nucleation and Interaction of Dislocations During Single Crystal Nanoindentaion: Atomistic Simulations 383 16.4.1 Dislocation Dynamics Simulations 383 16.4.2 Molecular Dynamics Simulations 385 References 386 17 Nanoindentation in silico of Biological Particles 393Olga Kononova, Kenneth A. Marx and Valeri Barsegov 17.1 Introduction 393 17.2 ComputationalMethodology of Nanoindentation in silico 395 17.2.1 Molecular Modelling of Biological Particles 395 17.2.2 Coarse-graining: Self-organized Polymer (SOP) Model 396 17.2.3 MultiscaleModeling Primer: SOP Model Parameterization for Microtubule Polymers 398 17.2.4 Using Graphics Processing Units as Performance Accelerators 399 17.2.5 Virtual AFM Experiment: Forced Indentation in silico of Biological Particles 401 17.3 Biological Particles 403 17.3.1 Cylindrical Particles: Microtubule Polymers 403 17.3.2 Spherical Particles: CCMV Shell 404 17.4 Nanoindentation in silico: Probing Reversible Changes in Near-equilibrium Regime 406 17.4.1 Probing Reversible Transitions 406 17.4.2 Studying Near-equilibrium Dynamics 407 17.5 Application of in silico Nanoindentation: Dynamics of Deformation of MT and CCMV 409 17.5.1 Long Polyprotein – Microtubule Protofilament 409 17.5.2 Cylindrical Particle – Microtubule Polymer 411 17.5.3 Spherical Particle – CCMV Protein Shell 416 17.6 Concluding Remarks 421 References 424 18 Modeling and Simulations in Nanoindentation 429Yi Sun and Fanlin Zeng 18.1 Introduction 429 18.2 Simulations of Nanoindention on Polymers 430 18.2.1 Models and Simulation Methods 430 18.2.2 Load-displacement Responses 431 18.2.3 Hardness and Young’s Modulus 433 18.2.4 The Mechanism of Mechanical Behaviours and Properties 437 18.3 Simulations of Nanoindention on Crystals 441 18.3.1 Models and Simulation Methods 442 18.3.2 The Load-displacement Responses 444 18.3.3 Dislocation Nucleation 446 18.3.4 Mechanism of Dislocation Emission 449 18.4 Conclusions 455 Acknowledgments 456 References 456 19 Nanoindentation of Advanced Ceramics: Applications to ZrO2 Materials 459Joan Josep Roa Rovira, Emilio Jiménez Piqué andMarc J. Anglada Gomila 19.1 Introduction 459 19.2 IndentationMechanics 460 19.2.1 Deformation Mechanics 460 19.2.2 Elastic Contact 461 19.2.3 Elasto/plastic Contact 462 19.3 Fracture Toughness 462 19.4 Coatings 463 19.4.1 Coating Hardness 463 19.4.2 Coating Elastic Modulus 464 19.5 Issues for Reproducible Results 464 19.6 Applications of Nanoindentation to Zirconia 465 19.6.1 Hardness and Elastic Modulus 466 19.6.2 Stress–strain Curve and Phase Transformation 467 19.6.3 Plastic Deformation Mechanisms 468 19.6.4 Mechanical Properties of Damaged Surfaces 468 19.6.5 Relation Between Microstructure and Local Mechanical Properties by Massive Nanoindentation Cartography 471 19.7 Conclusions 472 Acknowledgements 472 References 473 20 FEM Simulation of Nanoindentation 481F. Pöhl, W. Theisen and S. Huth 20.1 Introduction 481 20.2 Indentation of Isotropic Materials 482 20.3 Indentation of Thin Films 489 20.4 Indentation of a Hard Phase Embedded in Matrix 490 References 495 21 Investigations Regarding Plastic Flow Behaviour and Failure Analysis on CrAlN Thin Hard Coatings 501Jan Perne 21.1 Introduction 501 21.2 Description of the Method 501 21.2.1 Flow Curve Determination 502 21.2.1.1 Nanoindentation Step 502 21.2.1.2 Yield Strength Determination 502 21.2.1.3 Flow Curve Determination by Iterative Simulation 503 21.2.1.4 Determination of Strain Rate and Temperature Dependency 503 21.2.2 Failure Criterion Determination with Nano-scratch Analysis 503 21.3 Investigations into the CrAlN Coating System 504 21.3.1 Flow curve dependency on chemical composition and microstructure 504 21.3.2 Strain Rate Dependency of Different CrN-AlN Coating Systems 506 21.3.3 Failure criterion determination on a CrN/AlN nanolaminate 507 21.4 Concluding Remarks 509 References 511 22 Scale Invariant Mechanical Surface Optimization 513Norbert Schwarzer 22.1 Introduction 513 22.1.1 Interatomic Potential Description of Mechanical Material Behavior 513 22.1.2 The Effective Indenter Concept and Its Extension to Layered Materials 514 22.1.3 About Extensions of the Oliver and Pharr Method 514 22.1.3.1 Making the Classical Oliver and Pharr Method Fit for Time Dependent Mechanical Behavior 515 22.1.4 Introduction to the Physical Scratch and/or Tribological Test and its Analysis 515 22.1.5 Illustrative Hypothetical Example for Optimization Against Dust Impact 515 22.1.6 About the Influence of Intrinsic Stresses 516 22.2 Theory 517 22.2.1 First Principle Based Interatomic Potential Description of Mechanical Material Behavior 517 22.2.2 The Effective Indenter Concept 521 22.2.3 An Oliver and Pharr Method for Time Dependent Layered Materials 522 22.2.4 Theory for the Physical Scratch and/or Tribological Test 533 22.2.5 From Quasi-Static Experiments and Parameters to DynamicWear, Fretting and Tribological Tests 534 22.2.6 Including Biaxial Intrinsic Stresses 537 22.3 The Procedure 540 22.4 Discussion by Means of Examples 544 22.5 Conclusions 555 Acknowledgements 555 Referencess 556 23 Modelling and Simulations of Nanoindentation in Single Crystals 561Qiang Liu,Murat Demiral, Anish Roy and Vadim V. Silberschmidt 23.1 Introduction 561 23.2 Review of IndentationModelling 564 23.3 Crystal PlasticityModelling of Nanoindentation 565 23.3.1 Indentation of F.C.C. Copper Single Crystal 567 23.3.2 Indentation of B.C.C. Ti-64 569 23.3.3 Indentation of B.C.C. Ti-15-3-3 571 23.4 Conclusions 573 References 574 24 Computer Simulation and Experimental Analysis of Nanoindentation Technique 579A. Karimzadeh,M.R. Ayatollahi and A. Rahimi 24.1 Introduction 579 24.2 Finite Element Simulation for Nanoindentation 580 24.3 Finite Element Modeling 580 24.3.1 Geometry 580 24.3.2 Material Characteristics 581 24.3.3 Boundary Condition 582 24.3.4 Interaction 582 24.3.5 Meshing 582 24.4 Verification of Finite Element Simulation 583 24.4.1 Nanoindentation Experiment on Al 1100 584 24.4.2 Comparison Between Simulation and Experimental Results for Al 1100 584 24.4.2.1 Load-displacement 584 24.4.2.2 Hardness 588 24.5 Molecular Dynamic Modeling for Nanoindentation 591 24.5.1 Simulation Procedure 592 24.6 Results of Molecular Dynamic Simulation 595 24.7 Conclusions 597 References 597 25 Atomistic Simulations of Adhesion, Indentation andWear at Nanoscale 601Jun Zhong, Donald J. Siegel, Louis G. Hector, Jr. and James B. Adams 25.1 Introduction 601 25.2 Methodologies 604 25.2.1 Density FunctionalTheory 604 25.2.1.1 The Exchange–correlation Functional 605 25.2.1.2 PlaneWaves and Supercell 606 25.2.2 Pseudopotential Approximation 606 25.2.3 Molecular Dynamics 607 25.2.3.1 Equations of Motion 607 25.2.3.2 Algorithms 608 25.2.3.3 Statistical Ensembles 608 25.2.3.4 Interatomic Potentials 608 25.2.3.5 Ab initio Molecular Dynamics 609 25.2.4 Some Commercial Software 611 25.2.4.1 The VASP 611 25.2.4.2 The LAMMPS 611 25.3 Density Functional Study of Adhesion at the Metal/Ceramic Interfaces 612 25.3.1 Calculations 612 25.3.2 Effect of Surface Energies in theWsep 614 25.3.3 Conclusions 615 25.4 Molecular Dynamics Simulations of Nanoindentation 616 25.4.1 Empirical Modeling 616 25.4.1.1 Modeling Geometry and Simulation Procedures 617 25.4.1.2 Results and discussions 618 25.4.1.3 Conclusions 622 25.4.2 Ab initio Modeling 622 25.4.2.1 Modeling Geometry and Simulation Procedures 622 25.4.2.2 Results and Discussions 624 25.5 Molecular Dynamics Simulations of AdhesiveWear on the Al-substrate 628 25.5.1 Modeling Geometry and Simulation Procedures 629 25.5.2 Results and Discussions 630 25.5.2.1 One CommonWear Sequence 630 25.5.2.2 Thermal Analysis for theWear Sequence 631 25.5.2.3 Wear Rate Analyses 632 25.6 Summary and Prospect 636 Acknowledgments 638 References 638 26 Multiscale Model for Nanoindentation in Polymer and Polymer Nanocomposites 647Rezwanur Rahman 26.1 Introduction 647 26.2 Modeling Scheme 648 26.2.1 Details of the MD Simulation 649 26.3 Nanoindentation Test 650 26.4 Theoretically and Experimentally Determined Result 651 26.5 Multiscale of Complex Heterogeneous Materials 651 26.5.1 Introduction to Peridynamics 652 26.5.2 Nonlocal Multiscale Modeling using Peridynamics: Linking Macro- to Nano-scales 654 26.6 MultiscaleModeling for Nanoindentation in Epoxy: EPON 862 655 26.7 UnifiedTheory for MultiscaleModeling 658 26.8 Conclusion 658 References 659 Index 663

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive and example oriented text for the study of chemical process design and simulation Chemical Process Design and Simulation is an accessible guide that offers information on the most important principles of chemical engineering design and includes illustrative examples of their application that uses simulation software. A comprehensive and practical resource, the text uses both Aspen Plus and Aspen Hysys simulation software. The author describes the basic methodologies for computer aided design and offers a description of the basic steps of process simulation in Aspen Plus and Aspen Hysys. The text reviews the design and simulation of individual simple unit operations that includes a mathematical model of each unit operation such as reactors, separators, and heat exchangers. The author also explores the design of new plants and simulation of existing plants where conventional chemicals and material mixtures with measurable compositions are usTable of ContentsList of Tables xiii List of Figures xvii About the author xxv Preface xxvii Acknowledgments xxix Abbreviations xxxi Symbols xxxiii About the Companion Website xliii Part I Introduction to Design and Simulation 1 1 Introduction to Computer-Aided Process Design and Simulation 3 1.1 Process Design 3 1.2 Process Chemistry Concept 4 1.3 Technology Concept 5 1.4 Data Collection 6 1.4.1 Material Properties Data 6 1.4.2 Phase Equilibrium Data 6 1.4.3 Reaction Equilibrium and Reaction Kinetic Data 6 1.5 Simulation of an Existing Process 6 1.6 Development of Process Flow Diagrams 7 1.7 Process Simulation Programs 7 1.7.1 SequentialModular versus Equation-Oriented Approach 9 1.7.2 Starting a Simulation with Aspen Plus 10 1.7.3 Starting a Simulation with Aspen HYSYS 11 1.8 Conventional versus Nonconventional Components 11 1.9 Process Integration and Energy Analysis 14 1.10 Process Economic Evaluation 14 References 14 2 General Procedure for Process Simulation 15 2.1 Component Selection 15 2.2 Property Methods and Phase Equilibrium 25 2.2.1 Physical Property Data Sources 25 2.2.2 Phase Equilibrium Models 27 2.2.3 Selection of a Property Method in Aspen Plus 31 2.2.4 Selection of a Property Package in Aspen HYSYS 35 2.2.5 Pure Component Property Analysis 36 2.2.6 Binary Analysis 38 2.2.7 Azeotrope Search and Analysis of Ternary Systems 44 2.2.8 PT Envelope Analysis 47 2.3 Chemistry and Reactions 48 2.4 Process Flow Diagrams 53 References 58 Part II Design and Simulation of Single Unit Operations 61 3 Heat Exchangers 63 3.1 Heater and Cooler Models 63 3.2 Simple Heat Exchanger Models 66 3.3 Simple Design and Rating of Heat Exchangers 69 3.4 Detailed Design and Simulation of Heat Exchangers 72 3.4.1 HYSYS Dynamic Rating 74 3.4.2 Rigorous Shell and Tube Heat Exchanger Design Using EDR 76 3.5 Selection and Costing of Heat Exchangers 77 References 82 4 Pressure Changing Equipment 85 4.1 Pumps, Hydraulic Turbines, and Valves 85 4.2 Compressors and Gas Turbines 88 4.3 Pressure Drop Calculations in Pipes 92 4.4 Selection and Costing of Pressure Changing Equipment 97 References 99 5 Reactors 101 5.1 Material and Enthalpy Balance of a Chemical Reactor 101 5.2 Stoichiometry and Yield Reactor Models 101 5.3 Chemical Equilibrium Reactor Models 106 5.3.1 REquil Model of Aspen Plus 108 5.3.2 Equilibrium Reactor Model of Aspen HYSYS 108 5.3.3 RGibbs Model of Aspen Plus and Gibbs Reactor Model of Aspen HYSYS 109 5.4 Kinetic Reactor Models 110 5.5 Selection and Costing of Chemical Reactors 122 References 124 6 Separation Equipment 125 6.1 Single Contact Phase Separation 125 6.2 Distillation Column 127 6.2.1 Shortcut DistillationMethod 128 6.2.2 Rigorous Methods 131 6.3 Azeotropic and Extractive Distillation 136 6.4 Reactive Distillation 141 6.5 Absorption and Desorption 145 6.6 Extraction 148 6.7 Selection and Costing of Separation Equipment 150 6.7.1 Distillation Equipment 150 6.7.2 Absorption Equipment 151 6.7.3 Extraction Equipment 152 References 153 7 Solid Handling 155 7.1 Dryer 155 7.2 Crystallizer 160 7.3 Filter 162 7.4 Cyclone 163 7.5 Selection and Costing of Solid Handling Equipment 166 References 167 Exercises – Part II 168 Part III Plant Design and Simulation: Conventional Components 173 8 Simple Concept Design of a New Process 175 8.1 Analysis of Materials and Chemical Reactions 175 8.1.1 Ethyl Acetate Process 175 8.1.2 Styrene Process 176 8.2 Selection of Technology 176 8.2.1 Ethyl Acetate Process 176 8.2.2 Styrene Process 177 8.3 Data Analysis 180 8.3.1 Pure Component Property Analysis 180 8.3.2 Reaction Kinetic and Equilibrium Data 181 8.3.3 Phase Equilibrium Data 185 8.4 Starting Aspen Simulation 188 8.4.1 Ethyl Acetate Process 188 8.4.2 Styrene Process 188 8.5 Process Flow Diagram and Preliminary Simulation 188 8.5.1 Ethyl Acetate Process 188 8.5.2 Styrene Process 193 References 200 9 Process Simulation in an Existing Plant 203 9.1 Analysis of Process Scheme and Syntheses of a Simulation Scheme 203 9.2 Obtaining Input Data from the Records of Process Operation and Technological Documentation 205 9.3 Property Method Selection 206 9.4 Simulator Flow Diagram 207 9.5 Simulation Results 208 9.6 Results Evaluation and Comparison with Real-Data Recorded 208 9.7 Scenarios for Suggested Changes and Their Simulation 211 References 214 10 Material Integration 215 10.1 Material Recycling Strategy 215 10.2 Material Recycling in Aspen Plus 216 10.3 Material Recycling in Aspen HYSYS 219 10.4 Recycling Ratio Optimization 223 10.5 Steam Requirement Simulation 230 10.6 CoolingWater and Other Coolants Requirement Simulation 232 10.7 Gas Fuel Requirement Simulation 233 References 237 11 Energy Integration 239 11.1 Energy Recovery Simulation by Aspen Plus 239 11.2 Energy Recovery Simulation in Aspen HYSYS 242 11.3 Waste Stream Combustion Simulation 244 11.4 Heat Pump Simulation 250 11.5 Heat Exchanger Networks and Energy Analysis Tools in Aspen Software 253 References 261 12 Economic Evaluation 263 12.1 Estimation of Capital Costs 263 12.2 Estimation of Operating Costs 266 12.2.1 Raw Materials 267 12.2.2 Utilities 268 12.2.3 Operating Labor 269 12.2.4 Other Manufacturing Costs 270 12.2.5 General Expenses 270 12.3 Analysis of Profitability 270 12.4 Economic Evaluation Tools of Aspen Software 274 12.4.1 Economic Evaluation Button 274 12.4.2 Economics Active 275 12.4.3 Detailed Economic Evaluation by APEA 275 References 278 Exercises – Part III 279 Part IV Plant Design and Simulation: Nonconventional Components 283 13 Design and Simulation Using Pseudocomponents 285 13.1 Petroleum Assays and Blends 285 13.1.1 Petroleum Assay Characterization in Aspen HYSYS 286 13.1.2 Petroleum Assay Characterization in Aspen Plus 289 13.2 Primary Distillation of Crude Oil 294 13.3 Cracking and Hydrocracking Processes 307 13.3.1 Hydrocracking of Vacuum Residue 309 13.3.2 Modeling of an FCC Unit in Aspen HYSYS 315 References 319 14 Processes with Nonconventional Solids 321 14.1 Drying of Nonconventional Solids 321 14.2 Combustion of Solid Fuels 326 14.3 Coal, Biomass, and SolidWaste Gasification 329 14.3.1 Chemistry 329 14.3.2 Technology 332 14.3.3 Data 334 14.3.4 Simulation 334 14.4 Pyrolysis of Organic Solids and Bio-oil Upgrading 341 14.4.1 Component List 341 14.4.2 Property Models 342 14.4.3 Process Flow Diagram 342 14.4.4 Feed Stream 344 14.4.5 Pyrolysis Yields 344 14.4.6 Distillation Column 344 14.4.7 Results 344 References 346 15 Processes with Electrolytes 347 15.1 Acid Gas Removal by an Alkali Aqueous Solution 347 15.1.1 Chemistry 347 15.1.2 Property Methods 350 15.1.3 Process Flow Diagram 351 15.1.4 Simulation Results 353 15.2 Simulation of Sour Gas Removal by Aqueous Solution of Amines 355 15.3 Rate-Based Modeling of Absorbers with Electrolytes 361 References 365 16 Simulation of Polymer Production Processes 367 16.1 Overview of Modeling Polymerization Process in Aspen Plus 367 16.2 Component Characterization 368 16.3 Property Method 369 16.4 Reaction Kinetics 370 16.5 Process Flow Diagram 375 16.6 Results 379 References 383 Exercises – Part IV 384 Index 387

Read more less

Book SynopsisMultiscale Structural Mechanics provides a unified approach for composites modelling based on the representative structure element. After introducing the basic knowledge in vectors and tensors, continuum mechanics, micromechanics and structural mechanics, this concept is introduced and applied to construct micromechanics models and structural mechanics for beams, plates, and shells. This book fills the gap of rigorously bridging micromechanics and structural mechanics. The structural models remain the same as simple engineering models, however with the accuracy comparable to more complex theories. A general-purpose constitutive modelling code also accompanies the book to provide practical tools for engineers to efficiently and accurately model composites.

Read more less

Book SynopsisApplied Biophysics for Drug Discovery is a guide to new techniques and approaches to identifying and characterizing small molecules in early drug discovery.Table of ContentsList of Contributors xiii 1 Introduction 1Donald Huddler References 3 2 Thermodynamics in Drug Discovery 7Ronan O’Brien, Natalia Markova, and Geoffrey A. Holdgate 2.1 Introduction 7 2.2 Methods for Measuring Thermodynamics of Biomolecular Interactions 8 2.2.1 Direct Method: Isothermal Titration Calorimetry 8 2.2.2 Indirect Methods: van’t Hoff Analysis 8 2.2.2.1 Enthalpy Measurement Using van’t Hoff Analysis 8 2.3 Thermodynamic‐Driven Lead Optimization 9 2.3.1 The Thermodynamic Rules of Thumb 9 2.3.2 Enthalpy–Entropy Compensation 10 2.3.3 Enthalpy–Entropy Transduction 13 2.3.4 The Role of Water 14 2.4 Enthalpy as a Probe for Binding 15 2.4.1 Thermodynamics in Fragment‐Based Drug Design (FBDD) 15 2.4.2 Experimental Considerations and Limitations When Working with Fragments 16 2.4.3 Enthalpic Screening 17 2.5 Enthalpy as a Tool for Studying Complex Interactions 17 2.5.1 Identifying and Handling Complexity 17 2.6 Current and Future Prospects for Thermodynamics in Decision‐Making Processes 24 References 25 3 Tailoring Hit Identification and Qualification Methods for Targeting Protein–Protein Interactions 29Björn Walse, Andrew P. Turnbull, and Susan M. Boyd 3.1 Introduction 29 3.2 Structural Characteristics of PPI Interfaces 29 3.3 Screening Library Properties 31 3.3.1 Standard/Targeted Libraries/DOS 31 3.3.2 Fragment Libraries 33 3.3.3 Macrocyclic and Constrained Peptides 33 3.3.4 DNA‐Encoded Libraries 34 3.4 Hit‐Finding Strategies 34 3.4.1 Small‐Molecule Approaches 36 3.4.2 Peptide‐Based Approaches 38 3.4.3 In Silico Approaches 39 3.5 Druggability Assessment 39 3.5.1 Small Molecule: Ligand‐Based Approaches 41 3.5.2 Small Molecule: Protein Structure‐Based Approaches 41 3.6 Allosteric Inhibition of PPIs 42 3.7 Stabilization of PPIs 43 3.8 Case Studies 43 3.8.1 Primary Peptide Epitopes 43 3.8.1.1 Bromodomains 44 3.8.2 Secondary Structure Epitopes 46 3.8.2.1 Bcl‐2 46 3.8.2.2 p53/MDM2 47 3.8.3 Tertiary Structure Epitopes 47 3.8.3.1 CD80–CD28 48 3.8.3.2 IL‐17A 48 3.9 Summary 49 References 50 4 Hydrogen–Deuterium Exchange Mass Spectrometry in Drug Discovery - Theory, Practice and Future 61Thorleif Lavold, Roman Zubarev, and Juan Astorga‐Wells 4.1 General Principles 61 4.2 Parameters Affecting Deuterium Incorporation 63 4.2.1 Primary Sequence 63 4.2.2 Intramolecular Hydrogen Bonding 63 4.2.3 Solvent Accessibility 63 4.2.4 pH Value 63 4.3 Utilization of HDX MS 64 4.3.1 Binding Site and Structural Changes Characterization upon Ligand Binding 64 4.3.1.1 Protein Stability - Biosimilar Characterization 64 4.4 Practical Aspects of HDX MS 65 4.4.1 Labeling 66 4.4.1.1 Deuterium Oxide and Protein Concentration 66 4.4.1.2 Ligand/Protein Ratio 66 4.4.1.3 Incubation–Labeling Time 66 4.4.1.4 Careful Preparation of the Control Sample 66 4.4.2 Sample Analysis 66 4.4.3 Data Analysis 67 4.5 Advantages of HDX MS 67 4.6 Perspectives and Future Application of HDX MS 68 References 69 5 Microscale Thermophoresis in Drug Discovery 73Tanja Bartoschik, Melanie Maschberger, Alessandra Feoli, Timon André, Philipp Baaske, Stefan Duhr, and Dennis Breitsprecher 5.1 Microscale Thermophoresis 73 5.1.1 Theoretical Background 74 5.1.2 Added Values for Small‐Molecule Interaction Studies 76 5.1.2.1 Size‐Change Independent Binding Signals 76 5.1.2.2 Difficult Targets and Assay Conditions 78 5.1.2.3 Detection of Aggregation and Other Secondary Effects 80 5.1.2.4 Quantification of Thermodynamic Parameters by MST 80 5.2 MST‐Based Lead Discovery 82 5.2.1 Single‐Point Screening 82 5.2.2 Secondary Affinity‐Based Fragment Screening by MST 85 5.2.3 Hit Identification and Affinity Determination of Small‐Molecule Binders to p38 Alpha Kinase 87 References 87 6 SPR Screening: Applying the New Generation of SPR Hardware 93Kartik Narayan and Steven S. Carroll 6.1 Platforms for Screening 93 6.2 SensiQ Pioneer as a “OneStep” Solution for Hit Identification 95 6.3 Deprioritization of False Positives Arising from Compound Aggregation 99 6.4 Concluding Remarks 103 References 104 7 Weak Affinity Chromatography (WAC) 107Sten Ohlson and Minh‐Dao Duong‐Thi 7.1 Introduction 107 7.2 Theory of WAC 109 7.3 Virtual WAC 110 7.4 Equipment and Procedure 111 7.5 Validation of WAC 113 7.6 Applications 114 7.6.1 Inhibitors for Cholera Toxin 115 7.6.2 Drug/Hormone: Protein Binding 115 7.6.3 Analysis of Stereoisomers 119 7.6.4 Carbohydrate Analysis with Antibodies and Lectins 120 7.6.5 Fragment Screening 121 7.6.6 Membrane Proteins 122 7.7 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 124 Acknowledgments 125 References 125 8 1D NMR Methods for Hit Identification 131Mary J. Harner, Guille Metzler, Caroline A. Fanslau, Luciano Mueller, and William J. Metzler 8.1 Introduction 131 8.2 NMR Methods for Quality Control 131 8.2.1 Compound DMSO Stock Concentration Determination 132 8.2.2 Compound Solubility Measurements in Aqueous Buffer 134 8.2.3 Compound Structural Integrity 136 8.2.4 Protein Reagent Characterization 136 8.3 NMR Binding Assays 136 8.3.1 Saturation Transfer Difference Assay 138 8.3.2 T2 Relaxation Assay 140 8.3.3 WaterLOGSY Assay 141 8.3.4 19F Displacement Assay 142 8.4 Multiplexing 143 8.5 Specificity 144 8.6 Automation 146 8.7 Practical Considerations for NMR Binding Assays 146 8.7.1 Compound Libraries 146 8.7.2 Tube Selection and Filling 147 8.7.3 Buffers 148 8.7.4 Targets 149 8.7.5 Experiment Selection 150 8.8 Conclusions 151 References 151 9 Protein‐Based NMR Methods Applied to Drug Discovery 153Alessio Bortoluzzi and Alessio Ciulli 9.1 Introduction 153 9.2 Chemical Shift Perturbation 154 9.2.1 Using Chemical Shift Perturbation to Study a Binding Event Between a Protein and a Ligand 154 9.2.2 Tackling the High Molecular Weight Limit by Reducing Transverse Relaxation and by Selective Labeling Patterns 156 9.2.3 CSP as Tool for Screening Campaigns 157 9.2.4 Structure–Activity Relationship by NMR 160 9.3 Methods for Obtaining Structural Information on Protein–Ligand Complex 160 9.3.1 SOS‐NMR 161 9.3.2 NOE‐Matching 162 9.3.3 Paramagnetic NMR Spectroscopy 162 9.4 Recent and Innovative Examples of Protein‐Observed NMR Techniques Applied Drug Discovery 163 9.4.1 An NMR‐Based Conformational Assay to Aid the Drug Discovery Process 163 9.4.2 In‐Cell NMR Techniques Applied to Drug Discovery 165 9.4.3 Time‐Resolved NMR Spectroscopy as a Tool for Studying Inhibitors of Posttranslational Modification Enzymes 166 9.4.4 Protein‐Observed 19F NMR Spectroscopy 168 9.5 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 170 References 170 10 Applications of Ligand and Protein‐Observed NMR in Ligand Discovery 175Isabelle Krimm 10.1 Introduction 175 10.2 Ligand‐Observed NMR Experiments Based on the Overhauser Effect 176 10.2.1 Transferred NOE, ILOE, and INPHARMA Experiments 176 10.2.1.1 Principle of the Transferred 2D 1H‐1H NOESY Experiment 176 10.2.1.2 Fragment‐Based Screening Using 2D Tr‐NOESY Experiment 178 10.2.1.3 Elucidation of the Active Conformation of the Ligand Using 2D 1H‐1H NOESY Experiment 178 10.2.1.4 Design of Protein Inhibitors Using Interligand NOEs 178 10.2.1.5 Identification of the Ligand Binding Site and Binding Mode Using INPHARMA 178 10.2.1.6 Design of Protein Inhibitors Using INPHARMA with Protein–Peptide Complexes 179 10.2.1.7 Experimental Conditions of the 2D 1H‐1H NOESY Experiment 179 10.2.2 Saturation Transfer Difference Experiment 180 10.2.2.1 Principle of the STD Experiment 180 10.2.2.2 Detection of Interactions and Library Screening by STD 180 10.2.2.3 Epitope Mapping by STD 181 10.2.2.4 Affinity Measurement by STD 181 10.2.2.5 Quantitative STD Using CORCEMA 183 10.2.2.6 Experimental Conditions 183 10.2.3 WaterLOGSY Experiment 184 10.2.3.1 Principle of the WaterLOGSY Experiment 184 10.2.3.2 Screening and Affinity Measurement by WaterLOGSY 184 10.2.3.3 Epitope Mapping and Water Accessibility in Protein–Ligand Complexes by WaterLOGSY 184 10.2.3.4 Experimental Conditions 185 10.3 Protein‐Observed NMR Experiments: Chemical Shift Perturbations 185 10.3.1 Principle 185 10.3.2 Affinity Measurement Using CSPs 186 10.3.3 Localization of Binding Sites Using CSPs 186 10.3.3.1 Chemical Shift Mapping 186 10.3.3.2 J‐Surface Modeling 187 10.3.4 Comparison of CSPs from Analogous Ligands 187 10.3.5 Back‐Calculation of Ligand‐Induced CSPs for Ligand Docking 187 10.3.5.1 CSP‐Based Post‐Docking Filter 189 10.3.5.2 CSP‐Guided Docking 189 10.4 Conclusion 189 Acknowledgments 191 References 191 11 Using Biophysical Methods to Optimize Compound Residence Time 197Geoffrey A. Holdgate, Philip Rawlins, Michal Bista, and Christopher J. Stubbs 11.1 Introduction 197 11.2 Biophysical Methods for Measuring Ligand Binding Kinetics 197 11.3 Measuring Structure–Kinetic Relationships: Some Example Case Studies 200 11.4 Effects of Conformational Dynamics on Binding Kinetics 201 11.5 Kinetic Selectivity 204 11.6 Mechanism of Binding and Kinetics 207 11.7 Optimizing Residence Time 207 11.8 Role of BK in Improving Efficacy 209 11.9 Effect of Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics 210 11.10 Summary 212 References 213 12 Applying Biophysical and Biochemical Methods to the Discovery of Allosteric Modulators of the AAA ATPase p97 217Stacie L. Bulfer and Michelle R. Arkin 12.1 p97 and Proteostasis Regulation 217 12.2 Structure and Dynamics of p97 218 12.3 Drug Discovery Efforts against p97 222 12.4 Uncompetitive Inhibitors of p97 Discovered by High‐Throughput Screening 223 12.4.1 Biochemical MOA Studies 223 12.4.2 Surface Plasmon Resonance 225 12.4.3 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance 226 12.4.4 Cryo‐EM Defines the Binding Site for an Uncompetitive Inhibitor of p97 228 12.4.5 Effect of Inhibitors on p97 PPI and MSP1 Disease Mutations 231 12.5 Fragment‐ Based Ligand Screening 231 12.5.1 Targeting the ND1 Domains 232 12.5.2 Targeting the N‐Domain 233 12.6 Conclusions 234 References 234 13 Driving Drug Discovery with Biophysical Information: Application to Staphylococcus aureus Dihydrofolate Reductase (DHFR) 241Parag Sahasrabudhe, Veerabahu Shanmugasundaram, Mark Flanagan, Kris A. Borzilleri, Holly Heaslet, Anil Rane, Alex McColl, Tim Subashi, George Karam, Ron Sarver, Melissa Harris, Boris A.Chrunyk, Chakrapani Subramanyam, Thomas V. Magee, Kelly Fahnoe, Brian Lacey, Henry Putz, J. Richard Miller, Jaehyun Cho, Arthur Palmer III, and Jane M. Withka 13.1 Introduction 241 13.2 Results and Discussion 245 13.2.1 Protein Dynamics of SA WT and S1 Mutant DHFR in Apo and Bound States 245 13.2.2 Protein Backbone 15N, 13C, and 1H NMR Resonance Assignments 246 13.2.3 Protein Residues Show Severe Line Broadening due to Conformational Exchange 246 13.2.4 R2 Relaxation Dispersion NMR Experiments 248 13.2.5 Kinetic Profiling of DHFR Inhibitors 251 13.2.6 Characterization of SA WT and S1 Mutant DHFR–TMP Interactions in Solution 253 13.2.7 Prospective Biophysics Library Design 254 13.3 Conclusion 258 References 259 14 Assembly of Fragment Screening Libraries: Property and Diversity Analysis 263Bradley C. Doak, Craig J. Morton, Jamie S. Simpson, and Martin J. Scanlon 14.1 Introduction 263 14.2 Physicochemical Properties of Fragments 265 14.3 Molecular Diversity and Its Assessment 268 14.4 Experimental Evaluation of Fragments 274 14.5 Assembling Libraries for Screening 275 14.6 Concluding Remarks 279 References 280 Index 285

Read more less

Book SynopsisWood Deterioration, Protection and Maintenance provides an up to date discussion of the natural durability of wood, wood degradation processes, and methods of structural and chemical protection of wood.Table of ContentsPreface ix About the Author xi 1 Wood Durability and Lifetime of Wooden Products 1 1.1 Basic information about wood structure and its properties 1 1.1.1 Wood structure 3 1.1.2 Wood properties 10 1.2 Types and principles of wood degradation 12 1.3 Natural durability of wood 14 1.4 Methods of wood protection for improvement its durability 17 1.5 Service life prediction of wooden products 18 1.5.1 Lifetime of wooden products 20 1.5.2 Service life prediction of wooden products by factor method 21 1.5.3 Life cycle assessment of wooden products 22 References 25 Standards 27 2 Abiotic Degradation of Wood 28 2.1 Wood damaged by weather factors 28 2.2 Wood damaged thermally and by fire 34 2.2.1 Thermal wood decomposition 34 2.2.2 Wood burning: fire 36 2.3 Wood damaged by aggressive chemicals 45 2.3.1 Corrosion of wood by chemicals under aerobic conditions 45 2.3.2 Corrosion of wood by chemicals under anaerobic conditions: wood fossilization 49 2.4 Properties of abiotically damaged wood 50 2.4.1 Properties of weathered wood 50 2.4.2 Impact of increased temperature and fire on wood properties 52 2.4.3 Impact of water and other chemicals on wood properties 53 References 57 Standards 61 3 Biological Degradation of Wood 62 3.1 Wood damaged by bacteria 62 3.2 Wood damaged by fungi 65 3.2.1 Reproduction, classification and physiology of wood-damaging fungi 66 3.2.2 Wood-decaying fungi 76 3.2.3 Wood-staining fungi and moulds 88 3.3 Wood damaged by insects 91 3.3.1 Reproduction, classification and physiology of wood-damaging insects 91 3.3.2 Wood-damaging insects 97 3.4 Wood damaged by marine organisms 106 3.4.1 Shipworms 106 3.4.2 Limnoria 107 3.5 Mechanisms of wood biodegradation 108 3.5.1 Biodegradation of cellulose 110 3.5.2 Biodegradation of hemicelluloses 113 3.5.3 Biodegradation of lignin 114 3.6 Properties of biologically damaged wood 117 3.6.1 Properties of rotten wood 117 3.6.2 Properties of wood having galleries 118 References 120 4 Structural Protection of Wood 126 4.1 Methodology of structural protection of wood 126 4.2 Selection of suitable wood materials 126 4.3 Design proposals for permanently low moisture of wood 129 4.3.1 Estimated moisture of wood 129 4.3.2 Shape optimizations for wood moisture reduction 131 4.3.3 Waterproofing and other isolations of wood and wooden composites from water sources 137 4.3.4 Structural design to prevent condensed water generation 140 4.3.5 Regulation of climatic conditions in interiors 141 4.4 Fire sections and other fire-safety measures 142 References 143 Standards 144 5 Chemical Protection of Wood 145 5.1 Methodology, ecology and regulation of chemical protection of wood 145 5.1.1 Methodology and legislation of chemical protection of wood 146 5.1.2 Toxicological and ecotoxicological standpoints of chemical protection of wood 149 5.1.3 Regulation of chemical protection of wood 151 5.2 Preservatives for wood protection 152 5.2.1 Bactericides 152 5.2.2 Fungicides: for decay, sap-stain and mould control 153 5.2.3 Insecticides 163 5.2.4 Fire retardants 167 5.2.5 Protective coatings against weather impacts 170 5.2.6 Evaluation of new preservatives 172 5.3 Technologies of chemical protection of wood 173 5.3.1 Improvement of permeability and impregnability of wood 174 5.3.2 Application properties of preservatives 176 5.3.3 Flow and diffusion transport of preservatives in wood 177 5.3.4 Fixation of preservatives in wood 182 5.3.5 Non-autoclave technologies of chemical protection of wood 182 5.3.6 Autoclave technologies of chemical protection of wood 186 5.3.7 Nanotechnologies and nano-compounds for chemical protection of wood 191 5.3.8 Quality control of chemically protected wood 193 5.4 Chemical protection of wooden composites 196 5.4.1 Wooden composites and their susceptibility to damage 196 5.4.2 Principles and technologies of chemical protection of wooden composites 199 References 206 Standards 215 Directives 217 6 Modifying Protection of Wood 218 6.1 Methodology, ecology and effectiveness of wood modification 218 6.1.1 Methods of wood modification: mechanical, physical, chemical and biological 219 6.1.2 Ecology of wood modification 221 6.1.3 Effectiveness of wood modification 221 6.2 Thermally modified wood 223 6.2.1 Principles, methods and technology of thermal wood modification 223 6.2.2 Durability and other properties of thermally modified wood 226 6.2.3 Applications of thermally modified wood 230 6.3 Chemically modified wood 231 6.3.1 Principles, methods and technology of chemical wood modification 231 6.3.2 Substances intentionally or randomly reacting with wood components 233 6.3.3 Durability and other properties of chemically modified wood 242 6.3.4 Applications of chemically modified wood 247 6.4 Biologically modified wood 247 6.4.1 Microorganisms suppressing the activity of wood-damaging fungi and insects 247 6.4.2 Gene engineering for increasing durability of wood and decreasing the activity of fungal enzymes 249 References 250 Standards 259 7 Maintenance of Wood and Restoration of Damaged Wood 260 7.1 Aims and enforcement of the maintenance and the restoration of damaged wood 260 7.2 Wood maintenance 260 7.2.1 Principles of wood maintenance in exteriors and interiors 260 7.2.2 Principles of the fight against the active stages of wood pests 261 7.3 Diagnosis of damaged wood 264 7.3.1 Sensory diagnostic methods 265 7.3.2 Instrumental diagnostic methods 266 7.3.3 Diagnosing the age of wood 278 7.4 Sterilization of biologically damaged wood 279 7.4.1 Physical sterilization of wood 280 7.4.2 Chemical sterilization of wood 286 7.5 Conservation of damaged wood 289 7.5.1 Natural and synthetic agents for wood conservation 289 7.5.2 Methods and technologies for the conservation of air-dried damaged wood 301 7.5.3 Methods and technologies for the conservation of waterlogged wood 306 7.6 Renovation of damaged wood 308 7.6.1 General requirements for the renovation of wooden objects 309 7.6.2 Techniques for strengthening of individual wooden elements 313 7.6.3 Techniques for strengthening of whole wooden structural units 324 References 327 Standards 337 Index 339

Read more less

Book SynopsisA wide-ranging and practical handbook that offers comprehensive treatment of high-pressure common rail technology for students and professionals In this volume, Dr. Ouyang and his colleagues answer the need for a comprehensive examination of high-pressure common rail systems for electronic fuel injection technology, a crucial element in the optimization of diesel engine efficiency and emissions. The text begins with an overview of common rail systems today, including a look back at their progress since the 1970s and an examination of recent advances in the field. It then provides a thorough grounding in the design and assembly of common rail systems with an emphasis on key aspects of their design and assembly as well as notable technological innovations. This includes discussion of advancements in dual pressure common rail systems and the increasingly influential role of Electronic Control Unit (ECU) technology in fuel injector systems. The authors conclude with a look towards the deveTable of ContentsPreface xiii Introduction xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 The Development of an Electronic Control Fuel Injection System 2 1.1.1 Position Type Electronic Control Fuel Injection System 3 1.1.2 Time Type Electronic Control Fuel Injection System 4 1.1.3 Pressure–Time Controlled (Common Rail) Type Electronic Control Fuel Injection System 4 1.1.3.1 Medium-Pressure Common Rail System 5 1.1.3.2 High-Pressure Common Rail System 6 1.2 High-Pressure Common Rail System: Present Situation and Development 7 1.2.1 For a Common Rail System 7 1.2.1.1 Germany BOSCH Company of the High-Pressure Common Rail System 8 1.2.1.2 The Delphi DCR System of the Company 10 1.2.1.3 Denso High-Pressure Common Rail Injection System of the Company 10 1.2.2 High-Power Marine Diesel Common Rail System 11 1.2.2.1 System Structure 11 1.2.2.2 High-Pressure Oil Pump 12 1.2.2.3 Accumulator 13 1.2.2.4 Electronically Controlled Injector 13 2 Common Rail System Simulation and Overall Design Technology 15 2.1 Common Rail System Basic Model 15 2.1.1 The Common Rail System Required to Simulate a Typical Module HYDSIM 16 2.1.1.1 Container Class 16 2.1.1.2 Valves 17 2.1.1.3 Runner Class Module 19 2.1.1.4 Annular Gap Class Module Physical Model Shown in Figure 2.6 20 2.1.2 The Relevant Parameters During the Simulation Calculations 21 2.1.2.1 Fuel Physical Parameters 21 2.1.2.2 Fuel Flow Resistance 21 2.1.2.3 Partial Loss of Fuel Flow 22 2.1.2.4 Rigid Elastic Volume Expansion and Elastic Compression 22 2.2 Common Rail System Simulation Model 23 2.2.1 High-Pressure Pump Simulation Model 23 2.2.2 Injector Flow Restrictor Simulation Model 24 2.2.3 Simulation Model Electronic Fuel Injector 25 2.2.4 Overall Model Common Rail System 25 2.3 Influence Analysis of the High-Pressure Common Rail System Parameters 26 2.3.1 Influence Analysis of the High-Pressure Fuel Pump Structure Parameters 26 2.3.1.1 Frequency of the Fuel Supply Pump 27 2.3.1.2 Quantity of the Fuel Supply by the High-Pressure Supply Pump 27 2.3.1.3 Diameter of the Oil Outlet Valve Hole of the High-Pressure Pump 29 2.3.1.4 Influence of the Pre-tightening Force of the Oil Outlet Valve 31 2.3.2 Analysis of the Influence of the High-Pressure Rail Volume 33 2.3.3 Influence of the Injector Structure Parameters 34 2.3.3.1 Control Orifice Diameter 34 2.3.3.2 Influence of the Control Chamber Volume 36 2.3.3.3 Influence of the Control Piston Assembly on the Fuel Injector Response Characteristics 36 2.3.3.4 Influence of the Needle Valve Chamber Volume 38 2.3.3.5 Influence of the Pressure Chamber Volume 38 2.3.3.6 Influence of the Nozzle Orifice Diameter on the Response Characteristics of the Injector 39 2.3.4 Influence of the Flow Limiter 40 2.3.4.1 Influence of the Plunger Diameter 40 2.3.4.2 Influence of the Flow Limiter Orifice Diameter 41 2.3.5 Common Rail System Design Principle 42 3 Electronically Controlled Injector Design Technologies 43 3.1 Electric Control Fuel Injector Control Solenoid Valve Design Technology 43 3.1.1 Solenoid Valve 33 Mathematical Analysis Model 43 3.1.1.1 Circuit Subsystem 43 3.1.1.2 Magnetic Circuit Subsystem 46 3.1.1.3 Mechanical Circuit Subsystem 47 3.1.1.4 Hydraulic Subsystem 48 3.1.1.5 Thermodynamic Subsystem 48 3.1.1.6 Dynamic Characteristic Synthetic Mathematical Model of the Solenoid Valve 49 3.1.2 Solenoid Magnetic Field Finite Element Analysis 49 3.1.2.1 Model Establishment and Mesh Creation 50 3.1.2.2 Loading Analysis 51 3.1.2.3 Result Display After ANSYS 53 3.1.3 Solenoid Valve Response Characteristic Analysis 53 3.1.3.1 The Influence of Spring Pre-load on the Dynamic Response Time of the Solenoid Valve 57 3.1.3.2 The Influence of Spring Stiffness on the Dynamic Response Time of the Solenoid Valve 60 3.1.3.3 The Influence of Driving Voltage on the Dynamic Response Time of the Solenoid Valve 60 3.1.3.4 Influence of Capacitance on the Dynamic Response Time of the Solenoid Valve 62 3.1.3.5 Influence of Structure of the Iron Core on the Response Characteristics of the Solenoid Valve 63 3.1.3.6 Influence of Coil Structure Parameters on the Response Characteristics of the Solenoid Valve 67 3.1.3.7 The Influence of Working Air Gap (Electromagnetic Valve Lift) of the Solenoid Valve 68 3.1.3.8 Material Selection of the Electromagnetic Valve 69 3.1.4 What Should Be of Concern When Designing the Solenoid Valve 71 3.2 Nozzle Design Technology 72 3.2.1 Mathematical Model and Spray Model Analysis of the Nozzle Internal Flow Field 72 3.2.1.1 CFD Simulation of the Nozzle Flow Field 73 3.2.1.1.1 Description of the Computational Model 73 3.2.1.2 Determination of the Calculation Area and Establishment of the Calculation Model 78 3.2.1.3 Discrete Computational Model of the Finite Volume Method 81 3.2.1.3.1 Computational Mesh Generation 81 3.2.1.3.2 Definition of Boundary and Initial Conditions 82 3.2.1.3.3 Numerical Solution 83 3.2.1.4 Spray Model of the Nozzle 84 3.2.1.4.1 Hole Type Flow Nozzle Model 85 3.2.1.4.2 WAVE Model 86 3.2.1.4.3 KH-RT Model 88 3.2.1.4.4 Primary Breakup Model of Diesel Engine 89 3.2.2 Analysis of the Influence of Injection on the Electronically Controlled Injector 90 3.2.2.1 The Effect of Injector Orifices 91 3.2.2.2 The Influence of the Ratio of the Length to the Diameter of the Orifice 95 3.2.2.3 The Influence of the Round Angle at the Inlet of the Orifice 101 3.2.2.4 The Influence of the Shape of the Needle Valve Head 106 3.2.2.5 Effect of the Injection Angle 110 3.2.2.6 The Influence of the Number of Orifices 116 3.2.3 Simulation and Experimental Study of Spray 119 3.2.3.1 Test Scheme 119 3.2.3.2 Simulation Calculation of the Nozzle Flow Field 119 3.2.3.3 Simulation and Test Verification of Spray 123 4 High-Pressure Fuel Pump Design Technology 127 4.1 Leakage Control Technique for the Plunger and Barrel Assembly 127 4.1.1 Finite Element Analysis of the Fluid Physical Field in the Plunger and Barrel Assembly Gap 130 4.1.1.1 Similarity Principle 130 4.1.1.2 Similarity Criterion 131 4.1.1.3 Dimensional Analysis and the Pion Theorem 132 4.1.1.4 Similarity Model and Finite Element Analysis of the Clearance Flow Field 133 4.1.2 Finite Element Analysis of the Plunger and Barrel Assembly Structure 138 4.1.2.1 Three-dimensional Solid Finite Element Model 138 4.1.2.2 Constraint Condition of Structure Field 139 4.1.2.3 Structural Field Solution 140 4.1.3 Structural Optimization of the Plunger and Barrel Assembly 140 4.1.3.1 Analysis of the Preliminary Simulation Result 140 4.1.3.2 Deformation Compensation Optimization Strategy 144 4.1.3.3 ANSYS Optimization Analysis 144 4.1.3.4 Evaluation of the Optimization Result 147 4.1.4 Experimental Study on the Deformation Compensation Performance of the Plunger and Barrel Assembly 148 4.1.4.1 Test for the Sealing Performance of the Plunger and Barrel Assembly 148 4.1.4.2 Plunger and Barrel Assembly Deformation Test 151 4.2 Strength Analysis of the Cam Transmission System for a High-pressure Fuel Pump 154 4.2.1 Dynamic Simulation of the Cam Mechanism of a High-Pressure Pump 155 4.2.1.1 Solid Modeling 155 4.2.1.2 Rigid–Flexible Hybrid Modeling and Simulation of the Camshaft Mechanism 156 4.2.2 Stress Analysis of the Cam and Roller Contact Surface 158 4.2.2.1 Contact Stress Calculation Method 159 4.2.2.2 Calculation of Contact Stress under the Combined Action of Normal and Tangential Loads 162 4.2.2.3 Analysis of the CamWorking State 164 4.2.3 Experimental Study on Stress and Strain of the High-Pressure Fuel Pump 169 4.2.3.1 Test and Analysis of the Pressure of the Plunger Cavity 169 4.2.3.2 Stress Test and Analysis of the Camshaft 174 4.3 Research on Common Rail Pressure Control Technology Based on Pump Flow Control 176 4.3.1 Design Study of a High-Pressure Pump Flow Control Device 177 4.3.1.1 Overview of a High-Pressure Pump Flow Control Device 177 4.3.1.2 Structure andWorking Principle of the High-Speed Solenoid Valve 181 4.3.1.3 Simulation of the Static Characteristic of the Solenoid Valve 183 4.3.1.4 Simulation of Dynamic Characteristics of the Solenoid Valve 188 4.3.1.5 Design and Optimization of the One-Way Valve 191 4.3.2 Conjoint Simulation Analysis of a Flow Control Device and the Common Rail System 194 4.3.2.1 Simulation of the Flow Control Device 194 4.3.3 Analysis of Simulation Results 196 4.3.4 Experimental Study on the Regulation of Common Rail Pressure by the Flow Control Device 200 4.3.4.1 Test Device 200 4.3.4.2 Sealing Performance Test of the One-Way Valve 201 4.3.4.3 Experimental Study on the Dynamic Response Characteristics of the Electromagnet 202 4.3.4.4 Test of Pressure Control in the Common Rail Chamber 204 4.3.4.5 Test Results 205 4.3.4.6 Experimental Study of the Influence of the Duty Ratio of the Solenoid Valve on the Pressure Fluctuation of the Common Rail 208 5 ECU Design Technique 211 5.1 An Overview of Diesel Engine Electronically Controlled Technology 211 5.1.1 The Development of ECU 212 5.1.1.1 The Application of Control Theory in the Research of an Electronically Controlled Unit 212 5.1.1.1.1 Adaptive Control and Robust Control 212 5.1.1.1.2 Neural Network and Fuzzy Control 213 5.1.1.2 Function Expansion of the Engine Management System 213 5.1.1.2.1 Fault Diagnosis Function for an Electronically Controlled Engine 214 5.1.1.2.2 Field Bus Technology 214 5.1.1.2.3 Sensor Technology 214 5.1.1.3 Development of Computer Hardware Technology 215 5.1.2 Development of Electronically Controlled System Development Tools and Design Methods 215 5.1.2.1 Application of Computer Simulation Technology 215 5.1.2.2 Computer-Aided Control System Design Technology 216 5.2 Overall Design of the Controller 217 5.2.1 Controller Development Process 217 5.2.2 Hierarchical Function Design and Technical Indicators of the Controller 219 5.2.3 Input Signal 221 5.2.3.1 Man–Machine Interactive Interface Input Signal 222 5.2.3.1.1 Switching Signal 222 5.2.3.1.2 Continuous Signal 222 5.2.3.2 Sensor Input Signal 222 5.2.3.2.1 Temperature Input Signal 222 5.2.3.2.2 Pressure Input Signal 223 5.2.3.2.3 Pulse Input Signal 223 5.2.4 Output Signal 223 5.2.4.1 Starting Motor Control Switch Signal 225 5.2.4.2 Drive Signal of the Electronically Controlled Injector 225 5.2.4.2.1 Time Precision Requirements 225 5.2.4.2.2 Current Waveform Requirements 226 5.2.4.2.3 Power Requirements 226 5.2.4.3 The Driving Signal of the Solenoid Valve Controlled by the Common Rail Chamber Pressure 227 5.3 Design of the Diesel Engine Control Strategy Based on the Finite State Machine 228 5.3.1 Brief Introduction of the Finite State Machine 228 5.3.1.1 Finite State Machine Definition 228 5.3.1.2 State Transition Diagram 229 5.3.2 Design of the Operation State Conversion Module 229 5.3.3 Design of the Self-Inspection State Control Strategy 232 5.3.4 Design of the Starting State Control Strategy 232 5.3.5 Design of a State Control Strategy for Acceleration and Deceleration 233 5.3.6 Design of a Stable Speed Control Strategy 234 5.3.7 Principle of the Oil Supply Pulse 234 5.4 Design of the ECU Hardware Circuit 235 5.4.1 Selection of Core Controller Parts 235 5.4.1.1 Characteristics of FPGA 236 5.4.1.2 Selection of Core Auxiliary Devices 237 5.4.2 Control Core Circuit Design 238 5.4.2.1 FPGA Circuit Design 238 5.4.2.1.1 Power Supply Design 239 5.4.2.1.2 Configuration Circuit Design 239 5.4.2.1.3 Logic Voltage Matching Circuit 239 5.4.2.2 Circuit Design of SCM 240 5.4.3 Design of the Sensor Signal Conditioning Circuit 242 5.4.3.1 Design of the Signal Conditioning Circuit for the Temperature Sensor 242 5.4.3.2 Design of the Signal Conditioning Circuit for the Pressure Sensor 244 5.4.3.3 Design of the Pulse Signal Conditioning Circuit 245 5.4.4 Design of the Power Drive Circuit 248 5.4.4.1 Design of the Power Drive Circuit of the Pressure Controlled Solenoid Overflow Valve in the Common Rail Chamber 248 5.4.4.2 Design of the Power Drive Circuit for the Solenoid Valve of the Injector 249 5.5 Soft Core Development of the Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) 255 5.5.1 EDA Technology and VHDL Language 256 5.5.1.1 Introduction of EDA Technology and VHDL Language 256 5.5.1.2 Introduction of EDA Tools 257 5.5.2 Module Division of the FPGA Internal Function 258 5.5.3 Design of the Rotational Speed Measurement Module 261 5.5.3.1 Measuring Principle 261 5.5.3.2 Structure Design 263 5.5.4 Design of the Control Pulse Generation Module for the Injector 266 5.5.4.1 The Function, Input, and Output of the Injector Control Pulse Generation Module 266 5.5.4.1.1 Shortening Timing Compensation Method 268 5.5.4.1.2 Increasing the Advance Angle Compensation Method 269 5.5.4.2 The Realization of the Control Pulse Generation Module of the Injector 271 6 Research on Matching Technology 273 6.1 Component Matching Technology of the Common Rail System 273 6.1.1 Matching Design of the High-Pressure Fuel Pump 273 6.1.2 Matching Design of the Rail Chamber 274 6.1.3 Matching Design of the Injector 274 6.1.3.1 Modeling and Verification of Diesel Engine Spray and the Combustion Simulation Model 276 6.1.3.2 Optimal Parameters and Objective Functions 278 6.1.3.3 Simulation Experiment Design (DOE) 278 6.1.3.4 Establishment of an Approximate Model for the Response Surface 280 6.2 Parameter Optimization and Result Analysis of the Injection System 281 6.2.1 DoE Optimization 281 6.2.2 Global Optimization Based on the Approximate Model 282 6.2.3 Optimization Results Analysis 283 6.3 Optimization Calibration Technology of the Jet Control MAP 285 6.3.1 Summary 285 6.3.2 Optimal Calibration Method 285 6.3.3 Optimization of Target Analysis 286 6.4 Off-line Steady-State Optimization Calibration of the Common Rail Diesel Engine 286 6.4.1 Mathematical Model for Optimization of the Electric Control Parameters 287 6.4.2 Experimental Design 287 6.4.3 Establishment of the Performance Prediction Response Model 288 6.4.4 Optimal Calibration 289 6.4.5 Test Result 291 7 Development of the Dual Pressure Common Rail System 293 7.1 Structure Design and Simulation Modeling of the Dual Pressure Common Rail System 295 7.1.1 Design of the Dual Pressure Common Rail System Supercharger 295 7.1.2 Modeling of the Dual Pressure Common Rail System 299 7.2 Simulation Study of the Dual Pressure Common Rail System 299 7.2.1 Study of the Dynamic Characteristics of the System 299 7.2.1.1 Simulation of the Dynamic Characteristics of the System 300 7.2.1.2 Sensitivity Analysis of the Structural Parameters of the Supercharger 303 7.2.1.3 Study on Pressure Oscillation Elimination of the Supercharger Chamber in the Dual Pressure Common Rail System 308 7.2.1.3.1 Scheme I 309 7.2.1.3.2 Scheme II 311 7.2.2 Prototype Trial Production 312 7.3 Control Strategy and Implementation of the Dual Pressure Common Rail System 313 7.3.1 Control Strategy of the Dual Pressure Common Rail System 314 7.3.2 Hardware and Software Design of the Controller Based on the Single Chip Microcomputer 315 7.3.2.1 The Basic Composition of the Control System 315 7.3.2.2 Performance of Control Chip and Its Circuit Design 316 7.3.2.2.1 The Circuit Design of the Minimum System of the Single Chip Microcomputer 316 7.3.2.2.2 Design of the Serial Communication Circuit 316 7.3.2.2.3 Pulse Signal Conditioning Circuit 318 7.3.2.3 Programming of Control System 319 7.3.3 Drive Circuit Design 319 7.3.3.1 Design Requirements of the Driving Circuit 319 7.3.3.2 Design of the Power Drive Circuit 321 7.3.3.2.1 Power Drive Circuit of the GMM Actuator 321 7.3.3.2.2 Power Drive Circuit of the Solenoid Valve 323 7.4 Experimental Study on the Dual Pressure Common Rail System 325 7.4.1 Test of Pressurization Pressure and Injection Law 325 7.4.1.1 Test Platform for Pressurization Pressure and Fuel Injection 325 7.4.1.2 Simulation and Test 328 7.4.1.3 Effect of the Turbocharging Ratio on Pressure and Fuel Injection Law 329 7.4.1.4 Effect of the Control Time Series on Pressurization Pressure and Fuel Injection Law 334 7.4.1.5 Test of System High-Pressure Oil Consumption 334 7.4.2 Test on Spray Characteristics of the Dual Pressure Common Rail System 336 7.4.2.1 Spray Photography Test Platform 336 7.4.2.2 Effect of the Fuel Injection Law on Fuel Injection Quantity 338 7.4.2.3 Effect of the Injection Rate Shape on Spray Penetration and the Spray Cone Angle 338 7.4.3 Experimental Research Conclusions 340 Index 343

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn advanced look at vibration analysis with a focus on active vibration suppression As modern devices, from cell phones to airplanes, become lighter and more flexible, vibration suppression and analysis becomes more critical. Vibration with Control, 2nd Edition includes modelling, analysis and testing methods. New topics include metastructures and the use of piezoelectric materials, and numerical methods are also discussed. All material is placed on a firm mathematical footing by introducing concepts from linear algebra (matrix theory) and applied functional analysis when required. Key features: Combines vibration modelling and analysis with active control to provide concepts for effective vibration suppression. Introduces the use of piezoelectric materials for vibration sensing and suppression. Provides a unique blend of practical and theoretical developments. Examines nonlinear as wTable of ContentsPreface xi About the Companion Website xiii 1 Single Degree of Freedom Systems 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Spring-Mass System 1 1.3 Spring-Mass-Damper System 6 1.4 Forced Response 10 1.5 Transfer Functions and Frequency Methods 17 1.6 Complex Representation and Impedance 23 1.7 Measurement and Testing 25 1.8 Stability 28 1.9 Design and Control of Vibrations 31 1.10 Nonlinear Vibrations 35 1.11 Computing and Simulation in MatlabTM 38 Chapter Notes 43 References 44 Problems 46 2 Lumped Parameter Models 49 2.1 Introduction 49 2.2 Modeling 52 2.3 Classifications of Systems 56 2.4 Feedback Control Systems 57 2.5 Examples 59 2.6 Experimental Models 64 2.7 Nonlinear Models and Equilibrium 65 Chapter Notes 67 References 68 Problems 68 3 Matrices and the Free Response 71 3.1 Introduction 71 3.2 Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors 71 3.3 Natural Frequencies and Mode Shapes 77 3.4 Canonical Forms 86 3.5 Lambda Matrices 91 3.6 Eigenvalue Estimates 94 3.7 Computation Eigenvalue Problems in MATLAB 101 3.8 Numerical Simulation of the Time Response in MATLABtm 104 Chapter Notes 106 References 107 Problems 108 4 Stability 113 4.1 Introduction 113 4.2 Lyapunov Stability 113 4.3 Conservative Systems 116 4.4 Systems with Damping 117 4.5 Semidefinite Damping 118 4.6 Gyroscopic Systems 119 4.7 Damped Gyroscopic Systems 121 4.8 Circulatory Systems 122 4.9 Asymmetric Systems 123 4.10 Feedback Systems 128 4.11 Stability in the State Space 131 4.12 Stability of Nonlinear Systems 133 Chapter Notes 137 References 138 Problems 139 5 Forced Response of Lumped Parameter Systems 143 5.1 Introduction 143 5.2 Response via State SpaceMethods 143 5.3 Decoupling Conditions and Modal Analysis 148 5.4 Response of Systems with Damping 152 5.5 Stability of the Forced Response 155 5.6 Response Bounds 157 5.7 Frequency Response Methods 158 5.8 Stability of Feedback Control 161 5.9 Numerical Simulations in Matlab 163 Chapter Notes 165 References 166 Problems 167 6 Vibration Suppression 171 6.1 Introduction 171 6.2 Isolators and Absorbers 172 6.3 OptimizationMethods 175 6.4 Metastructures 179 6.5 Design Sensitivity and Redesign 181 6.6 Passive and Active Control 184 6.7 Controllability and Observability 188 6.8 Eigenstructure Assignment 193 6.9 Optimal Control 196 6.10 Observers (Estimators) 203 6.11 Realization 208 6.12 Reduced-Order Modeling 210 6.13 Modal Control in State Space 216 6.14 Modal Control in Physical Space 219 6.15 Robustness 224 6.16 Positive Position Feedback Control 226 6.17 Matlab Commands for Control Calculations 229 Chapter Notes 233 References 234 Problems 237 7 Distributed Parameter Models 241 7.1 Introduction 241 7.2 Equations of Motion 241 7.3 Vibration of Strings 247 7.4 Rods and Bars 252 7.5 Vibration of Beams 256 7.6 Coupled Effects 263 7.7 Membranes and Plates 267 7.8 Layered Materials 271 7.9 Damping Models 273 7.10 Modeling Piezoelectric Wafers 276 Chapter Notes 281 References 281 Problems 283 8 Formal Methods of Solutions 287 8.1 Introduction 287 8.2 Boundary Value Problems and Eigenfunctions 287 8.3 Modal Analysis of the Free Response 290 8.4 Modal Analysis in Damped Systems 292 8.5 Transform Methods 294 8.6 Green’s Functions 296 Chapter Notes 300 References 301 Problems 301 9 Operators and the Free Response 303 9.1 Introduction 303 9.2 Hilbert Spaces 304 9.3 Expansion Theorems 308 9.4 Linear Operators 309 9.5 Compact Operators 315 9.6 Theoretical Modal Analysis 317 9.7 Eigenvalue Estimates 318 9.8 Enclosure Theorems 321 Chapter Notes 324 References 324 Problems 325 10 Forced Response and Control 327 10.1 Introduction 327 10.2 Response by Modal Analysis 327 10.3 Modal Design Criteria 330 10.4 Combined Dynamical Systems 332 10.5 Passive Control and Design 336 10.6 Distributed Modal Control 338 10.7 Nonmodal Distributed Control 340 10.8 State Space Control Analysis 341 10.9 Vibration Suppression using Piezoelectric Materials 342 Chapter Notes 344 References 345 Problems 346 11 Approximations of Distributed Parameter Models 349 11.1 Introduction 349 11.2 Modal Truncation 349 11.3 Rayleigh-Ritz-Galerkin Approximations 351 11.4 Finite Element Method 354 11.5 Substructure Analysis 359 11.6 Truncation in the Presence of Control 361 11.7 Impedance Method of Truncation and Control 369 Chapter Notes 371 References 371 Problems 372 12 Vibration Measurement 375 12.1 Introduction 375 12.2 Measurement Hardware 376 12.3 Digital Signal Processing 379 12.4 Random Signal Analysis 383 12.5 Modal Data Extraction (Frequency Domain) 387 12.6 Modal Data Extraction (Time Domain) 390 12.7 Model Identification 395 12.8 Model Updating 397 12.9 Verification and Validation 398 Chapter Notes 400 References 401 Problems 402 A Comments on Units 405 B Supplementary Mathematics 409 Index 413

Read more less

Book SynopsisNumerical Methods for Partial Differential Equations: An Introduction Vitoriano Ruas, Sorbonne Universités, UPMC - Université Paris 6, France A comprehensive overview of techniques for the computational solution of PDE''sNumerical Methods for Partial Differential Equations: An Introduction covers the three most popular methods for solving partial differential equations: the finite difference method, the finite element method and the finite volume method. The book combines clear descriptions of the three methods, their reliability, and practical implementation aspects. Justifications for why numerical methods for the main classes of PDE''s work or not, or how well they work, are supplied and exemplified. Aimed primarily at students of Engineering, Mathematics, Computer Science, Physics and Chemistry among others this book offers a substantial insight into the principles numerical methods in this class of problems are based Table of ContentsPreface by Eugenio Õnate xi Preface by Larisa Beilina xiii Acknowledgements xv About the Companion Website xvii Introduction xix Key Reminders on Linear Algebra xxvii 1 Getting Started in One Space Variable 1 1.1 A Model Two-point Boundary Value Problem 2 1.2 The Basic FDM 7 1.3 The Piecewise Linear FEM (P 1 FEM) 12 1.4 The Basic FVM 17 1.4.1 The Vertex-centred FVM 17 1.4.2 The Cell-centred FVM 20 1.4.3 Connections to the Other Methods 22 1.5 Handling Nonzero Boundary Conditions 24 1.6 Effective Resolution 25 1.6.1 Solving SLAEs for one-dimensional problems 26 1.6.2 Example 1.1: Numerical Experiments with the Cell-centred FVM 27 1.7 Exercises 28 2 Qualitative Reliability Analysis 30 2.1 Norms and Inner Products 31 2.1.1 Normed Vector Spaces 32 2.1.2 Inner Product Spaces 33 2.2 Stability of a Numerical Method 35 2.2.1 Stability in the Maximum Norm 35 2.2.2 Stability in the Mean-square Sense 39 2.3 Scheme Consistency 42 2.3.1 Consistency of the Three-point FD Scheme 42 2.3.2 Consistency of the P 1 FE Scheme 44 2.4 Convergence of the Discretisation Methods 48 2.4.1 Convergence of the Three-point FDM 49 2.4.2 Convergence of the P 1 FEM 50 2.4.3 Remarks on the Convergence of the FVM 52 2.4.4 Example 2.1: Sensitivity Study of Three Equivalent Methods 54 2.5 Exercises 59 3 Time-dependent Boundary Value Problems 61 3.1 Numerical Solution of the Heat Equation 64 3.1.1 Implicit Time Discretisation 65 3.1.2 Explicit Time Discretisation 66 3.1.3 Example 3.1: Numerical Behaviour of the Forward Euler Scheme 68 3.2 Numerical Solution of the Transport Equation 70 3.2.1 Natural Schemes 70 3.2.2 The Lax Scheme 72 3.2.3 Upwind Schemes 72 3.2.4 Extensions to the FVM and the FEM 73 3.3 Stability of the Numerical Models 76 3.3.1 Schemes for the Heat Equation 77 3.3.2 The Lax Scheme for the Transport Equation 79 3.4 Consistency and Convergence Results 81 3.4.1 Euler Schemes for the Heat Equation 81 3.4.2 Schemes for the Transport Equation 84 3.5 Complements on the Equation of the Vibrating String (VSE) 85 3.5.1 The Lax Scheme to Solve the VS First-order System 85 3.5.2 Example 3.2: Numerical Study of Schemes for the VS First-order System 86 3.5.3 A Natural Explicit Scheme for the VSE 87 3.6 Exercises 90 4 Methods for Two-dimensional Problems 92 4.1 The Poisson Equation 93 4.2 The Five-point FDM 95 4.2.1 Framework and Method Description 95 4.2.2 A Few Words on Possible Extensions 98 4.3 The P 1 FEM 100 4.3.1 Green’s Identities 100 4.3.2 The Standard Galerkin Variational Formulation 103 4.3.3 Method Description 104 4.3.4 Implementation Aspects 110 4.3.5 The Master Element Technique 115 4.3.6 Application to Linear Elasticity 117 4.4 Basic FVM 121 4.4.1 The Vertex-centred FVM: Equivalence with the P 1 FEM 122 4.4.2 The Cell-centred FVM: Focus on Flux Computations 126 4.5 SLAE Resolution 138 4.5.1 Example 4.1: A Crout Solver for Banded Matrices 140 4.5.2 Example 4.2: Iterative Solution of Equivalent FD–FE–FV SLAEs 143 4.6 Exercises 147 5 Analyses in Two Space Variables 149 5.1 Methods for the Poisson Equation 150 5.1.1 Convergence of the Five-point FDM 150 5.1.2 Convergence of the P 1 FEM 153 5.1.3 Example 5.1: Solving the Poisson Equation with Neumann Boundary Conditions 164 5.1.4 Example 5.2: Convergence of the P 1 FEM to Non-smooth Solutions 165 5.1.5 Convergence of the FVM 168 5.1.6 Example 5.3: Triangle-centred FVM versus RT0 Mixed FEM 187 5.2 Time Integration Schemes for the Heat Equation 192 5.2.1 Pointwise Convergence of Five-point FD Schemes 193 5.2.2 Convergence of P 1 FE Schemes in the Mean-square Sense 196 5.2.3 Pointwise Behaviour of FE and FV Schemes: An Overview 204 5.3 Exercises 205 6 Extensions 210 6.1 Lagrange FEM of Degree Greater than One 211 6.1.1 The P k FEM in One-dimension Space for k >1 211 6.1.2 A FEM for Quadrilateral Meshes 217 6.1.3 Piecewise Quadratic FEs in Two Space Variables 223 6.1.4 The Case of Curved Domains 225 6.1.5 Example 6.1: P 2-FE Solution of the Equation u − Δu = f 231 6.1.6 More about Implementation in Two-dimensional Space 234 6.2 Extensions to the Three-dimensional Case 240 6.2.1 Methods for Rectangular Domains 241 6.2.2 Tetrahedron-based Methods 245 6.2.3 Implementation Aspects 249 6.2.4 Example 6.2: A MATLAB Code for Three-dimensional FE Computations 252 6.3 Exercises 258 7 Miscellaneous Complements 261 7.1 Numerical Solution of Biharmonic Equations in Rectangles 261 7.1.1 Model Fourth-order Elliptic PDEs 262 7.1.2 The 13-point FD Scheme 263 7.1.3 Hermite FEM in Intervals and Rectangles 265 7.2 The Advection–Diffusion Equation 272 7.2.1 A Model One-Dimensional Equation 272 7.2.2 Overcoming the Main Difficulties with the FDM 274 7.2.3 Example 7.1: Numerical Study of the Upwind FD Scheme 277 7.2.4 The SUPG Formulation 278 7.2.5 Example 7.2: Numerics of the SUPG Formulation for the P 1 FEM 281 7.2.6 An Upwind FV Scheme 282 7.2.7 A FE Scheme for the Time-Dependent Problem 286 7.2.8 Example 7.3: Numerical Study of the Weighted Mass FE Scheme 292 7.3 Basics of a Posteriori Error Estimates and Adaptivity 294 7.3.1 A Posteriori Error Estimates 295 7.3.2 Mesh Adaptivity: h, p and h–p Methods 298 7.4 A Word about Non-linear PDEs 300 7.4.1 Example 7.4: Solving Non-linear Two-point Boundary Value Problems 301 7.4.2 Example 7.5: A Quasi-explicit Method for the Navier–Stokes Equations 305 7.5 Exercises 309 Appendix 311 References 320 Index 331

Read more less

Book SynopsisAircraft Systems: A Design and Development Guide is a textbook whichcomprehensively covers the design and development of electrical and mechanical systems for fixed wing aircraft. It takes a practical approach and includes examples throughout based on commercial and military aircraft. Academic design studies and methods are presented and technical and mathematical methods of design are also included. Aircraft Systems: A Design and Development Guide provides broad coverage of aircraft systems, covering electrical power systems, hydraulics, pneumatics, flight control actuation and landing gear, to name a few. It includes design guides for each system and also covers environmental concerns for aircraft control systems.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe first edition of this book was co-published by Ane Books India, and CRC Press in 2008. This second edition is an enlarged version of the web course developed by the author at IIT Madras, and also a modified and augmented version of the earlier book. Major additions/modifications presented are in the treatment of errors in measurement, temperature measurement, measurement of thermo-physical properties, and data manipulation. Many new worked examples have been introduced in this new and updated second edition.Table of ContentsPreface vii Acknowledgements xi Nomenclature xiii Contents xix I Measurements, Error Analysis and Design of Experiments 1 Measurements and Errors in measurement 3 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 Errors in measurement 6 1.3 Statistical analysis of experimental data 8 1.4 Propagation of errors 40 1.5 Specifications of instruments and their performance 44 2 Regression analysis 47 2.1 Introduction to regression analysis 48 2.2 Linear regression 49 2.3 Polynomial regression 54 2.4 General non-linear fit 60 2.5 χ2 test of goodness of fit 62 2.6 General discussion on regression analysis including special cases 66 3 Design of experiments 73 3.1 Design of experiments 74 Exercise I 89 I.1 Errors and error distributions 89 I.2 Propagation of errors 92 I.3 Regression analysis 94 I.4 Design of experiments 99 II Measurements of Temperature, Heat Flux and Heat Transfer Coefficient 4 Measurements of Temperature 103 4.1 Introduction 104 4.2 Thermometry or the science and art of temperature measurement 104 4.3 Thermoelectric thermometry 110 4.4 Resistance thermometry 131 4.5 Pyrometry 149 4.6 Other temperature measurement techniques . 162 4.7 Measurement of transient temperature . 171 5 Systematic errors in temperature measurement 183 5.1 Introduction 183 5.2 Examples of temperature measurement 183 5.3 Conduction error in thermocouple temperature measurement 186 5.4 Measurement of temperature of a moving fluid 194 6 Heat flux and Heat Transfer Coefficient 205 6.1 Measurement of heat flux 205 6.2 Measurement of heat transfer coefficient 223 Exercise II 229 II.1 Temperature measurement 229 II.2 Transient temperature measurement 235 II.3 Thermometric error 237 II.4 Heat flux measurement 239 III Measurement of Pressure, Fluid velocity, Volume flow rate, Stagnation and Bulk mean temperatures 7 Measurement of Pressure 243 7.1 Basics of pressure measurement 244 7.2 U - Tube manometer 245 7.3 Bourdon gauge 253 7.4 Pressure transducers 254 7.5 Measurement of pressure transients 269 7.6 Measurement of vacuum 275 8 Measurement of Fluid Velocity 281 8.1 Introduction 282 8.2 Pitot - Pitot static and impact probes 282 8.3 Velocity measurement based on thermal effects 293 8.4 Doppler Velocimeter 303 8.5 Time of Flight Velocimeter 309 9 Volume flow rate 315 9.1 Measurement of volume flow rate 316 9.2 Variable area type flow meters 316 9.3 Rotameter or Drag effect flow meter 330 9.4 Miscellaneous types of flow meters 334 9.5 Factors to be considered in the selection of flow meters 336 9.6 Calibration of flow meters 337 10 Stagnation and Bulk mean temperature 343 10.1 Stagnation temperature measurement 344 10.2 Bulk mean temperature 346 Exercise III 351 III.1 Pressure measurement 351 III.2 Velocity measurement 353 III.3 Volume flow rate 354 IV Thermo-physical properties, Radiation properties of surfaces, Gas concentration, Force/Acceleration, torque and power 11 Measurement of thermo-physical properties 359 11.1 Introduction 360 11.2 Thermal conductivity 360 11.3 Steady state methods 361 11.4 Transient method 369 11.5 Measurement of heat capacity 370 11.6 Measurement of calorific value of fuels 374 11.7 Measurement of viscosity of fluids 380 12 Radiation properties of surfaces 389 12.1 Introduction 390 12.2 Features of radiation measuring instruments 393 12.3 Integrating sphere 394 12.4 Measurement of emissivity 400 13 Gas concentration 409 13.1 Introduction 410 13.2 Non separation methods 413 13.3 Separation methods 419 14 Force/Acceleration, torque and power 429 14.1 Introduction 430 14.2 Force Measurement 430 14.3 Measurement of acceleration 436 14.4 Measurement of torque and power 448 Exercise IV 457 IV.1 Thermo-physical properties 457 IV.2 Radiation properties of surfaces 459 IV.3 Gas concentration 459 IV.4 Force, acceleration, Torque and Power 459 V Data Manipulation and Examples from laboratory practice15 Data Manipulation 465 15.1 Introduction 466 15.2 Mechanical signal conditioning 466 15.3 Electrical/Electronic signal conditioning 468 16 Examples from laboratory practice 487 16.1 Introduction 488 16.2 Thermocouple calibration using a data logger 489 16.3 Calibration of a digital differential pressure gauge 491 16.4 Signal conditioning for torque measurement using strain gauges 492 16.5 Software 494 Exercise V 497 A Bibliographic Notes and References 499 A.1 Bibliographic Notes 499 A.2 References 501 B Useful tables 505 Index 517

Read more less

Book SynopsisStrong bonds form stronger materials. For this reason, the investigation on thermal degradation of materials is a significantly important area in research and development activities. The analysis of thermal stability can be used to assess the behavior of materials in the aggressive environmental conditions, which in turn provides valuable information about the service life span of the materiel. Unlike other books published so far that have focused on either the fundamentals of thermal analysis or the degradation pattern of the materials, this book is specifically on the mechanism of degradation of materials. The mechanism of rapturing of chemical bonds as a result of exposure to high-temperature environment is difficult to study and resulting mechanistic pathway hard to establish. Limited information is available on this subject in the published literatures and difficult to excavate. Chapters in this book are contributed by the experts working on thermal degradation and analysTable of ContentsPreface xv Part 1: Degradation of Polymers 1 Thermal Stability of Organic Monolayers Covalently Grafted on Silicon Surfaces 3Florent Yang, Philippe Allongue, Francois Ozanam and Jean-Noel Chazalviel 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Alkyl-Grafted Surfaces 8 1.3 Alkoxy-Grafted Surfaces 15 1.4 Surfaces Grafted with Aryl Groups 19 1.5 Surfaces Grafted via Si–N Linkages 22 1.6 Summary 27 References 30 2 Thermal Analysis to Discriminate the Stability of Biomedical Ultrahigh-Molecular-Weight Polyethylenes Formulations 39Maria Jose Martinez-Morlanes and Francisco Javier Medel 2.1 Introduction 39 2.2 Suitability of TGA Analysis for the Study of Stability of Medical Polyethylene 42 2.3 Activation Energies of Degradation Processes in the Thermal Decomposition of UHMWPE 56 References 58 3 Materials Obtained by Solid-State Thermal Decomposition of Coordination Compounds and Metal–Organic Coordination Polymers 63Oana Carp 3.1 Introduction 63 3.2 Coordination Compounds and Metal–Organic Coordination Polymers as Precursors of Oxides 65 3.3 Coordination Compounds and Metal–Organic Coordination Polymers as Precursors of Sulfides 72 3.4 Coordination Compounds as Precursors of Composites 74 3.5 Coordination Compounds and Metal–Organic Coordination Polymers as Precursors of New Complexes 74 3.6 Coordination Compounds and Metal–Organic Coordination Polymers as Precursor of Metals 75 3.7 Coordination Compounds as Precursor of Nitrides 76 3.8 Other Materials 77 3.9 Conclusions 77 References 78 4 Methods for Limiting the Flammability of High-Density Polyethylene with Magnesium Hydroxide 85Joanna Lenża, Maria Sozańska and Henryk Rydarowski 4.1 Introduction 85 4.2 Experimental Part 88 4.3 Results and Discussion 91 4.4 Conclusions 99 References 100 5 Thermal Analysis in the Study of Polymer (Bio)-degradation 103Joanna Rydz, Marta Musioł and Henryk Janeczek 5.1 Introduction 103 5.2 Differential Scanning Calorimetry 105 5.3 Dynamic Mechanical Analysis 112 5.4 Thermogravimetric Analysis 115 5.5 Conclusions 120 Acknowledgments 121 References 121 6 Thermal and Oxidative Degradation Behavior of Polymers and Nanocomposites 127Gauri Ramasubramanian and Samy Madbouly 6.1 Introduction 127 6.2 Thermal Degradation 131 6.3 Chemical and Oxidative Degradation 137 6.4 Photo-oxidation 143 6.5 Environmental and Biological Degradation 148 6.6 Degradation of Polymer Nanocomposites 154 6.7 Conclusions 162 References 162 7 Thermal Degradation Effects on Polyurethanes and Their Nanocomposites 165Ivan Navarro-Baena, Marina P. Arrieta, Alicia Mujica-Garcia, Valentina Sessini, Jose M. Kenny and Laura Peponi 7.1 Introduction 165 7.2 Main Techniques Used for Studying the Thermal Degradation Process 167 7.3 Degradation Mechanisms 169 7.4 Chemical Approaches Used to Improve the Thermal Stability of PU 171 7.5 Thermal Degradation of PU Based on Natural Sources 172 7.6 Nanocomposites 174 7.7 PU Electrospun Fibers 181 7.8 Conclusions 184 References 184 8 Controllable Thermal Degradation of Thermosetting Epoxy Resins 191Zhonggang Wang 8.1 Introduction 191 8.2 Ester-, Carbamate-, and Carbonate-Linked Reworkable Epoxy Resins 193 8.3 Ether-Linked Reworkable Epoxy Resins 195 8.4 Phosphate- and Phosphite-Linked Reworkable Epoxy Resins 196 8.5 Sulfite-Linked Reworkable Epoxy Resins 204 References 207 9 Mechanism of Thermal Degradation of Vinylidene Chloride Barrier Polymers 209Bob A. Howell 9.1 Introduction 209 9.2 Discussion 210 9.3 Conclusions 218 References 219 10 Role of Mass Spectrometry in the Elucidation of Thermal Degradation Mechanisms in Polymeric Materials 221Paola Rizzarelli and Sabrina Carroccio 10.1 Introduction 221 10.2 Thermogravimetry-Mass Spectrometry (TG-MS) 224 10.3 Gas Chromatography-Mass Spectrometry (GC-MS) and Pyrolysis-Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (Py-GC/MS) 228 10.4 Direct Pyrolysis Mass Spectrometry (DPMS) 237 10.5 Matrix-Assisted Laser Desorption Ionisation Mass Spectrometry (MALDI MS) 242 10.6 Other Mass Spectrometric Techniques 246 10.7 Conclusions 249 References 251 11 The Mechanism of Poly(styrene) Degradation 259Bob A. Howell 11.1 Introduction 259 11.2 Discussion 260 11.3 Conclusions 266 References 266 12 The Use of Thermal Volatilization Analysis of Polylactic Acid and Its Blends with Starch 269Derval dos Santos Rosa, Claudio Roberto Passatore, and Jose Ricardo Nunes de Macedo 12.1 Introduction 269 12.2 Use of TVA 271 12.3 TVA as an Analytic Technique 272 12.4 TVA-PLA Investigation 274 12.5 TVA – Thermoplastic Starch 276 12.6 Analyses of TVA – PLA and Their Mixtures with Thermoplastic Starch 280 12.7 Conclusions 282 Acknowledgments 282 References 282 Part 2: Degradation of Other Materials 13 Reaction Mechanisms in Thermal Analysis of Amazon Oilseeds 287Orquidea Vasconcelos dos Santos, Carlos Emmerson and Suzana Caetano da Silva Lannes 13.1 Introduction 287 13.2 Oxidative Stability 297 References 299 14 Thermal Degradation of Cellulose and Cellulosic Substrates 301Jenny Alongi and Giulio Malucelli 14.1 Introduction 301 14.2 Thermal and Thermo-oxidative Degradation of Cellulose 302 14.3 Factors Affecting Cellulose Thermal Degradation: Charring/Volatilisation Competition 318 14.4 Conclusions 329 References 330 15 Thermal Decomposition Behavior of Sodium Alkoxides of Relevance to Fast Reactor Technology 333K. Chandran, M. Kamruddin, S. Anthonysamy and V. Ganesan 15.1 Introduction 333 15.2 Preparation of Sodium Alkoxides 334 15.3 Characterization of Sodium Alkoxides 339 15.4 Thermal Decomposition of Sodium Alkoxides 348 15.5 Kinetic Analysis 364 References 390 16 Thermal Degradation and Morphological Characteristics of Bone Products 393F. Miculescu, A. Maidaniuc, G.E. Stan, M. Miculescu, S.I. Voicu, L.T.Ciocan 16.1 Introduction and Objectives 393 16.2 Short Overview on the Thermal Analysis Experimental Methods 396 16.3 Morpho-structural Changes Induced by the Thermal Treatments Applied to Hard Tissues. Bone Degradation Mechanism 400 16.4 Conclusions 408 References 408 17 Processes and Mechanisms in Hydrothermal Degradation of Waste Electric and Electronic Equipment 411Yu Luling, He Wenzhi and Li Guangming 17.1 Introduction 411 17.2 Application of Hydrothermal Degradation in Treatment of WEEE 414 17.3 Mechanism of Hydrothermal Degradation for Treatment of WEEE 418 17.4 Conclusion 431 Acknowledgements 431 References 431 18 Heat Transfer Mechanism and Thermomechanical Analysis of Masonry Structures (Mortars and Bricks) Subjected to High Temperatures 437M.E. Macia Torregrosa and J. Camacho Diez 18.1 Introduction: State of the Art 437 18.2 Heat Transfer Mechanisms through a Masonry Element under Load 442 18.3 Influence of High Temperatures on the Structural Behavior of a Masonry Element 444 18.4 Factors Involved in the Behavior of the Masonry Subjected to High Temperatures 444 18.5 Properties of the Ceramic Pieces 449 18.6 Properties of the Mortar 456 References 463 19 Application of Vibrational Spectroscopy to Elucidate Protein Conformational Changes Promoted by Thermal Treatment in Muscle-Based Food 467A.M. Herrero, P. Carmona, F. Jimenez-Colmenero and C. Ruiz-Capillas 19.1 Introduction 467 19.2 Protein Structure 468 19.3 Muscle-Based Food Proteins: Thermal treatment 468 19.4 Vibrational Spectroscopic Methods and Protein Structure 469 19.5 Vibrational Spectroscopy to Elucidate Structural Changes Induced by Thermal Treatment in Muscle Foods 473 19.6 Conclusions 479 Acknowledgements 479 References 480 20 Thermal Activation of Layered Hydroxide-Based Catalysts 483Milica Hadnadjev-Kostic, Tatjana Vulic and Radmila Marinkovic-Neducin 20.1 Introduction 483 20.2 LDH General Properties 484 20.3 Thermal Activation of LDH-Based Catalysts – Thermal Decomposition Pathway from LDH to Mixed Oxides 490 20.4 Properties of Thermally Activated LDHs 495 20.5 Application of LDH-Based Materials 501 20.6 Synthesis Methods of Ti-Containing LDH-Based Materials 502 20.7 Synthesis Methods for the Association of TiO2 and LDH-Based Catalysts 502 20.8 Conclusions and Perspectives 509 References 510 21 Thermal Decomposition of Natural Fibers: Kinetics and Degradation Mechanisms 515Matheus Poletto, Heitor L. Ornaghi Junior and Ademir J. Zattera 21.1 Introduction 515 21.2 Theoretical Background 516 21.3 Chemical Composition of the Natural Fibers 522 21.4 XRD Analysis Applied to Natural Fibers 524 21.5 Thermogravimetric Analysis of Natural Fibers 527 21.6 Kinetic Degradation and Reaction Mechanisms in the Solid State of Natural Fibers 532 21.7 Conclusion 541 References 541 22 On the Kinetic Mechanism of Non-isothermal Degradation of Solids 547Lyubomir T. Vlaev, Velyana G. Georgieva, and Mariana P. Tavlieva 22.1 Introduction 547 22.2 Mathematical Background in the Thermogravimetry 549 22.3 Kinetic Mechanism of the Thermal Degradation of CaC2O4・H2O 561 22.4 Kinetic Mechanism of the Thermal Degradation of Chitin 567 22.5 Kinetic Mechanism of the Thermal Degradation of Rice Husks 571 22.6 Conclusions 574 Acknowledgments 575 References 575 Index 579

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis groundbreaking volume covers the significant advantages of wave technologies in the development of innovative machine building where high technologies with appreciable economic effect are applied. These technologies cover many industries, including the oil-and-gas industry, refining and other chemical processing, petrochemical industry, production of new materials, composite and nano-composites including, construction equipment, environmental protection, pharmacology, power generation, and many others. The technological problem of grinding, fine-scale grinding and activation of solid particles (dry blends) is disclosed. This task is common for the production of new materials across these various industries. At present in this sphere the traditional methods have reached their limits and in some cases are economically ineffective from both scientific and practical points of view. The authors have detailed, through their extensive groundbreaking research, how these new methTable of ContentsPreface xi1 Introduction: Capabilities and Perspectives of Wave Technologies in Industries and in Nanotechnologies 12 Fragmentation and Activation of Dry Solid Components: Wave Turbulization of the Medium and Increasing Process Efficiency 112.1 Calcium Carbonate (limestone) Fragmentation 172.2 Wave Activation of Cements and Cement-limestone Compositions 212.3 Grinding Blast-furnace Sullage 252.4 Production of Coloring Pigment Based on Titanium Dioxide and Dolomitic Marble 272.5 Wave Treatment of Aluminium Oxide 293 Wave Stirring (actuation) of Multicomponent Materials (dry mixes) 353.1 Technologic Experiments with Installations of Wave Mixing 414 Wave Metering Devices and Dosage Metering of Loose Components 475 Creating Automated Wave Treatment Trains of Dry Solid Components: High Effi ciency in a Restricted Manufacturing Room 536 Manufacturing and Wave Treatment Technologies of Emulsions, Suspensions and Foam/Skim 596.1 Stirring (actuation) Wave Technologies of Various Liquids, Including High-viscosity Media 626.2 Hydrodynamic Running (through-flowing) Wave Installations 646.3 Wave Technology for Stirring (actuation) of High-viscosity Media 676.4 Production of Cosmetic Cream 726.6 Production of Finely-dispersed, Chemically Precipitated Barium Sulphate With the Assigned Particle Size 756.7 Accelerating Fermentation of Sponge Wheat Dough After Wave Treatment 817 Wave Mixing of Epoxy Resin with Nanocarbon Micro-additives: Production of Composite Materials 877.1 Experimental Studies of Mixing the Epoxy Resin with Fullerenes 887.2 Experimental Studies Mixing Epoxy Resin Technical Carbon 917.3 Experimental Studies of Mixing Epoxy Resin with Carbon Nanotubes 947.4 Production of Highly-fi lled Composite Materials with Wave Technologies 1017.5 Using the Installation of Wave Mixing for the Preparation of Polymer-cement and Cement Composite Materials Reinforced by Polymer and Inorganic Fibers 1047.6 Production of Organoclay 1088 Wave Technologies for Food, Including Bread Baking and Confectionary Industries 1119 Wave Technologies in Oil Production: Improving Oil, Gas and Condensate Yield 11710 Wave Technologies in Ecology and Energetics 12510.1 Production of Mixed Fuels and Improvement in Combustion Effi ciency 12711 Stabilizing Wave Regimes, Damping Noise, Vibration and Hydraulic Shocks Pipeline Systems 13112 Wave Technologies in Engineering 13713 Wave Technologies in Oil Refi ning, Chemical and Petrochemical Industries 14314 Conclusions: On Wave Engineering 147Literature (the Russian-language original is at the end) 153Index 155

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book is a comprehensive introduction to model predictive control (MPC), including its basic principles and algorithms, system analysis and design methods, strategy developments and practical applications. The main contents of the book include an overview of the development trajectory and basic principles of MPC, typical MPC algorithms, quantitative analysis of classical MPC systems, design and tuning methods for MPC parameters, constrained multivariable MPC algorithms and online optimization decomposition methods. Readers will then progress to more advanced topics such as nonlinear MPC and its related algorithms, the diversification development of MPC with respect to control structures and optimization strategies, and robust MPC. Finally, applications of MPC and its generalization to optimization-based dynamic problems other than control will be discussed. Systematically introduces fundamental concepts, basic algorithms, and applications of MPC Includes a Table of ContentsPreface xi 1 Brief History and Basic Principles of Predictive Control 1 1.1 Generation and Development of Predictive Control 1 1.2 Basic Methodological Principles of Predictive Control 6 1.2.1 Prediction Model 6 1.2.2 Rolling Optimization 6 1.2.3 Feedback Correction 7 1.3 Contents of this Book 10 References 11 2 Some Basic Predictive Control Algorithms 15 2.1 Dynamic Matrix Control (DMC) Based on the Step Response Model 15 2.1.1 DMC Algorithm and Implementation 15 2.1.2 Description of DMC in the State Space Framework 21 2.2 Generalized Predictive Control (GPC) Based on the Linear Difference Equation Model 25 2.3 Predictive Control Based on the State Space Model 32 2.4 Summary 37 References 39 3 Trend Analysis and Tuning of SISO Unconstrained DMC Systems 41 3.1 The Internal Model Control Structure of the DMC Algorithm 41 3.2 Controller of DMC in the IMC Structure 48 3.2.1 Stability of the Controller 48 3.2.2 Controller with the One-Step Optimization Strategy 53 3.2.3 Controller for Systems with Time Delay 54 3.3 Filter of DMC in the IMC Structure 56 3.3.1 Three Feedback Correction Strategies and Corresponding Filters 56 3.3.2 Influence of the Filter to Robust Stability of the System 60 3.4 DMC Parameter Tuning Based on Trend Analysis 62 3.5 Summary 72 References 73 4 Quantitative Analysis of SISO Unconstrained Predictive Control Systems 75 4.1 Time Domain Analysis Based on the Kleinman Controller 76 4.2 Coefficient Mapping of Predictive Control Systems 81 4.2.1 Controller of GPC in the IMC Structure 81 4.2.2 Minimal Form of the DMC Controller and Uniform Coefficient Mapping 86 4.3 Z Domain Analysis Based on Coefficient Mapping 90 4.3.1 Zero Coefficient Condition and the Deadbeat Property of Predictive Control Systems 90 4.3.2 Reduced Order Property and Stability of Predictive Control Systems 94 4.4 Quantitative Analysis of Predictive Control for Some Typical Systems 98 4.4.1 Quantitative Analysis for First-Order Systems 98 4.4.2 Quantitative Analysis for Second-Order Systems 104 4.5 Summary 112 References 113 5 Predictive Control for MIMO Constrained Systems 115 5.1 Unconstrained DMC for Multivariable Systems 115 5.2 Constrained DMC for Multivariable Systems 123 5.2.1 Formulation of the Constrained Optimization Problem in Multivariable DMC 123 5.2.2 Constrained Optimization Algorithm Based on the Matrix Tearing Technique 125 5.2.3 Constrained Optimization Algorithm Based on QP 128 5.3 Decomposition of Online Optimization for Multivariable Predictive Control 132 5.3.1 Hierarchical Predictive Control Based on Decomposition–Coordination 133 5.3.2 Distributed Predictive Control 137 5.3.3 Decentralized Predictive Control 140 5.3.4 Comparison of Three Decomposition Algorithms 143 5.4 Summary 146 References 147 6 Synthesis of Stable Predictive Controllers 149 6.1 Fundamental Philosophy of the Qualitative Synthesis Theory of Predictive Control 150 6.1.1 Relationships between MPC and Optimal Control 150 6.1.2 Infinite Horizon Approximation of Online Open-Loop Finite Horizon Optimization 152 6.1.3 Recursive Feasibility in Rolling Optimization 155 6.1.4 Preliminary Knowledge 157 6.2 Synthesis of Stable Predictive Controllers 163 6.2.1 Predictive Control with Zero Terminal Constraints 163 6.2.2 Predictive Control with Terminal Cost Functions 165 6.2.3 Predictive Control with Terminal Set Constraints 170 6.3 General Stability Conditions of Predictive Control and Suboptimality Analysis 174 6.3.1 General Stability Conditions of Predictive Control 174 6.3.2 Suboptimality Analysis of Predictive Control 177 6.4 Summary 179 References 179 7 Synthesis of Robust Model Predictive Control 181 7.1 Robust Predictive Control for Systems with Polytopic Uncertainties 181 7.1.1 Synthesis of RMPC Based on Ellipsoidal Invariant Sets 181 7.1.2 Improved RMPC with Parameter-Dependent Lyapunov Functions 187 7.1.3 Synthesis of RMPC with Dual-Mode Control 191 7.1.4 Synthesis of RMPC with Multistep Control Sets 199 7.2 Robust Predictive Control for Systems with Disturbances 205 7.2.1 Synthesis with Disturbance Invariant Sets 205 7.2.2 Synthesis with Mixed H2/H∞ Performances 209 7.3 Strategies for Improving Robust Predictive Controller Design 214 7.3.1 Difficulties for Robust Predictive Controller Synthesis 214 7.3.2 Efficient Robust Predictive Controller 216 7.3.3 Off-Line Design and Online Synthesis 220 7.3.4 Synthesis of the Robust Predictive Controller by QP 223 7.4 Summary 227 References 228 8 Predictive Control for Nonlinear Systems 231 8.1 General Description of Predictive Control for Nonlinear Systems 231 8.2 Predictive Control for Nonlinear Systems Based on Input–Output Linearization 235 8.3 Multiple Model Predictive Control Based on Fuzzy Clustering 241 8.4 Neural Network Predictive Control 248 8.5 Predictive Control for Hammerstein Systems 253 8.6 Summary 256 References 257 9 Comprehensive Development of Predictive Control Algorithms and Strategies 259 9.1 Predictive Control Combined with Advanced Structures 259 9.1.1 Predictive Control with a Feedforward–Feedback Structure 259 9.1.2 Cascade Predictive Control 262 9.2 Alternative Optimization Formulation in Predictive Control 267 9.2.1 Predictive Control with Infinite Norm Optimization 267 9.2.2 Constrained Multiobjective Multidegree of Freedom Optimization and Satisfactory Control 270 9.3 Input Parametrization of Predictive Control 277 9.3.1 Blocking Strategy of Optimization Variables 277 9.3.2 Predictive Functional Control 279 9.4 Aggregation of the Online Optimization Variables in Predictive Control 281 9.4.1 General Framework of Optimization Variable Aggregation in Predictive Control 282 9.4.2 Online Optimization Variable Aggregation with Guaranteed Performances 284 9.5 Summary 294 References 294 10 Applications of Predictive Control 297 10.1 Applications of Predictive Control in Industrial Processes 297 10.1.1 Industrial Application and Software Development of Predictive Control 297 10.1.2 The Role of Predictive Control in Industrial Process Optimization 300 10.1.3 Key Technologies of Predictive Control Implementation 302 10.1.4 QDMC for a Refinery Hydrocracking Unit 308 10.1.4.1 Process Description and Control System Configuration 309 10.1.4.2 Problem Formulation and Variable Selection 310 10.1.4.3 Plant Testing and Model Identification 310 10.1.4.4 Off-Line Simulation and Design 311 10.1.4.5 Online Implementation and Results 312 10.2 Applications of Predictive Control in Other Fields 313 10.2.1 Brief Description of Extension of Predictive Control Applications 313 10.2.2 Online Optimization of a Gas Transportation Network 318 10.2.2.1 Problem Description for Gas Transportation Network Optimization 318 10.2.2.2 Black Box Technique and Online Optimization 320 10.2.2.3 Application Example 321 10.2.2.4 Hierarchical Decomposition for a Large-Scale Network 323 10.2.3 Application of Predictive Control in an Automatic Train Operation System 323 10.2.4 Hierarchical Predictive Control of Urban Traffic Networks 328 10.2.4.1 Two-Level Hierarchical Control Framework 328 10.2.4.2 Upper Level Design 329 10.2.4.3 Lower Level Design 331 10.2.4.4 Example and Scenarios Setting 331 10.2.4.5 Results and Analysis 332 10.3 Embedded Implementation of Predictive Controller with Applications 335 10.3.1 QP Implementation in FPGA with Applications 337 10.3.2 Neural Network QP Implementation in DSP with Applications 343 10.4 Summary 347 References 351 11 Generalization of Predictive Control Principles 353 11.1 Interpretation of Methodological Principles of Predictive Control 353 11.2 Generalization of Predictive Control Principles to General Control Problems 355 11.2.1 Description of Predictive Control Principles in Generalized Form 355 11.2.2 Rolling Job Shop Scheduling in Flexible Manufacturing Systems 358 11.2.3 Robot Rolling Path Planning in an Unknown Environment 363 11.3 Summary 367 References 367 Index 369

Read more less

Book SynopsisClear, proven solutions for virtual project management challenges Projects Without Boundaries offers project managers a clear framework for bringing both project management practices and project team leadership principles to the virtual space. Written by a team of authors with years of experience managing nationally and internationally distributed teams, this book provides a suite of best practices, checklists, and actionable strategies for managing a project and building a high-performing team in a virtual and multicultural environment. Real-world examples illustrate the application of the concepts discussed, and the Virtual Project Readiness Assessment facilitates both team evaluation and transformation planning for virtual project management improvement. Each chapter focuses on the critical challenges encountered while managing virtual projects and details proven solutions that improve a virtual organization, boost project performance, and facilitate pTable of ContentsPreface vii Acknowledgments ix I Introduction 1 1 Working in a Virtual World 3 Forces Driving Virtual Transformation 5 Rise of Virtual Organizations and Projects 9 Virtual Projects Are Different 10 Transitioning to the Virtual World 18 Assessing the Virtual Project Manager 19 Notes 22 II Planning the Virtual Project, Building the Virtual Team 23 2 Planning the Virtual Project 25 Planning a Virtual Project 26 Establishing Project Alignment 31 Architecting the Virtual Project 36 Understanding the Complexity of Virtual Projects 37 With Complexity Comes Risk 41 Planning Virtual Communication 43 Assessing Virtual Project Planning 45 Notes 48 3 Building a High-performance Virtual Team 49 Virtual Project Team Types 50 Differentiating High-Performance 55 Building a High-Performance Virtual Project Team 56 Assessing Virtual Project Team Members 68 Notes 69 III Managing Project Execution, Leading the Virtual Team 71 4 Executing the Virtual Project 73 Managing Assumptions 75 Hyper-vigilant Governance 76 Managing Outsourced Project Work 84 Managing Change 85 Integrating Distributed Work 87 People Side of Project Execution 89 Influencing Virtual Stakeholders 92 Assessing Virtual Project Execution 99 Notes 101 5 Leading the Virtual Project Team 103 Be the Project Compass 104 Be the Team Conductor 105 Be the Champion 106 Recognizing the Virtual Team 115 Leverage Your Leadership Style 117 Adding “E” to Leadership 119 Becoming an Effective Virtual Team Leader 120 Assessing Virtual Team Performance 120 Notes 122 6 Empowering the Project Network 125 Centralize First 125 Empowering by Decentralizing 133 Centralized/Decentralized Project Construct 148 Assessing Virtual Team Collaboration 149 Notes 151 IV Organizational Considerations 153 7 Leading a Multicultural Virtual Team 155 Putting Culture in Context 156 Cultural Intelligence 157 Challenges of Multicultural Virtual Project Teams 157 Cultural Factors 158 Creating a Cultural Strategy 165 Converging Company and Country Culture 169 Assessing Cross-Cultural Awareness 171 Notes 173 8 Using Technology to Communicate and Collaborate 175 Role of Technology 176 Using Technology to Communicate 176 Using Technology to Collaborate 179 Technology Options for the Virtual Project 180 No Shortage of Options 194 Technology Selection 194 Increasing Technology Usage 197 Notes 197 9 Sustaining Virtual Project Success 199 Changing Organizational and Team Structures 200 Modifying the Project Execution Model 203 Changing Behavior by Changing Rewards 205 Promoting Cultural Awareness 206 Developing Virtual Project Managers 208 Virtual Project Management Journey 219 Notes 219 Appendix Virtual Project Readiness Assessment 221 Index 227

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive and interdisciplinary resource filled with strategic insights, tools, and techniques for the design and construction of hybrid materials. Hybrid materials represent the best of material properties being combined for the development for materials with properties otherwise unavailable for application requirements. Novel Nanoscale Hybrid Materials is a comprehensive resource that contains contributions from a wide range of noted scientists from various fields, working on the hybridization of nanomolecules in order to generate new materials with superior properties. The book focuses on the new directions and developments in design and application of new materials, incorporating organic/inorganic polymers, biopolymers, and nanoarchitecture approaches. This book delves deeply into the complexities that arise when characteristics of a molecule change on the nanoscale, overriding the properties of the individual nanomolecules and generating new properties and capabilities alTable of ContentsList of Contributors xiii 1 Silanols as Building Blocks for Nanomaterials 1Masafumi Unno and Hisayuki Endo 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Synthesis and Applications of Silanols 2 1.2.1 Silanetriols and Disiloxanetetraols 2 1.2.2 Cyclotetrasiloxanetetraol (Cyclic Silanols, All]cis Isomer) 5 1.2.3 Cyclotetrasiloxanetetraol (Cyclic Silanols, Other Isomers) 14 1.2.4 Cyclotrisiloxanetriol 15 1.3 Structures and Properties of Nanomaterials Obtained from Silanols 20 1.3.1 Structure of Laddersiloxanes 20 1.3.2 Thermal Property of Laddersiloxanes 23 1.3.3 Thermal Property of Other Silsesquioxanes 26 1.3.4 Refractive Indices of Silsesquioxanes 28 1.4 Summary and Outlook 29 References 29 2 Biomacromolecule]Enabled Synthesis of Inorganic Materials 33Kristina L. Roth and Tijana Z. Grove 2.1 Introduction 33 2.2 DNA 34 2.3 Proteins and Peptides 36 2.3.1 Cage Proteins 37 2.3.2 Bovine Serum Albumin (BSA) 38 2.3.3 Engineered Peptides 40 2.3.4 Engineered Protein Scaffolds 42 2.4 Polysaccharides 44 2.5 Methods of Characterization 46 2.6 Conclusion 50 References 50 3 Multilayer Assemblies of Biopolymers: Synthesis, Properties, and Applications 57Jun Chen, Veronika Kozlovskaya, Daniëlle Pretorius, and Eugenia Kharlampieva 3.1 Introduction 57 3.2 Assembly of Biopolymer Multilayers 58 3.2.1 Biopolymers and Their Properties 58 3.2.2 Growth and Thickness of Biopolymer Multilayers 59 3.2.3 Stability in Solutions and Enzymatic Degradation of Biopolymer Multilayers 74 3.2.3.1 Enzymatic Degradation 75 3.2.3.2 pH and Salt Stability 78 3.2.4 Hydration and Swelling of Biopolymer Multilayers 81 3.3 Properties of Biopolymer Multilayers 83 3.3.1 Surface Properties of Biopolymer Multilayers and Their Interaction with Cells 83 3.3.2 Antibacterial Properties 84 3.3.3 Immunomodulatory Properties 85 3.3.4 Mechanical Properties of Biopolymer Multilayers 87 3.3.5 Other Properties 90 3.4 Applications 91 3.5 Conclusion and Outlook 95 Acknowledgments 96 References 96 4 Functionalization of P3HT]Based Hybrid Materials for Photovoltaic Applications 107Michèle Chevrier, Riccardo Di Ciuccio, Olivier Coulembier, Philippe Dubois, Sébastien Richeter, Ahmad Mehdi, and Sébastien Clément 4.1 Introduction 107 4.2 Design and Synthesis of Regioregular Poly(3]Hexylthiophene) 109 4.2.1 Metal]Catalyzed Cross]Coupling Reactions 114 4.2.1.1 Nickel]Catalyzed Cross]Coupling Reactions 114 4.2.1.2 Palladium]Catalyzed Cross]Coupling Reactions 121 4.2.2 Functionalization of P3HT 126 4.2.2.1 End]Group Functionalization 127 4.2.2.2 Side]Chain Functionalization 130 4.3 Morphology Control of P3HT/PCBM Blend by Functionalization 132 4.3.1 Introduction 132 4.3.2 End]Group Functionalization 134 4.3.2.1 Fluorinated Chain Ends 135 4.3.2.2 Hydrophilic Chain Ends 139 4.3.2.3 Aromatic Chain Ends 139 4.3.2.4 Fullerene Chain Ends: Compatibilizer Case 141 4.3.3 Side]Chain Functionalization 144 4.3.3.1 Thermal and Photo]Cross]Linking 144 4.3.3.2 Fullerene Side]Functionalization on Polythiophene Block Copolymers 147 4.3.3.3 Cooperative Self]Assembling 149 4.4 Polymer–Metal Oxide Hybrid Solar Cells 154 4.4.1 Anchoring Method 156 4.4.2 Surface Modification Using End] and Side]Chain]Functionalized P3HT 158 4.4.2.1 End]Group Functionalization 158 4.4.2.2 Side]Chain Functionalization 161 4.5 Conclusion 163 Acknowledgments 164 References 164 5 Insights on Nanofiller Reinforced Polysiloxane Hybrids 179Debarshi Dasgupta, Alok Sarkar, Dieter Wrobel, and Anubhav Saxena 5.1 Properties of Silicone (Polysiloxane) 179 5.2 Nanofiller Composition and Chemistry 183 5.2.1 Fumed Silica 183 5.2.2 Aerogel Silica 185 5.2.3 Carbon Black 187 5.3 Polymer [Poly(dimethylsiloxane)]–Filler Interaction 187 5.4 Polymer– Filler Versus Filler–Filler Interactions 190 5.5 PDMS Nanocomposite with Anisotropic Fillers 194 5.6 PDMS– Molecular Filler Nanocomposite 196 Acknowledgment 198 References 198 6 Nanophotonics with Hybrid Nanostructures: New Phenomena and New Possibilities 201Noor Eldabagh, Jessica Czarnecki, and Jonathan J. Foley IV 6.1 Introduction 202 6.2 Theoretical Nanophotonics 204 6.2.1 Mie Theory for Spherical Nanostructures 205 6.2.2 Transfer Matrix Methods for Planar Structures 208 6.2.3 The Finite]Difference Time]Domain Method 214 6.2.4 The Discrete Dipole Approximation 215 6.3 Hybrid Nanostructures 216 6.3.1 Emergent Electrodynamics Phenomena: Inhomogeneous Surface Plasmon Polaritons 216 6.3.2 Advancing Imaging Beyond the Diffraction Limit with ISPPs 220 6.3.3 Emergent Material]Dependent Optical Response in Hybrid Nanostructures 222 6.3.4 Perspective on the Horizon of Health Applications of Hybrid Nanostructures 228 6.3.5 Photodynamic Therapy 228 6.3.6 In Vivo Light Sources 231 6.4 Concluding Remarks 233 References 233 7 Drug Delivery Vehicles from Stimuli]Responsive Block Copolymers 239Prajakta Kulkarni and Sanku Mallik 7.1 Introduction 239 7.2 Block Copolymers for Drug Delivery 241 7.3 Polymeric Nanoparticles 241 7.3.1 Micelles 241 7.3.2 Hydrogels 243 7.3.3 Polymersomes 244 7.4 Stimuli] Responsive Drug Delivery 245 7.4.1 Physical/External Stimuli]Responsive Polymers 246 7.4.1.1 Temperature 246 7.4.1.2 Electro]Responsive Polymers 247 7.4.1.3 Light]Responsive Polymers 247 7.4.1.4 Ultrasound]Responsive Polymers 248 7.4.2 Chemical/Internal Stimuli]Responsive Polymers 248 7.4.2.1 PH]Responsive Polymers 248 7.4.2.2 Ionic Strength]Responsive Polymers 251 7.4.2.3 Enzyme]Responsive Polymers 251 7.4.2.4 Reduction]Sensitive Polymers 251 7.5 Challenges and Prospects 252 7.6 Summary 252 References 253 8 Mechanical Properties of Rubber]Toughened Epoxy Nanocomposites 263B. Zewde, I. J. Zvonkina, A. Bagasao, K. Cassimere, K. Holloway, A. Karim, and D. Raghavan 8.1 Introduction 263 8.2 Epoxy Resins 265 8.3 Rubber] Toughened Epoxy Resin 266 8.4 Nanoparticle Filled Epoxy Nanocomposites 269 8.5 Carbon Nanotubes 270 8.6 Rubber]Toughened CNT Filled Epoxy Nanocomposites 275 8.7 Nanoclay Filled Epoxy Nanocomposites 277 8.8 Rubber]Toughened Nanoclay Filled Epoxy Nanocomposites 282 8.9 Silicon Dioxide Nanoparticles 284 8.10 Rubber]Toughened Nanosilica Filled Epoxy Nanocomposites 286 8.11 Conclusions 289 Acknowledgments 280 References 280 9 Metal Complexes in Reverse Micelles 301Marc A. Walters 9.1 Introduction 301 9.2 Location of Metal Complex Probes in the RM Core 302 9.3 Metal Complexes in Confinement 304 9.3.1 Substitution Reactions and Physical Methods 304 9.3.2 Redox Reactions in Reverse Micelles 309 9.3.3 Metal Ion Binding 311 9.4 Conclusions 320 References 320 10 Heterogenized Catalysis on Metals Impregnated Mesoporous Silica 323Fatima Abi Ghaida, Sébastien Clément, and Ahmad Mehdi 10.1 Introduction 323 10.2 Mesoporous Silica in Catalysis 327 10.3 Modified Mesoporous Silica 329 10.4 Recent Advances in SBA Applied to Catalysis 332 10.5 Conclusion 341 References 342 Index 351

Read more less

Book SynopsisMACHINE DESIGN WITH CAD AND OPTIMIZATION A guide to the new CAD and optimization tools and skills to generate real design synthesis of machine elements and systemsMachine Design with CAD and Optimization offers the basic tools to design or synthesize machine elements and assembly of prospective elements in systems or products. It contains the necessary knowledge base, computer aided design, and optimization tools to define appropriate geometry and material selection of machine elements. A comprehensive text for each element includes: a chart, excel sheet, a MATLAB program, or an interactive program to calculate the element geometry to guide in the selection of the appropriate material.The book contains an introduction to machine design and includes several design factors for consideration. It also offers information on the traditional rigorous design of machine elements. In addition, the author reviews the real design synthesis approach and offeTable of ContentsPreface xxiii Acknowledgments xxvii About the Companion Website xxix Part I Introduction and Design Considerations 1 1 Introduction to Design 3 1.1 Introduction 6 1.2 Phases of Design 8 1.3 Basic Mechanical Functions 9 1.4 Design Factors 11 1.5 Synthesis Approach to Design 12 1.6 Product Life Cycle 13 1.7 Business Measures 14 1.8 Research and Development Process in Product Cycle 15 1.9 Teamwork for Product or System Design 16 1.10 Design and Development Case Study 16 1.11 Units and Fundamentals 16 1.12 Summary 26 2 Design Considerations 31 2.1 Mathematical Modeling 34 2.2 Calculation Tools 57 2.3 Design Procedure 60 2.4 Manufacturing Processes 62 2.5 Standard Sets and Components 72 2.6 Codes and Standards 72 2.7 Summary 73 Part II Knowledge-Based Design 79 3 Introduction to Computer-Aided Techniques 81 3.1 CAD and Geometric Modeling 82 3.2 Geometric Construction and FE Analysis 84 3.3 CAD/CAM/CAE and Advanced Systems 85 3.4 Virtual Reality 87 3.5 Summary 89 4 Computer-Aided Design 91 4.1 3D Geometric Modeling and Viewing Transformation 95 4.2 Parametric Modeling 111 4.3 CAD Hardware and Software 135 4.4 Rendering and Animation 135 4.5 Data Structure 146 4.6 Using CAD in 3D Modeling and CAM 149 4.7 Summary 149 5 Optimization 155 5.1 Introduction 158 5.2 Searches in One Direction 167 5.3 Multidimensional: Classical Indirect Approach 173 5.4 Multidimensional Unconstrained Problem 179 5.5 Multidimensional Constrained Problem 200 5.6 Applications to Machine Elements and Systems 209 5.7 Summary 213 6 Stresses, Deformations, and Deflections 221 6.1 Loads, Shear, Moment, Slope, and Deflection 227 6.2 Mathematical Model 253 6.3 Simple Stresses, Strains, and Deformations 254 6.4 Combined Stresses 264 6.5 Curved Beams 279 6.6 Strain Energy and Deflection 283 6.7 Columns 288 6.8 Equivalent Element 296 6.9 Thermal Effects 297 6.10 Stress Concentration Factors 300 6.11 Finite Element Method 302 6.12 Computer-Aided Design and Optimization 323 6.13 Summary 333 7 Materials Static and Dynamic Strength3 43 7.1 Material Structure and Failure Modes 348 7.2 Numbering Systems and Designations 358 7.3 Heat Treatment and Alloying Elements 362 7.4 Material Propertied and General Applications 366 7.5 Particular Materials for Machine Elements 381 7.6 Hardness and Strength 383 7.7 Failure and Static Failure Theories 385 7.8 Fatigue Strength and Factors Affecting Fatigue 397 7.9 Fracture Mechanics and Fracture Toughness 413 7.10 Computer-Aided Selection and Optimization 419 7.10.1 Material Properties: Carbon Steel 419 7.11 Summary 428 8 Introduction to Elements and System Synthesis 439 8.1 Introduction 441 8.2 Basic and Common Machine Elements 442 8.3 Reverse Engineering 469 8.4 Sample Applications 470 8.5 Computer-Aided Design 476 8.6 System Synthesis 479 8.7 Computer-Aided Assembly 480 8.8 Summary 480 Part III Detailed Design of Machine Elements 487 Section A Basic Joints and Machine Elements 489 9 Screws, Fasteners, and Permanent Joints 491 9.1 Standards and Types 494 9.2 Stresses in Threads 497 9.3 Bolted Connections 498 9.4 Bolt Strength in Static and Fatigue 507 9.5 Power Screws 511 9.6 Permanent Joints 518 9.7 Computer-Aided Design and Optimization 527 9.8 Summary 532 10 Springs 539 10.1 Types of Springs 542 10.2 Helical Springs 542 10.3 Leaf Springs 567 10.4 Belleville Springs 574 10.5 Elastomeric and Other Springs 576 10.6 Computer-Aided Design and Optimization 576 10.7 Summary 579 11 Rolling Bearings 585 11.1 Bearing Types and Selection 588 11.2 Standard Dimension Series 590 11.3 Initial Design and Selection 592 11.4 Bearing Load 595 11.5 Detailed Design and Selection 601 11.6 Speed Limits 609 11.7 Lubrication and Friction 609 11.8 Mounting and Constructional Details 610 11.9 Computer-Aided Design and Optimization 611 11.10 Summary 617 12 Journal Bearings 621 12.1 Lubricants 624 12.2 Hydrodynamic Lubrication 629 12.3 Journal Bearing Design Procedure 641 12.4 Boundary and Mixed Lubrication 646 12.5 Plain Bearing Materials 648 12.6 CAD and Optimization 653 12.7 Summary 661 Section B Power Transmitting and Controlling Elements 667 13 Introduction to Power Transmission and Control 669 13.1 Prime Movers and Machines 671 13.2 Collinear and Noncollinear Transmission Elements 671 13.3 Power Control Elements 675 13.4 Computer-Aided Design of a Power Transmission System 676 13.5 Summary 681 14 Spur Gears 683 14.1 Types and Utility 687 14.2 Definitions, Kinematics, and Standards 688 14.3 Force Analysis and Power Transmission 699 14.4 Design Procedure 701 14.5 Critical Speed 732 14.6 CAD and Optimization 734 14.7 Constructional Details 742 14.8 Summary 747 15 Helical, Bevel, and Worm Gears 755 15.1 Helical Gears 758 15.2 Bevel Gears 776 15.3 Worm Gears 781 15.4 Gear Failure Regimes and Remedies 787 15.5 Computer-Aided Design and Optimization 787 15.6 Constructional Details 794 15.7 Summary 795 16 Flexible Elements 801 16.1 V-belts 804 16.2 Flat Belts 818 16.3 Ropes 823 16.4 Chains 831 16.5 Friction Drives 839 16.6 Flexible Shafts 839 16.7 Computer-Aided Design and Optimization 840 16.8 Summary 849 17 Shafts 857 17.1 Types of Shafts and Axles 859 17.2 Mathematical Model 860 17.3 Initial Design Estimate 865 17.4 Detailed Design 867 17.5 Design for Rigidity 871 17.6 Critical Speed 872 17.7 Computer-Aided Design and Optimization 873 17.8 Constructional Details 879 17.9 Summary 880 18 Clutches, Brakes, and Flywheels 887 18.1 Classifications of Clutches and Brakes 889 18.2 Cone Clutches and Brakes 889 18.3 Disk Clutches and Brakes 891 18.4 Caliper Disk Brakes 898 18.5 Energy Dissipation and Temperature Rise 899 18.6 Design Process 901 18.7 Computer-Aided Design and Optimization 902 18.8 Flywheels 904 18.9 Constructional Details 907 18.10 Summary 908 Problems 908 References 911 Internet Links 912 Appendix A Figures and Tables 913 A.1 Conversion Between US and SI Units 913 A.2 Standard SI Prefixes 914 A.3 Preferred Numbers and Sizes 915 A.4 Standard Rods, or Bars 916 A.5 Standard Joining and Retaining Elements 917 A.6 Standard Sealing Elements 920 A.7 Material Properties 922 A.8 Standard Sections or Profiles and Section Properties 931 Index 949

Read more less

Book SynopsisTextbook covers the fundamental theory of structural mechanics and the modelling and analysis of frame and truss structures Deals with modelling and analysis of trusses and frames using a systematic matrix formulated displacement method with the language and flexibility of the finite element method Element matrices are established from analytical solutions to the differential equations Provides a strong toolbox with elements and algorithms for computational modelling and numerical exploration of truss and frame structures Discusses the concept of stiffness as a qualitative tool to explain structural behaviour Includes numerous exercises, for some of which the computer software CALFEM is used. In order to support the learning process CALFEM gives the user full overview of the matrices and algorithms used in a finite element analysis Table of ContentsPreface ix 1 Matrix Algebra 1 1.1 Definitions 1 1.2 Addition and Subtraction 2 1.3 Multiplication 2 1.4 Determinant 3 1.5 Inverse Matrix 3 1.6 Counting Rules 4 1.7 Systems of Equations 4 1.7.1 Systems of Equations with Only Unknown Components in the Vector 𝐚 5 1.7.2 Systems of Equations with Known and Unknown Components in the Vector 𝐚 6 1.7.3 Eigenvalue Problems 8 Exercises 10 2 Systems of Connected Springs 13 2.1 Spring Relations 16 2.2 Spring Element 16 2.3 Systems of Springs 17 Exercises 30 3 Bars and Trusses 31 3.1 The Differential Equation for Bar Action 33 3.1.1 Definitions 33 3.1.2 The Material Level 35 3.1.3 The Cross-Section Level 38 3.1.4 Bar Action 41 3.2 Bar Element 43 3.2.1 Definitions 43 3.2.2 Solving the Differential Equation 43 3.2.3 From Local to Global Coordinates 51 3.3 Trusses 55 Exercises 66 4 Beams and Frames 71 4.1 The Differential Equation for Beam Action 73 4.1.1 Definitions 73 4.1.2 The Material Level 74 4.1.3 The Cross-Section Level 75 4.1.4 Beam Action 78 4.2 Beam Element 80 4.2.1 Definitions 81 4.2.2 Solving the Differential Equation for Beam Action 81 4.2.3 Beam Element with Six Degrees of Freedom 90 4.2.4 From Local to Global Directions 92 4.3 Frames 95 Exercises 109 5 Modelling at the System Level 115 5.1 Symmetry Properties 116 5.2 The Structure and the System of Equations 120 5.2.1 The Deformations and Displacements of the System 121 5.2.2 The Forces and Equilibria of the System 130 5.2.3 The Stiffness of the System 132 5.3 Structural Design and Simplified Manual Calculations 144 5.3.1 Characterising Structures 144 5.3.2 Axial and Bending Stiffness 145 5.3.3 Reducing the Number of Degrees of Freedom 147 5.3.4 Manual Calculation Using Elementary Cases 149 Exercises 151 6 Flexible Supports 157 6.1 Flexible Supports at Nodes 157 6.2 Foundation on Flexible Support 159 6.2.1 The Constitutive Relations of the Connection Point 159 6.2.2 The Constitutive Relation of the Base Surface 161 6.2.3 Constitutive Relation for the Support Point of the Structure 163 6.3 Bar with Axial Springs 165 6.3.1 The Differential Equation for Bar Action with Axial Springs 165 6.3.2 Bar Element 167 6.4 Beam on Elastic Spring Foundation 171 6.4.1 The Differential Equation for Beam Action with Transverse Springs 171 6.4.2 Beam Element 173 Exercises 180 7 Three-Dimensional Structures 183 7.1 Three-Dimensional Bar Element 186 7.2 Three-Dimensional Trusses 188 7.3 The Differential Equation for Torsional Action 194 7.3.1 Definitions 194 7.3.2 The Material Level 195 7.3.3 The Cross-Section Level 197 7.3.4 Torsional Action 202 7.4 Three-Dimensional Beam Element 203 7.4.1 Element for Torsional Action 204 7.4.2 Beam Element with 12 Degrees of Freedom 205 7.4.3 From Local to Global Directions 206 7.5 Three-Dimensional Frames 209 Exercises 213 8 Flows in Networks 217 8.1 Heat Transport 219 8.1.1 Definitions 219 8.1.2 The Material Level 222 8.1.3 The Cross-Section Level 224 8.1.4 The Equation for Heat Conduction 225 8.1.5 Convection and Radiation 227 8.2 Element for Heat Transport 229 8.2.1 Definitions 230 8.2.2 Solving the Heat Conduction Equation 230 8.3 Networks of One-Dimensional Heat-Conducting Elements 235 8.4 Analogies 242 8.4.1 Diffusion – Fick’s Law 242 8.4.2 Liquid Flow in Porous Media – Darcy’s Law 243 8.4.3 Laminar Pipe Flow – Poiseuille’s Law 244 8.4.4 Electricity – Ohm’s Law 245 8.4.5 Summary 246 Exercises 247 9 Geometrical Non-Linearity 251 9.1 Methods of Calculation 252 9.2 Trusses with Geometrical Non-Linearity Considered 255 9.2.1 The Differential Equation for Bar Action 256 9.2.2 Bar Element 257 9.2.3 Trusses 260 9.3 Frames with Geometrical Non-Linearity Considered 262 9.3.1 The Differential Equation for Beam Action 262 9.3.2 Beam Element 265 9.3.3 Frames 274 9.4 Three-Dimensional Geometric Non-Linearity 277 Exercises 278 10 Material Non-Linearity 281 10.1 Calculation Procedures 282 10.2 Elastic–Perfectly Plastic Material 284 10.3 Trusses with Material Non-Linearity Considered 285 10.4 Frames with Material Non-Linearity Considered 289 Exercises 298 Appendix A Notations 301 Appendix B Answers to the Exercises 303 Index 323

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe most thorough coverage of biophysics available, in a handy, easy-to-read volume, perfect as a reference for experienced engineers or as a textbook for the novice. Following up on his first book, Fundamentals of Biophysics, the author, a well-known scientist in this area, builds on that foundation by offering the biologist or scientist an advanced, comprehensive coverage of biophysics. Structuring the book into four major parts, he thoroughly covers the biophysics of complex systems, such as the kinetics and thermodynamic processes of biological systems, in the first part. The second part is dedicated to molecular biophysics, such as biopolymers and proteins, and the third part is on the biophysics of membrane processes. The final part is on photobiological processes. This ambitious work is a must-have for the veteran biologist, scientist, or chemist working in this field, and for the novice or student, who is interested in learning about biophysics. It is an emerging field, bTable of ContentsIntroduction xv PART I BIOPHYSICS OF COMPLEX SYSTEMS I. Kinetics of Biological Processes 3 1 Qualitative Methods for Studying Dynamic Models of Biological Processes 5 2 Types of Dynamic Behavior of Biological Systems 17 3 Kinetics of Enzyme Processes 29 4 Self-Organization Processes in Distributed Biological Systems 45 II. Thermodynamics of Biological Processes 77 5 Thermodynamics of Irreversible Processes in Biological Systems Near Equilibrium (Linear Thermodynamics) 79 6 Thermodynamics of Systems Far From Equilibrium (Nonlinear Thermodynamics) 91 PART II MOLECULAR BIOPHYSICS III. Three-dimensional Organization of Biopolymers 99 7 Three-dimensional Confi gurations of Polymer Molecules 101 8 Different Types of Interactions inMacromolecules 109 9 Conformational Energy and Three-dimensional Structure of Biopolymers 117 IV. Dynamic Properties of Globular Proteins 153 10 Protein Dynamics 155 11 Physical Models of Dynamic Mobility of Proteins 187 PART III BIOPHYSICS OF MEMBRANE PROCESSES V. Structure-functional Organization of Biological Membranes 227 12 Molecular Organization of Biological Membranes 229 13 Conformational Properties of Membranes 247 VI. Transport of Substances and Bioelectrogenesis 261 14 Nonelectrolyte Transport 263 15 Ion Transport. Ionic Equilibria 269 16 Electrodiffusion Theory of Ion Transport Across Membranes 281 17 Induced Ion Transport 287 18 Ion Transport in Channels 295 19 Ion Transport in Excitable Membranes 319 20 Active Transport 339 VII. Energy Transformation in Biomembranes 349 21 Electron Transport and Energy Transformation in Biomembranes 351 22 Physics of Muscle Contraction, Actin-Myosin Molecular Motor 365 23 Biophysics of Processes of Intracellular Signaling 379 VIII. Electronic Properties of Biopolymers 403 24 Fundamentals of Quantum Description of Molecules 405 25 Mechanisms of Charge Transfer and Energy Migration in Biomolecular Structures 425 26 Mechanisms of Enzyme Catalysis 481 27 Energy Transformation in Primary Processes of Photosynthesis 505 28 Electron-Conformational Interactions in Primary Processes of Photosynthesis 547 X. Primary Processes in Biological Systems 579 29 Photo-conversions of Bacteriorhodopsin and Rhodopsin 581 30 Photoregulatory and Photodestructive Processes 607 Further Reading 633 Index 635

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe book highlights applications of hybrid materials in solar energy systems, lithium ion batteries, electromagnetic shielding, sensing of pollutants and water purification. A hybrid material is defined as a material composed of an intimate mixture of inorganic components, organic components, or both types of components. In the last few years, a tremendous amount of attention has been given towards the development of materials for efficient energy harvesting; nanostructured hybrid materials have also been gaining significant advances to provide pollutant free drinking water, sensing of environmental pollutants, energy storage and conservation. Separately, intensive work on high performing polymer nanocomposites for applications in the automotive, aerospace and construction industries has been carried out, but the aggregation of many fillers, such as clay, LDH, CNT, graphene, represented a major barrier in their development. Only very recently has this problem been overTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Hybrid Nanostructured Materials for Advanced Lithium Batteries 1Soumyadip Choudhury and Manfred Stamm 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Battery Requirements 4 1.3 Survey of Rechargeable Batteries 7 1.4 Advanced Materials for Electrodes 9 1.5 Future Battery Strategies 38 1.6 Limitations of Existing Strategies 59 1.7 Conclusions 62 Acknowledgments 63 References 63 2 High Performing Hybrid Nanomaterials for Supercapacitor Applications 79Sanjit Saha, Milan Jana and Tapas Kuila 2.1 Introduction 80 2.2 Scope of the Chapter 82 2.3 Characterization of Hybrid Nanomaterials 82 2.4 Hybrid Nanomaterials as Electrodes for Supercapacitor 91 2.5 Applications of Supercapacitor 130 2.6 Conclusions 134 References 135 3 Nanohybrid Materials in the Development of Solar Energy Applications 147Poulomi Roy 3.1 Introduction 147 3.2 Significance of Nanohybrid Materials 148 3.3 Synthetic Strategies 162 3.4 Application in Solar Energy Conversion 167 3.5 Summary 175 References 176 4 Hybrid Nanoadsorbents for Drinking Water Treatment: A Critical Review 199Ashok K. Gupta, Partha S. Ghosal and Brajesh K. Dubey 4.1 Introduction 199 4.2 Status and Health Effects of Different Pollutants 201 4.3 Removal Technologies 203 4.4 Hybrid Nanoadsorbent 208 4.5 Issues and Challenges 217 4.6 Conclusions 224 References 225 5 Advanced Nanostructured Materials in Electromagnetic Interference Shielding 241Suneel Kumar Srivastava and Vikas Mittal 5.1 Introduction 241 5.2 Theoretical Aspect of EMI Shielding 243 5.3 Experimental Methods in Measuring Shielding Effectiveness 247 5.4 Carbon Allotrope-Based Polymer Nanocomposites 248 Fillers-Based Polymer Nanocomposites 265 5.5 Intrinsically Conducting Polymer (ICP) Derived Nanocomposites 276 5.6 Summary 300 6 Preparation, Properties and the Application of Hybrid Nanomaterials in Sensing Environmental Pollutants 321R. Ajay Rakkesh, D. Durgalakshmi and S. Balakumar 6.1 Introduction 321 6.2 Hybrid Nanomaterials: Smart Material for Sensing Environmental Pollutants 323 6.3 Synthesis Methods of Hybrid Nanomaterials 326 6.4 Basic Mechanism of Gas Sensors Using Hybrid Nanomaterials 330 6.5 Hybrid Nanomaterials-Based Conductometric Gas Sensors for Environmental Monitoring 331 6.6 Conclusion 342 References 342 7 Development of Hybrid Fillers/Polymer Nanocomposites for Electronic Applications 349Mariatti Jaafar 7.1 Introduction 350 7.2 Factors Influencing the Properties of Filler/Polymer Composite 353 7.3 Hybridization of Fillers in Polymer Composites 355 7.4 Hybrid Fillers in Polymer Nanocomposites 358 7.5 Fabrication Methods of Hybrid Fillers/Polymer Composites 362 7.6 Applications of Hybrid Fillers/Polymer Composites 365 References 366 8 High Performance Hybrid Filler Reinforced Epoxy Nanocomposites 371Suman Chhetri, Tapas Kuila and Suneel Kumar Srivastava 8.1 Introduction 372 8.2 Reinforcing Fillers 373 8.3 Necessity of Hybrid Filler Systems 376 8.4 Epoxy Resin 379 8.5 Preparation of Hybrid Filler/Epoxy Nanocomposites 380 8.6 Characterization of Hybrid Filler/Epoxy Polymer Composites 381 8.7 Properties of the Hybrid Filler/Epoxy Nanocomposites 383 8.8 Summary and Future Prospect 408 References 413 9 Recent Developments in Elastomer/Hybrid Filler Nanocomposites 423Suneel Kumar Srivastava and Vikas Mittal 9.1 Introduction 423 9.2 Preparation Methods of Elastomer Nanocomposites 426 9.3 Hybrid Fillers in Elastomer Nanocomposites 427 9.4 Mechanical Properties of Hybrid Filler Incorporated Elastomer Nanocomposites 440 9.5 Dynamical Mechanical Thermal Analysis (DMA) of Elastomer Nanocomposites 452 9.6 Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA) of Hybrid Filler Incorporated Elastomer Nanocomposites 464 9.7 Differential Scanning Calorimetric (DSC) Analysis of Hybrid Filler Incorporated Elastomer Nanocomposites 468 9.8 Electrical Conductivity of Hybrid Filler Incorporated Elastomer Nanocomposites 476 9.9 Thermal Conductivity of Hybrid Filler Incorporated Elastomer Nanocomposites 477 9.10 Dielectric Properties of Hybrid Filler Incorporated Elastomer Nanocomposits 477 9.11 Shape Memory Property of Hybrid Filler Incorporated Elastomer Nanocomposites 478 9.12 Summary 478 Acknowledgment 479 References 479

Read more less

Book SynopsisDifferential Game Theory with Applications to Missiles and Autonomous Systems explains the use of differential game theory in autonomous guidance and control systems. The book begins with an introduction to the basic principles before considering optimum control and game theory.Table of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xiii About the Companion Website xv 1 Differential Game Theory and Applications to Missile Guidance 1 Nomenclature 1 Abbreviations 2 1.1 Introduction 2 1.1.1 Need for Missile Guidance—Past, Present, and Future 2 1.2 Game Theoretic Concepts and Definitions 3 1.3 Game Theory Problem Examples 4 1.3.1 Prisoner’s Dilemma 4 1.3.2 The Game of Tic-Tac-Toe 6 1.4 Game Theory Concepts Generalized 8 1.4.1 Discrete-Time Game 8 1.4.2 Continuous-Time Differential Game 9 1.5 Differential Game Theory Application to Missile Guidance 10 1.6 Two-Party and Three-Party Pursuit-Evasion Game 11 1.7 Book Chapter Summaries 11 1.7.1 A Note on the Terminology Used In the Book 13 References 14 2 Optimum Control and Differential Game Theory 16 Nomenclature 16 Abbreviations 17 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Calculus of Optima (Minimum or Maximum) for a Function 18 2.2.1 On the Existence of the Necessary and Sufficient Conditions for an Optima 18 2.2.2 Steady State Optimum Control Problem with Equality Constraints Utilizing Lagrange Multipliers 19 2.2.3 Steady State Optimum Control Problem for a Linear System with Quadratic Cost Function 22 2.3 Dynamic Optimum Control Problem 23 2.3.1 Optimal Control with Initial and Terminal Conditions Specified 23 2.3.2 Boundary (Transversality) Conditions 25 2.3.3 Sufficient Conditions for Optimality 29 2.3.4 Continuous Optimal Control with Fixed Initial Condition and Unspecified Final Time 30 2.3.5 A Further Property of the Hamiltonian 35 2.3.6 Continuous Optimal Control with Inequality Control Constraints— the Pontryagin’s Minimum (Maximum) Principle 36 2.4 Optimal Control for a Linear Dynamical System 38 2.4.1 The LQPI Problem—Fixed Final Time 38 2.5 Optimal Control Applications in Differential Game Theory 40 2.5.1 Two-Party Game Theoretic Guidance for Linear Dynamical Systems 41 2.5.2 Three-Party Game Theoretic Guidance for Linear Dynamical Systems 44 2.6 Extension of the Differential Game Theory to Multi-Party Engagement 50 2.7 Summary and Conclusions 50 References 51 Appendix 53 3 Differential Game Theory Applied to Two-Party Missile Guidance Problem 63 Nomenclature 63 Abbreviations 64 3.1 Introduction 64 3.2 Development of the Engagement Kinematics Model 67 3.2.1 Relative Engage Kinematics of n Versus m Vehicles 68 3.2.2 Vector/Matrix Representation 69 3.3 Optimum Interceptor/Target Guidance for a Two-Party Game 70 3.3.1 Construction of the Differential Game Performance Index 70 3.3.2 Weighting Matrices S, R p ,R e 72 3.3.3 Solution of the Differential Game Guidance Problem 73 3.4 Solution of the Riccati Differential Equations 75 3.4.1 Solution of the Matrix Riccati Differential Equations (MRDE) 75 3.4.2 State Feedback Guidance Gains 76 3.4.3 Solution of the Vector Riccati Differential Equations (VRDE) 77 3.4.4 Analytical Solution of the VRDE for the Special Case 78 3.4.5 Mechanization of the Game Theoretic Guidance 79 3.5 Extension of the Game Theory to Optimum Guidance 79 3.6 Relationship with the Proportional Navigation (PN) and the Augmented PN Guidance 81 3.7 Conclusions 82 References 82 Appendix 84 4 Three-Party Differential Game Theory Applied to Missile Guidance Problem 102 Nomenclature 102 Abbreviations 103 4.1 Introduction 103 4.2 Engagement Kinematics Model 104 4.2.1 Three-Party Engagement Scenario 105 4.3 Three-Party Differential Game Problem and Solution 107 4.4 Solution of the Riccati Differential Equations 111 4.4.1 Solution of the Matrix Riccati Differential Equation (MRDE) 111 4.4.2 Solution of the Vector Riccati Differential Equation (VRDE) 112 4.4.3 Further Consideration of Performance Index (PI) Weightings 115 4.4.4 Game Termination Criteria and Outcomes 116 4.5 Discussion and Conclusions 116 References 117 Appendix 118 5 Four Degrees-of-Freedom (DOF) Simulation Model for Missile Guidance and Control Systems 125 Nomenclature 125 Abbreviations 126 5.1 Introduction 126 5.2 Development of the Engagement Kinematics Model 126 5.2.1 Translational Kinematics for Multi-Vehicle Engagement 126 5.2.2 Vector/Matrix Representation 128 5.2.3 Rotational Kinematics: Relative Range, Range Rates, Sightline Angles, and Rates 128 5.3 Vehicle Navigation Model 130 5.3.1 Application of Quaternion to Navigation 131 5.4 Vehicle Body Angles and Flight Path Angles 133 5.4.1 Computing Body Rates (p I ,q I ,r I) 134 5.5 Vehicle Autopilot Dynamics 135 5.6 Aerodynamic Considerations 135 5.7 Conventional Guidance Laws 136 5.7.1 Proportional Navigation (PN) Guidance 136 5.7.2 Augmented Proportional Navigation (APN) Guidance 137 5.7.3 Optimum Guidance and Game Theory–Based Guidance 137 5.8 Overall State Space Model 138 5.9 Conclusions 138 References 139 Appendix 140 6 Three-Party Differential Game Missile Guidance Simulation Study 150 Nomenclature 150 Abbreviations 150 6.1 Introduction 151 6.2 Engagement Kinematics Model 151 6.3 Game Theory Problem and the Solution 154 6.4 Discussion of the Simulation Results 157 6.4.1 Game Theory Guidance Demonstrator Simulation 157 6.4.2 Game Theory Guidance Simulation Including Disturbance Inputs 160 6.5 Conclusions 162 6.5.1 Useful Future Studies 162 References 163 Appendix 164 Addendum 165 Index 189

Read more less

Book SynopsisComprehensively covers geothermal energy systems that utilize ground energy in conjunction with heat pumps to provide sustainable heating and cooling The book describes geothermal energy systems that utilize ground energy in conjunction with heat pumps and related technologies to provide heating and cooling. Also discussed are methods to model and assess such systems, as well as means to determine potential environmental impacts of geothermal energy systems and their thermal interaction. The book presents the most up-to-date information in the area. It provides material on a range of topics, from thermodynamic concepts to more advanced discussions of the renewability and sustainability of geothermal energy systems. Numerous applications of such systems are also provided. Geothermal Energy: Sustainable Heating and Cooling Using the Ground takes a research orientated approach to provide coverage of the state of the art and emerging trends, and includes numeTable of ContentsPreface xv About the Authors xix Acknowledgments xxi Nomenclature xxiii 1 Introduction to Geothermal Energy 1 1.1 Features of Geothermal Energy 2 1.2 Geothermal Energy Systems 3 1.3 Outline of the Book 4 References 7 2 Fundamentals 8 2.1 Introduction 8 2.2 Thermodynamics 8 2.3 Heat Transfer 18 2.4 Fluid Mechanics 23 2.5 The Nature of the Ground 30 References 32 3 Background and Technologies 34 3.1 Introduction 34 3.2 Heat Pumps 34 3.3 Heat Exchangers 36 3.4 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning 36 3.5 Energy Storage 37 4 Underground Thermal Energy Storage 39 4.1 Introduction 39 4.2 Thermal Energy Storage Methods 40 4.3 UndergroundThermal Storage Methods and Systems 57 4.4 Integration of Thermal Energy Storage with Heat Pumps 62 4.5 Closing Remarks 68 References 68 5 Geothermal Heating and Cooling 76 5.1 Ground-Source Heat Pumps 77 5.2 Geothermal Heat Exchangers 78 References 85 6 Design Considerations and Installation 86 6.1 Sensitivity to GroundThermal Conductivity 86 6.2 Thermal Response Test 89 6.3 Building Energy Calculations 95 6.4 Economics 105 6.5 Standards 108 References 109 7 Modeling Ground Heat Exchangers 111 7.1 General Aspects of Modeling 111 7.2 AnalyticalModels 116 7.3 Numerical Modeling 133 7.4 Closing Remarks 138 References 139 8 Ground Heat ExchangerModeling Examples 143 8.1 Semi-AnalyticalModeling of Two Boreholes 143 8.2 Numerical Modeling of Two Boreholes 150 8.3 Numerical Modeling of a Borefield 167 8.4 Numerical Modeling of a Horizontal Ground Heat Exchanger 172 8.5 Model Comparison 180 References 182 9 Thermodynamic Analysis 184 9.1 Introduction 184 9.2 Analysis of an UndergroundThermal Energy Storage System 184 9.3 Analysis of a Ground-Source Heat Pump System 192 9.4 Analysis of a System Integrating Ground-Source Heat Pumps and UndergroundThermal Storage 197 References 204 10 Environmental Factors 206 10.1 Introduction 206 10.2 Environmental Benefits 206 10.3 Environmental Impacts 208 References 217 11 Renewability and Sustainability 218 11.1 Introduction 218 11.2 Renewability of Ground-Source Heat Pumps 218 11.3 Sustainability of Ground-Source Heat Pumps 220 References 226 12 Case Studies 228 12.1 Introduction 228 12.2 Thermal Energy Storage in Ground for Heating and Cooling 229 12.3 Underground andWater TankThermal Energy Storage for Heating 231 12.4 Space Conditioning with Heat Pump and SeasonalThermal Storage 239 12.5 Integrated System with Ground-Source Heat Pump,Thermal Storage, and District Energy 242 12.6 Closed-Loop Geothermal District Energy System 249 12.7 Closing Remarks 250 References 251 A Numerical Discretization 252 Reference 254 B Sensitivity Analyses 255 B.1 Parameters AffectingThermal Interactions betweenMultiple Boreholes 255 B.2 Validation of the Two-Dimensional Numerical Solution with a Three-Dimensional Solution 261 B.3 Heat Flux Variation along Borehole Length 267 References 272 Index 273

Read more less

Book SynopsisA guide to the theoretical underpinnings and practical applications of chemically reacting flow Chemically Reacting Flow: Theory, Modeling, and Simulation, Second Edition combines fundamental concepts in fluid mechanics and physical chemistry while helping students and professionals to develop the analytical and simulation skills needed to solve real-world engineering problems. The authors clearly explain the theoretical and computational building blocks enabling readers to extend the approaches described to related or entirely new applications. New to this Second Edition are substantially revised and reorganized coverage of topics treated in the first edition. New material in the book includes two important areas of active research: reactive porous-media flows and electrochemical kinetics. These topics create bridges between traditional fluid-flow simulation approaches and transport within porous-media electrochemical systems. The first half of thTable of ContentsPreface xxi Acknowledgments xxv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Foregoing Texts 2 1.2 Objectives and Approach 3 1.3 What is a Fluid? 3 1.4 Chemically Reacting Fluid Flow 8 1.5 Physical Chemistry 9 1.6 Illustrative Examples 10 References 17 2 Fluid Properties 21 2.1 Equations of State 21 2.2 Thermodynamics 25 2.3 Transport Properties 31 References 42 3 Fluid Kinematics 45 3.1 Path to Conservation Equations 46 3.2 System and Control Volume 48 3.3 Stress and Strain Rate 58 3.4 Fluid Strain Rate 59 3.5 Vorticity 68 3.6 Dilatation 69 3.7 Stress Tensor 70 3.8 Stokes Postulates 79 3.9 Transformation from Principal Coordinates 83 3.10 Stokes Hypothesis 88 3.11 Summary 88 4 Conservation Equations 91 4.1 Mass Continuity 93 4.2 Navier–Stokes Equations 97 4.3 Species Diffusion 104 4.4 Species Conservation 108 4.5 Conservation of Energy 114 4.6 Mechanical Energy 123 4.7 Thermal Energy 124 4.8 Ideal Gas and Incompressible Fluid 130 4.9 Conservation Equation Summary 130 4.10 Pressure Filtering 132 4.11 Helmholtz Decomposition 135 4.12 Potential Flow 136 4.13 Vorticity Transport 137 4.14 Mathematical Characteristics 142 4.15 Summary 148 References 148 5 Parallel Flows 151 5.1 Nondimensionalization 152 5.2 Couette and Poiseuille Flows 154 5.3 Hagen–Poiseuille Flow in a Circular Duct 167 5.4 Ducts of Noncircular Cross Section 170 5.5 Hydrodynamic Entry Length 174 5.6 Transient Flow in a Duct 175 5.7 Richardson Annular Overshoot 175 5.8 Stokes Problems 178 5.9 Rotating Shaft in Infinite Media 188 5.10 Graetz Problem 189 References 193 6 Similarity and Local Similarity 195 6.1 Jeffery–Hamel Flow 196 6.2 Planar Wedge Channel 196 6.3 Radial-Flow Reactors 205 6.4 Spherical Flow between Inclined Disks 206 6.5 Radial Flow between Parallel Disks 209 6.6 Flow between Plates with Wall Injection 214 References 224 7 Stagnation Flows 225 7.1 Similarity in Axisymmetric Stagnation Flow 226 7.2 Generalized Steady Axisymmetric Stagnation Flow 228 7.3 Semi-Infinite Domain 232 7.4 Finite-Gap Stagnation Flow 242 7.5 Finite-Gap Numerical Solution 252 7.6 Rotating Disk 255 7.7 Rotating Disk in a Finite Gap 260 7.8 Unified View of Axisymmetric Stagnation Flow 265 7.9 Planar Stagnation Flows 270 7.10 Opposed Flow 273 7.11 Tubular Flows 274 7.12 Stagnation-Flow Chemical Vapor Deposition 280 7.13 Boundary-Layer Bypass 285 References 287 8 Boundary-layer Channel Flow 291 8.1 Scaling Arguments for Boundary Layers 292 8.2 General Setting Boundary-Layer Equations 298 8.3 Boundary Conditions 299 8.4 Computational Solution 300 8.5 Introduction to the Method of Lines 302 8.6 Method-of-Lines Boundary-Layer Algorithm 304 8.7 Von Mises Transformation 308 8.8 Von Mises Formulation as DAEs 311 8.9 Hydrodynamic Entry Length 314 8.10 Physical and von Mises Coordinates 314 8.11 General von Mises Boundary Layer 315 8.12 Limitations 317 8.13 Chemically Reacting Channel Flow 318 References 319 9 Low-dimensional Reactors 323 9.1 Batch Reactors (Homogeneous Mass-Action Kinetics) 324 9.2 Plug-Flow Reactor 327 9.3 Plug Flow with Porous Walls 331 9.4 Plug Flow with Variable Area and Surface Chemistry 333 9.5 Perfectly Stirred Reactors 338 9.6 Transient Stirred Reactors 341 9.7 Stagnation-Flow Catalytic Reactor 345 References 346 10 Thermochemical Properties 347 10.1 Kinetic Theory of Gases 348 10.2 Molecular Energy Levels 349 10.3 Partition Function 353 10.4 Statistical Thermodynamics 359 10.5 Example Calculations 366 References 369 11 Molecular Transport 371 11.1 Introduction to Transport Coefficients 372 11.2 Molecular Interactions 375 11.3 Kinetic Gas Theory of Transport Properties 384 11.4 Rigorous Theory of Transport Properties 391 11.5 Evaluation of Transport Coefficients 399 11.6 Momentum and Energy Fluxes 406 11.7 Species Fluxes 406 11.8 Diffusive Transport Example 413 References 415 12 Mass-action Kinetics 417 12.1 Gibbs Free Energy 418 12.2 Equilibrium Constant 422 12.3 Mass-Action Kinetics 427 12.4 Pressure-Dependent Unimolecular Reactions 433 12.5 Bimolecular Chemical Activation Reactions 438 References 443 13 Reaction Rate Theories 445 13.1 Molecular Collisions 446 13.2 Collision Theory Reaction Rate Expression 453 13.3 Transition-State Theory 457 13.4 Unimolecular Reactions 461 13.5 Bimolecular Chemical Activation Reactions 474 References 480 14 Reaction Mechanisms 481 14.1 Models for Chemistry 482 14.2 Characteristics of Complex Reactions 486 14.3 Mechanism Development 493 14.4 Combustion Chemistry 503 References 518 15 Laminar Flames 521 15.1 Premixed Flat Flame 521 15.2 Premixed Flame Structure 530 15.3 Methane-Air Premixed Flame 534 15.4 Stagnation Flames 534 15.5 Opposed-Flow Diffusion Flames 536 15.6 Premixed Counterflow Flames 539 15.7 Arc-Length Continuation 543 References 545 16 Heterogeneous Chemistry 549 16.1 Taxonomy 550 16.2 Surface Species Naming Conventions 553 16.3 Concentrations within Phases 555 16.4 Surface Reaction Rate Expressions 557 16.5 Thermodynamic Considerations 565 16.6 General Surface Kinetics Formalism 571 16.7 Surface-Coverage Modification of the Rate Expression 573 16.8 Sticking Coefficients 574 16.9 Flux-Matching Conditions at a Surface 576 16.10 Surface Species Governing Equations 577 16.11 Developing Surface Reaction Mechanisms 578 References 587 17 Reactive Porous Media 589 17.1 Introduction 589 17.2 Pore Characterization 591 17.3 Multicomponent Transport 593 17.4 Mass Conservation Equations 597 17.5 Energy Conservation Equations 598 17.6 Tubular Packed-Bed Reactor 600 17.7 Reconstructed Microstructures 603 17.8 Intra-Particle Pore Diffusion 607 References 609 18 Electrochemistry 613 18.1 Electrochemical Reactions 615 18.2 Electrochemical Potentials 618 18.3 Electrochemical Thermodynamics and Reversible Potentials 618 18.4 Electrochemical Kinetics 621 18.5 Electronic and Ionic Species Transport 632 18.6 Modeling Electrochemical Unit Cells 633 18.7 Principles of Composite SOFC Electrodes 641 18.8 SOFC Button-Cell Example 643 18.9 Chemistry and Model Development 647 References 649 A Vector and Tensor Operations 651 A. 1 Vector Algebra 651 A. 2 Unit Vector Algebra 652 A. 3 Unit Vector Derivatives 653 A. 4 Scalar Product 653 A. 5 Vector Product 654 A. 6 Vector Differentiation 654 A. 7 Gradient 654 A. 8 Gradient of a Vector 655 A. 9 Curl of a Vector 656 A. 10 Divergence of a Vector 656 A. 11 Divergence of a Tensor 657 A. 12 Laplacian 658 A. 13 Laplacian of a Vector 658 A. 14 Vector Derivative Identities 660 A. 15 Gauss Divergence Theorem 661 A. 16 Substantial Derivative 661 A.6. 1 Substantial Derivative of a Vector 662 A. 17 Symmetric Tensors 662 A. 18 Stress Tensor and Stress Vector 663 A. 19 Direction Cosines 664 A. 20 Coordinate Transformations 665 A. 21 Principal Axes 667 A. 22 Tensor Invariants 669 A. 23 Matrix Diagonalization 670 B Navier–stokes Equations 671 B. 1 General Vector Form 671 B. 2 Stress Components 672 B. 3 Cartesian Navier–Stokes Equations 674 B. 4 Cartesian Navier–Stokes, Constant Viscosity 675 B. 5 Cylindrical Navier–Stokes Equations 675 B. 6 Cylindrical Navier–Stokes, Constant Viscosity 676 B. 7 Spherical Navier–Stokes Equations 676 B. 8 Spherical Navier–Stokes, Constant viscosity 677 B. 9 Orthogonal Curvilinear Navier–Stokes 678 C Example in General curvilinear coordinates 681 C.1 Governing Equations 681 C.1.1 Limiting Cases 685 d Small Parameter Expansion 687 E Boundary-layer Asymptotic Behavior 691 E. 1 Boundary-Layer Approximation 692 E. 2 A Prototype for Boundary-Layer Behavior 693 F Computational Algorithms 697 F. 1 Differential Equations from Chemical Kinetics 698 F. 2 Stiff Model Problem 698 F. 3 Solution Methods 700 F.3. 1 Explicit Methods 701 F.3. 2 Implicit Methods 704 F. 3 Stiff ODE Software 707 F. 4 Differential-Algebraic Equations 707 F. 5 Solution of Nonlinear Algebraic Equations 708 F.5. 1 Scalar Newton Algorithm 708 F.5. 2 Newton’s Algorithm for Algebraic Systems 709 F.5. 3 Illustration of the Hybrid Method 712 F.5. 4 Steady-State Sensitivity Analysis 713 F. 6 Continuation Procedures 715 F.6. 1 Multiple Steady States 715 F.6. 2 Illustration of Spurious Solutions 715 F. 7 Transient Sensitivity Analysis 717 F. 8 Transient Ignition Example 719 References 719 G MATLAB Examples 721 G. 1 Steady-State Couette–Poiseuille Flow 721 G. 2 Steady Semi-Infinite Stagnation Flow 723 G. 3 Steady Finite-Gap Stagnation Flow 725 G. 4 Transient Stokes Problem 728 G. 5 Graetz Problem 729 G. 6 Channel Boundary Layer Entrance 731 G. 7 Rectangular Channel Friction Factor 735 Index 739

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe acronym Laser is derived from Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation. With the advent of the ruby laser in 1960, there has been tremendous research activity in developing novel, more versatile and more efficient laser sources or devices, as lasers applications are ubiquitous. Today, lasers are used in many areas of human endeavor and are routinely employed in a host of diverse fields: various branches of engineering, microelectronics, biomedical, medicine, dentistry, surgery, surface modification, to name just a few. In this book (containing 10 chapters) we have focused on application of lasers in adhesion and related areas. The topics covered include: Topographical modification of polymers and metals by laser ablation to create superhydrophobic surfaces. Non-ablative laser surface modification. Laser surface modification to enhance adhesion. Laser surface engineering of materials to modulate their wetting behavior.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Part 1: Laser Surface Modification and Adhesion Enhancement 1 1 Topographical Modification of Polymers and Metals by Laser Ablation to Create Superhydrophobic Surfaces 3Frank L. Palmieri and Christopher J. Wohl 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Wetting Theory 6 1.3 Laser Ablation Background 12 1.3.1 Ablation Mechanics 12 1.3.2 Ablation in Metals 13 1.3.3 Ablation in Polymers 16 1.4 Preparation of Superhydrophobic Surfaces by Laser Ablation 18 1.4.1 Hydrophobic Organic Substrates 18 1.4.2 Hydrophilic Organic Substrates 26 1.4.3 Hydrophilic Substrates with Hydrophobic Coatings 32 1.4.4 Hydrophilic Inorganic Substrates 43 1.4.4.1 Metallic substrates 44 1.4.4.2 Silicon substrates 51 1.4.4.3 Ceramic Substrates 55 1.5 Summary 56 References 57 2 Nonablative Laser Surface Modification 69Andy Hooper 2.1 Introduction 69 2.2 Part 1 – Nonablative Laser Skin Photorejuvenation 70 2.2.1 Introduction 70 2.2.2 Nonablative Laser-Based Skin Treatments 72 2.2.3 Review of Nonablative Laser-Based Skin Treatments Based on Laser Type 73 2.2.3.1 Lasers Emitting at 532 nm 73 2.2.3.2 Lasers Emitting at 511, 578, 585, and 600 nm Wavelengths 75 2.2.3.3 Lasers Emitting at 780 nm 76 2.2.3.4 Lasers Emitting at 980 nm 76 2.2.3.5 Lasers Emitting at 1064 nm 76 2.2.3.6 Lasers Emitting at 1320 nm 77 2.2.3.7 Lasers Emitting at 1450 nm 78 2.2.3.8 Lasers Emitting at 1540 nm 78 2.2.3.9 Lasers Emitting at 2940 nm 80 2.2.4 Combined Techniques 81 2.2.5 Conclusions for Part 1 – Nonablative Laser Skin Photorejuvenation 81 2.3 Part 2 –Formation of Micro-/Nano-Structures and LIPSS in Materials by Nonablative Laser Processing 82 2.3.1 Introduction 82 2.3.2 Review of Micro-/Nano-Structures and LIPSS 83 2.3.2.1 Micro-/Nano-Structures and LIPSS Formation in Metals 83 2.3.2.2 Micro-/Mano-Structures and LIPSS Formation in Semiconductors 85 2.3.2.3 Micro-/Nano-Structures and LIPSS Formation in Dielectrics 86 2.3.2.4 Micro-/Nano-Structures and LIPSS Formation in Polymers 86 2.3.2.5 Micro-/Nano-Structures and LIPSS Formation in Multiple Materials 87 2.3.3 Part 2 –Conclusion for Formation of Micro-/Nano-Structures and LIPSS in Materials by Nonablative Laser Processing 87 2.4 Part 3 – Nonablative Laser Surface Modification to Alter the Surface Properties of Materials 87 2.4.1 Introduction 88 2.4.2 Examples of Nonablative Laser Surface Modification to Alter the Surface Properties of Materials 88 2.4.3 Conclusions for Part 3 – Nonablative Laser Surface Modification to Alter Surface Properties 92 2.5 Summary 93 References 94 3 Wettability Characteristics of Laser Surface Engineered Polymers 99D.G. Waugh and J. Lawrence 3.1 Introduction 99 3.2 Lasers for Surface Engineering 101 3.2.1 Infrared Lasers for Surface Engineering 101 3.2.2 Ultraviolet Lasers for Surface Engineering 102 3.2.3 Ultrafast Pulsed Lasers for Surface Engineering 104 3.3 Laser Surface-Engineered Topography 105 3.4 Laser Surface-Engineered Wettability 110 3.5 Summary 116 References 117 4 Laser Surface Modification for Adhesion Enhancement 123Wei-Sheng Lei and Kash Mittal 4.1 Introduction 124 4.1.1 Mechanisms or Theories of Adhesion 124 4.1.2 Methods of Surface Modification for Adhesion Enhancement 126 4.2 Basic Mechanisms of Laser Surface Modification 127 4.2.1 Absorption of Laser Radiation in a Material 128 4.2.1.1 Linear Absorption 129 4.2.1.2 Nonlinear Absorption 129 4.2.2 Photo-Chemical Process 130 4.2.3 Photo-Thermal Process 132 4.2.3.1 Conventional Heat Flow Model 132 4.2.3.2 Two-Temperature Model 135 4.2.3.3 Ablation Rate and Ablation Spot Size 137 4.3 Laser Induced Surface Modification of Metal Substrates to Enhance Adhesion 138 4.3.1 Laser Induced Surface Cleaning and Activation for Adhesion Improvement 138 4.3.2 The Dominant Role of Mechanical Interlocking for Adhesion Improvement 141 4.3.3 Laser Surface Patterning 142 4.3.4 Laser Surface Topography Modification to Enhance Adhesion of Hard Coatings on Metals 145 4.3.5 Laser Surface Modification to Enhance Metal-to-Metal Adhesive Bonding 150 4.3.6 Laser Surface Modification of Metal Substrates to Enhance Adhesion of Polymeric Materials 155 4.4 Laser Induced Surface Modification of Polymers and Composites to Enhance Their Adhesion 158 4.4.1 Adhesion Improvement due to Laser Treatment 159 4.4.2 Changes in Surface Morphology of Laser Treated Surfaces 163 4.4.3 Chemical Modification of Laser Treated Surfaces 164 4.5 Summary 167 References 168 5 Laser Surface Modification in Dentistry: Effect on the Adhesion of Restorative Materials 175Regina Guenka Palma-Dibb, Juliana Jendiroba Faraoni, Walter Raucci-Neto and Alessandro Dibb 5.1 Introduction 175 5.2 Dental Structures 180 5.3 Adhesion of Restorative Materials 185 5.4 Laser Light Interaction with the Dental Substrate 190 5.5 Dental Structure Ablation and Influence on Bond Strength of Restorative Materials 193 5.6 Summary 200 5.7 Prospects 200 References 200 Part 2: Other Applications 209 6 Laser Polymer Welding 211Rolf Klein 6.1 Introduction to Laser Polymer Welding 211 6.2 Theoretical Background 213 6.2.1 Reflection, Transmission and Absorption Behaviors 213 6.2.2 Heat Generation and Dissipation 226 6.2.3 Laser Welding Processes 239 6.3 Factors Affecting Polymer Laser Welding 242 6.3.1 Types of Processes for TTLW 242 6.3.2 Adapting Absorption to Welding Process 250 6.3.3 Design of Joint Geometry 255 6.4 Practical Applications 257 6.5 Testing and Quality Control 261 6.6 Future Prospects 263 6.7 Summary 263 Acknowledgements 263 References 266 7 Laser Based Adhesion Testing Technique to Measure Thin Film-Substrate Interface Toughness 269Soma Sekhar V. Kandula 7.1 Introduction 270 7.2 Modification of Laser Spallation Technique to Measure Thin Film-Substrate Interface Fracture Toughness 275 7.2.1 Sample Preparation 277 7.2.2 Experimental Procedure and Analysis 278 7.3 Parametric Studies 283 7.3.1 Effect of Test Film Thickness 284 7.3.2 Effect of Amplitude of the Stress Pulse 285 7.3.3 Effect of Shape of the Stress Pulse 286 7.3.4 Effect of Thin Film Properties 286 7.3.5 Effect of Thin Film Inertial Layer 288 7.3.6 Effect of Amplitude and Gradient of Residual Stresses on the Thin Film Delamination 289 7.4 Validation of Dynamic Delamination Protocol 290 7.5 Summary 294 References 294 8 Laser Induced Thin Film Debonding for Micro-Device Fabrication Applications 299Wei-Sheng Lei and Zhishui Yu 8.1 Introduction 299 8.2 The Mechanism of Laser Induced Debonding (LID) 301 8.3 Thin Film Patterning by Laser Induced Forward Transfer 306 8.3.1 Background 306 8.3.2 Thin Film Transfer Mechanisms in a LIFT Process 308 8.4 GaN Film Lift-Off for High-Brightness LEDs and High Power Electronics 309 8.4.1 Background 309 8.4.2 The Laser Lift-Off Process 311 8.5 Dielectric Passivation Layer Opening for Interconnect Formation in Crystalline Silicon Solar Cells 313 8.5.1 Background 313 8.5.2 Laser Process for Making Local Contact Openings 314 8.6 Laser Induced Wafer Debonding for Advanced Packaging Applications 316 8.6.1 Background 316 8.6.2 The Laser Induced Wafer Debonding Process 318 8.7 Summary 319 References 320 9 Laser Surface Cleaning: Removal of Hard Thin Ceramic Coatings 325S. Marimuthu, A.M. Kamara, M F Rajemi, D. Whitehead, P. Mativenga and L. Li 9.1 Introduction 326 9.2 Chemical Etching of Hard Thin Coatings 328 9.3 Typical Experimental Set-up for Excimer Laser Removal of Thin Coatings 328 9.4 Experimental Results on Excimer Laser Removal of Thin Coatings 329 9.4.1 Laser Removal of Titanium Nitride from Tungsten Carbide 329 9.4.1.1 Removal of Titanium Nitride from Tungsten Carbide Cutting Insert 329 9.4.1.2 Removal of Titanium Nitride from Tungsten Carbide Micro-Tool 332 9.4.2 Laser Removal of Titanium Aluminium Nitride from Tungsten Carbide 338 9.4.3 Laser Removal of CrTiAlN Coatings from High Speed Steel 345 9.5 Online Monitoring of Laser Coating Removal Process 354 9.5.1 Online Monitoring Using Probe Beam Reflection (PBR) System 355 9.5.2 Online Monitoring Using Laser Plume Emission Spectroscopy 357 9.6 Discussion of Excimer Laser Coating Removal Mechanisms 358 9.7 Finite Element Modelling of Excimer Laser Removal of Thin Coatings 362 9.8 Performance Evaluation of Laser Decoated Mechanical Tool 366 9.8.1 Evaluation of Wear Performance 366 9.8.2 Surface Roughness of Machined Parts 367 9.8.3 Environmental Footprints in Cutting 368 9.8.4 Energy Consumption and Footprints for Laser Decoating 370 9.8.5 Comparison of the Energy Footprints for the Different Steps 371 9.9 Summary 372 Acknowledgments 373 References 373 10 Laser Removal of Particles from Surfaces 379Changho Seo, Hyesung Shin and Dongsik Kim 10.1 Introduction 380 10.2 Dry Laser Cleaning (DLC) 382 10.3 Steam Laser Cleaning (SLC) 386 10.4 Laser Shock Cleaning (LSC) 395 10.5 Novel Laser Cleaning Techniques 400 10.5.1 Matrix Laser Cleaning (MLC) 400 10.5.2 Wet Laser Cleaning (WLC) 401 10.5.3 Wet Laser Shock Cleaning (WLSC) 402 10.5.4 Combination of DLC and LSC 402 10.5.5 Combination of LSC and SLC 402 10.5.6 Laser-Induced Thermocapillary Cleaning 403 10.5.7 Droplet Opto-Hydrodynamic Cleaning (DOC) 403 10.6 Summary 404 Acknowledgements 407 References 408 Index 417

Read more less

Book SynopsisAutomotive Aerodynamics Joseph Katz, San Diego State University, USA The automobile is an icon of modern technology because it includes most aspects of modern engineering, and it offers an exciting approach to engineering education.Trade Review"This is where the book by Katz excels and the fundamental fluid principles are extensively covered undera vehicle aerodynamics title"...."Katz’s book will make a prime choice textbook for an undergraduate Automotive Engineering course, as fluid related modules in various academic years can cover the topicspresented in various chapters of the book" Remus Cîrstea, Course Director MSc Automotive Engineering, Lecturer in Fluid Dynamics, Coventry University on behalf of The Aeronautical Jornal, Oct 2017Table of ContentsSeries Preface xii Preface xiv 1 Introduction and Basic Principles 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Aerodynamics as a Subset of Fluid Dynamics 2 1.3 Dimensions and Units 3 1.4 Automobile/Vehicle Aerodynamics 5 1.5 General Features of Fluid Flow 9 1.5.1 Continuum 10 1.5.2 Laminar and Turbulent Flow 11 1.5.3 Attached and Separated Flow 12 1.6 Properties of Fluids 13 1.6.1 Density 13 1.6.2 Pressure 14 1.6.3 Temperature 14 1.6.4 Viscosity 16 1.6.5 Specific Heat 19 1.6.6 Heat Transfer Coefficient, k 19 1.6.7 Modulus of Elasticity, E 20 1.6.8 Vapor Pressure 22 1.7 Advanced Topics: Fluid Properties and the Kinetic Theory of Gases 23 1.8 Summary and Concluding Remarks 26 Reference 27 Problems 27 2 The Fluid Dynamic Equations 35 2.1 Introduction 35 2.2 Description of Fluid Motion 36 2.3 Choice of Coordinate System 38 2.4 Pathlines, Streak Lines, and Streamlines 39 2.5 Forces in a Fluid 40 2.6 Integral Form of the Fluid Dynamic Equations 43 2.7 Differential Form of the Fluid Dynamic Equations 50 2.8 The Material Derivative 57 2.9 Alternate Derivation of the Fluid Dynamic Equations 59 2.10 Example for an Analytic Solution: Two-Dimensional, Inviscid Incompressible, Vortex Flow 62 2.10.1 Velocity Induced by a Straight Vortex Segment 65 2.10.2 Angular Velocity, Vorticity, and Circulation 66 2.11 Summary and Concluding Remarks 69 References 72 Problems 72 3 One-Dimensional (Frictionless) Flow 81 3.1 Introduction 81 3.2 The Bernoulli Equation 82 3.3 Summary of One-Dimensional Tools 84 3.4 Applications of the One-Dimensional Friction-Free Flow Model 85 3.4.1 Free Jets 85 3.4.2 Examples for Using the Bernoulli Equation 89 3.4.3 Simple Models for Time-Dependent Changes in a Control Volume 93 3.5 Flow Measurements (Based on Bernoulli’s Equation) 96 3.5.1 The Pitot Tube 96 3.5.2 The Venturi Tube 98 3.5.3 The Orifice 100 3.5.4 Nozzles and Injectors 101 3.6 Summary and Conclusions 102 3.6.1 Concluding Remarks 103 Problems 104 4 Dimensional Analysis, High Reynolds Number Flows, and Definition of Aerodynamics 122 4.1 Introduction 122 4.2 Dimensional Analysis of the Fluid Dynamic Equations 123 4.3 The Process of Simplifying the Governing Equations 126 4.4 Similarity of Flows 127 4.5 High Reynolds Number Flow and Aerodynamics 129 4.6 High Reynolds Number Flows and Turbulence 133 4.7 Summary and Conclusions 136 References 136 Problems 136 5 The Laminar Boundary Layer 141 5.1 Introduction 141 5.2 Two-Dimensional Laminar Boundary Layer Model – The Integral Approach 143 5.3 Solutions using the von Kármán Integral Equation 147 5.4 Summary and Practical Conclusions 156 5.5 Effect of Pressure Gradient 161 5.6 Advanced Topics: The Two-Dimensional Laminar Boundary Layer Equations 164 5.6.1 Summary of the Exact Blasius Solution for the Laminar Boundary Layer 167 5.7 Concluding Remarks 169 References 170 Problems 170 6 High Reynolds Number Incompressible Flow Over Bodies: Automobile Aerodynamics 176 6.1 Introduction 176 6.2 The Inviscid Irrotational Flow (and Some Math) 178 6.3 Advanced Topics: A More Detailed Evaluation of the Bernoulli Equation 181 6.4 The Potential Flow Model 183 6.4.1 Methods for Solving the Potential Flow Equations 183 6.4.2 The Principle of Superposition 184 6.5 Two-Dimensional Elementary Solutions 184 6.5.1 Polynomial Solutions 185 6.5.2 Two-Dimensional Source (or Sink) 187 6.5.3 Two-Dimensional Doublet 190 6.5.4 Two-Dimensional Vortex 193 6.5.5 Advanced Topics: Solutions Based on Green’s Identity 196 6.6 Superposition of a Doublet and a Free-Stream: Flow Over a Cylinder 199 6.7 Fluid Mechanic Drag 204 6.7.1 The Drag of Simple Shapes 205 6.7.2 The Drag of More Complex Shapes 210 6.8 Periodic Vortex Shedding 215 6.9 The Case for Lift 218 6.9.1 A Cylinder with Circulation in a Free Stream 218 6.9.2 Two-Dimensional Flat Plate at a Small Angle of Attack (in a Free Stream) 222 6.9.3 Note About the Center of Pressure 224 6.10 Lifting Surfaces: Wings and Airfoils 225 6.10.1 The Two-Dimensional Airfoil 226 6.10.2 An Airfoil’s Lift 228 6.10.3 An Airfoil’s Drag 229 6.10.4 An Airfoil Stall 231 6.10.5 The Effect of Reynolds Number 232 6.10.6 Three-Dimensional Wings 233 6.11 Summary of High Reynolds Number Aerodynamics 248 6.12 Concluding Remarks 249 References 249 Problems 250 7 Automotive Aerodynamics: Examples 262 7.1 Introduction 262 7.2 Generic Trends (For Most Vehicles) 263 7.2.1 Ground Effect 264 7.2.2 Generic Automobile Shapes and Vortex Flows 265 7.3 Downforce and Vehicle Performance 269 7.4 How to Generate Downforce 274 7.5 Tools used for Aerodynamic Evaluations 274 7.5.1 Example for Aero Data Collection: Wind Tunnels 276 7.5.2 Wind Tunnel Wall/Floor Interference 279 7.5.3 Simulation of Moving Ground 281 7.5.4 Expected Results of CFD, Road, or Wind Tunnel Tests (and Measurement Techniques) 283 7.6 Variable (Adaptive) Aerodynamic Devices 286 7.7 Vehicle Examples 291 7.7.1 Passenger Cars 292 7.7.2 Pickup Trucks 298 7.7.3 Motorcycles 299 7.7.4 Competition Cars (Enclosed Wheel) 302 7.7.5 Open-Wheel Racecars 306 7.8 Concluding Remarks 312 References 314 Problems 314 8 Introduction to Computational Fluid Mechanics (CFD) 316 8.1 Introduction 316 8.2 The Finite-Difference Formulation 317 8.3 Discretization and Grid Generation 320 8.4 The Finite-Difference Equation 321 8.5 The Solution: Convergence and Stability 324 8.6 The Finite-Volume Method 326 8.7 Example: Viscous Flow Over a Cylinder 328 8.8 Potential-Flow Solvers: Panel Methods 331 8.9 Summary 335 References 337 Problems 337 9 Viscous Incompressible Flow: “Exact Solutions” 339 9.1 Introduction 339 9.2 The Viscous Incompressible Flow Equations (Steady State) 340 9.3 Laminar Flow between Two Infinite Parallel Plates: The Couette Flow 340 9.3.1 Flow with a Moving Upper Surface 342 9.3.2 Flow between Two Infinite Parallel Plates: The Results 343 9.3.3 Flow between Two Infinite Parallel Plates – The Poiseuille Flow 347 9.3.4 The Hydrodynamic Bearing (Reynolds Lubrication Theory) 351 9.4 Flow in Circular Pipes (The Hagen-Poiseuille Flow) 359 9.5 Fully Developed Laminar Flow between Two Concentric Circular Pipes 364 9.6 Laminar Flow between Two Concentric, Rotating Circular Cylinders 366 9.7 Flow in Pipes: Darcy’s Formula 370 9.8 The Reynolds Dye Experiment, Laminar/Turbulent Flow in Pipes 371 9.9 Additional Losses in Pipe Flow 374 9.10 Summary of 1D Pipe Flow 375 9.10.1 Simple Pump Model 378 9.10.2 Flow in Pipes with Noncircular Cross Sections 379 9.10.3 Examples for One-Dimensional Pipe Flow 381 9.10.4 Network of Pipes 391 9.11 Free Vortex in a Pool 394 9.12 Summary and Concluding Remarks 397 Reference 397 Problems 397 10 Fluid Machinery 411 10.1 Introduction 411 10.2 Work of a Continuous-Flow Machine 415 10.3 The Axial Compressor (The Mean Radius Model) 417 10.3.1 Velocity Triangles 421 10.3.2 Power and Compression Ratio Calculations 424 10.3.3 Radial Variations 429 10.3.4 Pressure Rise Limitations 431 10.3.5 Performance Envelope of Compressors and Pumps 434 10.3.6 Degree of Reaction 441 10.4 The Centrifugal Compressor (or Pump) 446 10.4.1 Torque, Power, and Pressure Rise 447 10.4.2 Impeller Geometry 450 10.4.3 The Diffuser 454 10.4.4 Concluding Remarks: Axial versus Centrifugal Design 457 10.5 Axial Turbines 458 10.5.1 Torque, Power, and Pressure Drop 459 10.5.2 Axial Turbine Geometry and Velocity Triangles 461 10.5.3 Turbine Degree of Reaction 464 10.5.4 Turbochargers (for Internal Combustion Engines) 473 10.5.5 Remarks on Exposed Tip Rotors (Wind Turbines and Propellers) 474 10.6 Concluding Remarks 478 Reference 478 Problems 478 11 Elements of Heat Transfer 485 11.1 Introduction 485 11.2 Elementary Mechanisms of Heat Transfer 486 11.2.1 Conductive Heat Transfer 486 11.2.2 Convective Heat Transfer 489 11.2.3 Radiation Heat Transfer 491 11.3 Heat Conduction 495 11.3.1 Steady One-Dimensional Heat Conduction 497 11.3.2 Combined Heat Transfer 499 11.3.3 Heat Conduction in Cylinders 502 11.3.4 Cooling Fins 506 11.4 Heat Transfer by Convection 515 11.4.1 The Flat Plate Model 516 11.4.2 Formulas for Forced External Heat Convection 520 11.4.3 Formulas for Forced Internal Heat Convection 526 11.4.4 Formulas for Free (Natural) Heat Convection 529 11.5 Heat Exchangers 534 11.6 Concluding Remarks 536 References 539 Problems 539 12 Automobile Aero-Acoustics 544 12.1 Introduction 544 12.2 Sound as a Pressure Wave 546 12.3 Sound Loudness Scale 549 12.4 The Human Ear Perception 552 12.5 The One-Dimensional Linear Wave Equation 553 12.6 Sound Radiation, Transmission, Reflection, Absorption 556 12.6.1 Sound Wave Expansion (Radiation) 556 12.6.2 Reflections, Transmission, Absorption 559 12.6.3 Standing Wave (Resonance), Interference, and Noise Cancellations 560 12.7 Vortex Sound 561 12.8 Example: Sound from a Shear Layer 564 12.9 Buffeting 568 12.10 Experimental Examples for Sound Generation on a Typical Automobile 574 12.11 Sound and Flow Control 576 12.12 Concluding Remarks 577 References 578 Problems 578 Appendix A 581 Appendix B 583 Index 589

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Ceramic Engineering and Science Proceeding has been published by The American Ceramic Society since 1980. This series contains a collection of papers dealing with issues in both traditional ceramics (i.e. , glass, whitewares, refractories, and porcelain enamel) and advanced ceramics.

Read more less

Book SynopsisDesign Optimization of Fluid Machinery: Applying Computational Fluid Dynamics and Numerical Optimization Drawing on extensive research and experience, this timely reference brings together numerical optimization methods for fluid machinery and its key industrial applications. It logically lays out the context required to understand computational fluid dynamics by introducing the basics of fluid mechanics, fluid machines and their components. Readers are then introduced to single and multi-objective optimization methods, automated optimization, surrogate models, and evolutionary algorithms. Finally, design approaches and applications in the areas of pumps, turbines, compressors, and other fluid machinery systems are clearly explained, with special emphasis on renewable energy systems. Written by an international team of leading experts in the field Brings together optimization methods using computational fluid dynamics for fluid machiTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Fluid Machinery: Classification and Characteristics 2 1.3 Analysis of Fluid Machinery 4 1.4 Design of Fluid Machinery 7 1.4.1 Design Requirements 7 1.4.2 Determination of Meanline Parameters 7 1.4.3 Meanline Analysis 8 1.4.4 3D Blade Design 8 1.4.5 Quasi 3D Through-Flow Analysis 8 1.4.6 Full 3D Flow Analysis 8 1.4.7 Design Optimization 8 1.5 Design Optimization of Turbomachinery 9 References 10 2 Fluid Mechanics and Computational Fluid Dynamics 11 2.1 Basic Fluid Mechanics 11 2.1.1 Introduction 11 2.1.2 Classification of Fluid Flow 11 2.1.2.1 Based on Viscosity 12 2.1.2.2 Based on Compressibility 12 2.1.2.3 Based on Flow Speed (Mach Number) 12 2.1.2.4 Based on Flow Regime 13 2.1.2.5 Based on Number of Phases 14 2.1.3 One-, Two-, and Three-Dimensional Flows 14 2.1.3.1 One-Dimensional Flow 15 2.1.3.2 Two- and Three-Dimensional Flow 15 2.1.4 External Fluid Flow 15 2.1.5 The Boundary Layer 15 2.1.5.1 Transition from Laminar to Turbulent Flow 16 2.2 Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) 16 2.2.1 CFD and its Application in Turbomachinery 17 2.2.1.1 Advantages of Using CFD 18 2.2.1.2 Limitations of CFD in Turbomachinery 18 2.2.2 Basic Steps Involved in CFD Analysis 19 2.2.2.1 Problem Statement 19 2.2.2.2 Mathematical Model 19 2.2.3 Governing Equations 19 2.2.3.1 Mass Conservation 20 2.2.3.2 Momentum Conservation 20 2.2.3.3 Energy Conservation 21 2.2.4 Turbulence Modeling 21 2.2.4.1 What is Turbulence? 22 2.2.4.2 Need for Turbulence Modeling 22 2.2.4.3 Reynolds-Averaged Navier–Stokes Equations 22 2.2.4.4 Turbulence Closure Models 23 2.2.4.5 Large Eddy Simulation (LES) 27 2.2.4.6 Direct Numerical Simulation (DNS) 27 2.2.5 Boundary Conditions 27 2.2.5.1 Inlet/Outlet Boundary Conditions 28 2.2.5.2 Wall Boundary Conditions 28 2.2.5.3 Periodic/Cyclic Boundary Conditions 28 2.2.5.4 Symmetry Boundary Conditions 29 2.2.6 Moving Reference Frame (MRF) 29 2.2.7 Verification and Validation 30 2.2.8 Commercial CFD Software 30 2.2.9 Open Source Codes 31 2.2.9.1 OpenFOAM 31 References 32 3 Optimization Methodology 35 3.1 Introduction 35 3.1.1 Engineering Optimization Definition 36 3.1.2 Design Space 36 3.1.3 Design Variables and Objectives 37 3.1.4 Optimization Procedure 40 3.1.5 Search Algorithm 40 3.2 Multi-Objective Optimization (MOO) 41 3.2.1 Weighted Sum Approach 42 3.2.2 Pareto-Optimal Front 42 3.3 Constrained, Unconstrained, and Discrete Optimization 43 3.3.1 Constrained Optimization 43 3.3.2 Unconstrained Optimization 44 3.3.3 Discrete Optimization 44 3.4 Surrogate Modeling 44 3.4.1 Overview 44 3.4.2 Optimization Procedure 44 3.4.3 Surrogate Modeling Approach 44 3.4.3.1 Response Surface Approximation (RSA) Model 45 3.4.3.2 Artificial Neural Network (ANN) Model 46 3.4.3.3 Kriging Model (KRG) Model 47 3.4.3.4 PRESS-Based-Averaging (PBA) Model 47 3.4.3.5 Simple Average (SA) Model 48 3.5 Error Estimation 49 3.5.1 General Errors When Simulating and Optimizing a Turbomachinery System 49 3.5.2 Error Estimation in Surrogate Modeling 52 3.5.3 Sensitivity Analysis 55 3.5.3.1 Number of Variables and Performance Improvement 55 3.5.3.2 Example of Sensitivity Analysis 56 3.6 Sampling Technique 57 3.6.1 Sampling 57 3.6.2 Sample Size 57 3.6.3 Design Space 57 3.6.4 Dimensionality Curse 57 3.6.5 Design of Experiments (DOE) 57 3.6.6 Full Factorial Design 58 3.6.7 Latin Hypercube Sampling (LHS) 58 3.7 Optimizers 59 3.8 Multidisciplinary Design Optimization 59 3.8.1 What is Multidisciplinary Optimization? 59 3.8.2 Gradient-Based Methods 60 3.8.3 Non-Gradient-Based Methods 60 3.8.4 Recent MDO Methods 60 3.9 Inverse Design 60 3.9.1 Inverse Design versus Direct Design 60 3.9.2 Direct Design Optimization with CFD 61 3.9.3 Inverse Design Optimization with CFD 61 3.10 Automated Optimization 61 3.10.1 Coupling Method with Adjoint CFD 63 3.10.2 Case Studies 63 3.10.2.1 CFD-Based Design Automated Design Optimization for Hydro Turbines 63 3.10.2.2 AO with OPAL++ 65 3.10.2.3 PADRAM: Parametric Design and Rapid Meshing System for Turbomachinery Optimization 65 3.10.2.4 Problems of AO 66 3.11 Conclusions 68 References 68 4 Optimization of Industrial Fluid Machinery 71 4.1 Pumps 71 4.1.1 Centrifugal, Mixed-Flow, and Axial-Flow Pumps 71 4.1.1.1 Centrifugal (or Radial) Pumps 71 4.1.1.2 Mixed-Flow and Axial-Flow Pumps 72 4.1.2 Parametric Shape Models and Flow Solvers for Pump Optimization 73 4.1.2.1 1D Models 73 4.1.2.2 2D Models 82 4.1.2.3 3D Models 88 4.2 Compressors and Turbines 98 4.2.1 Axial, Radial, Multistage Compressors 98 4.2.2 Parametric Shape Models and Flow Solvers for Axial Compressor Optimization 99 4.2.2.1 1D Models 99 4.2.2.2 2D Models 100 4.2.2.3 Advanced Throughflow Design Techniques (2D) 101 4.2.2.4 Streamline Curvature Methods 102 4.2.2.5 Advanced Cascade Design Techniques (2D-Quasi-3D) 105 4.2.2.6 Geometry Definition and Parameterization 107 4.2.2.7 Flow Solvers 111 4.2.2.8 3D Methods 114 4.2.3 Radial Compressor Optimization 117 4.2.3.1 3D Models 118 4.2.3.2 CFD Analysis 121 4.2.3.3 Multi-Objective Optimization Problem and Results 122 4.2.4 Turbines 124 4.2.4.1 Axial-Flow Turbines 126 4.2.4.2 Outflow and Inflow Turbines 126 4.2.4.3 Axial 1D 127 4.2.4.4 Case Study: Multi-Point Optimization of an Axial Turbine Stage 131 4.2.4.5 Axial 2D 135 4.2.4.6 CFD Models: Implementation and Validation 135 4.2.4.7 Case Study: Description, Geometry Parametrization, and Meshing 138 4.2.4.8 Results 140 4.2.4.9 RSM 142 4.2.4.10 SQP 142 4.3 Fans 146 4.3.1 Centrifugal, Axial-Flow, Mixed-Flow, and Cross-Flow Fans 146 4.3.1.1 Axial-Flow Fans 146 4.3.1.2 Centrifugal Fans 147 4.3.1.3 Mixed-Flow Fans 148 4.3.1.4 Cross-Flow Fans 149 4.3.2 Fan Pressure, Efficiency, and Laws 149 4.3.3 Aerodynamic Analysis of Fans 151 4.3.3.1 Axial-Flow Fans 151 4.3.3.2 Centrifugal Fans 160 4.3.4 Optimization Problems and Algorithms Used for Fan Optimization 171 4.3.4.1 Axial-Flow Fans 171 4.3.4.2 Axial-Flow Fans 175 4.3.4.3 Centrifugal Fans 184 4.4 Hydraulic Turbines 192 4.4.1 Introduction 192 4.4.2 Cavitation in Hydraulic Turbines 195 4.4.3 Analysis of Hydraulic Turbines 200 4.4.3.1 Francis Turbines 200 4.4.3.2 Kaplan Turbines 207 4.4.3.3 Pump-Turbines 210 4.4.4 Optimization of Hydraulic Turbines 213 4.4.4.1 Kaplan Turbines 213 4.4.4.2 Francis Turbines 216 4.4.4.3 Draft Tubes and Others 223 4.4.4.4 Pump-Turbines 224 4.5 Others 226 4.5.1 Regenerative Blowers 226 4.5.2 Others 232 References 240 5 Optimization of Fluid Machinery for Renewable Energy Systems 257 5.1 Wind Energy 257 5.1.1 Optimization of Horizontal-Axis Wind Turbines 259 5.1.2 Blade Element Methods 260 5.1.3 Turbine Parameterization 261 5.1.4 Strategies for Rotor Optimization 264 5.2 Ocean Energy 264 5.2.1 Temperature Gradients 266 5.2.2 Tides and Tidal Currents 266 5.2.3 Salinity Gradients 266 5.2.4 Waves 266 5.3 Energy Extraction from Ocean Waves 266 5.4 Oscillating Water Column (OWC) 267 5.4.1 Fixed-Structure OWC 269 5.4.2 Floating-Structure OWC 269 5.5 Classification of Turbines 269 5.5.1 Wells Turbine 269 5.5.2 Impulse Turbine 272 5.6 Optimization of Air Turbines 272 References 276 Nomenclature 279 Index 287

Read more less

Book SynopsisTaking place at the David L. Lawrence Convention Center, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, this CT Volume contains 17 papers from the following 2014 Materials Science and Technology (MS&T''14) symposia: Next Generation Biomaterials Surface Properties of Biomaterials Table of ContentsPreface NEXT GENERATION BIOCERAMICS Evaluation of Long-Term Mechanical and Biological Biocompatibility of Low-Cost -Type Ti-Mn Alloys for Biomedical Applications 3Ken Cho, Mitsuo Niinomi, Masaaki Nakai, Pedro Fernandes Santos, Alethea Morgane Liens, Masahiko Ikeda, and Tomokazu Hattori Control of Ag Release from Ag-Containing Calcium Phosphates in Simulated Body Fluid 13Ozkan Gokcekaya, Kyosuke Ueda, and Takayuki Narushima Gallium-Containing Ferrites for Hyperthermia Treatment 21J. Sánchez, Dora Alicia Cortés-Hernández, José C. Escobedo-Bocardo, Rosario A. Jasso-Terán, Pamela Y. Reyes-Rodríguez, and Gilberto F. Hurtado-López Exploration of Amorphous and Crystalline Tri-Magnesium Phosphates for Bone Cements 33Nicole Ostrowski, Vidisha Sharma, Abhijit Roy, and Prashant N. Kumta Micro-X-Ray Diffraction Study of New Nickel-Titanium Rotary Endodontic Instruments 47William A. Brantley, Masahiro Iijima, William A.T. Clark, Scott R. Schricker, John M. Nusstein, and Itaru Mizoguchi Torsional Properties of Nanostructured Titanium Cortical Bone Screws 55J.A.Disegi, B. Shultzabarger, and Michael Roach Strengthening Behaviors of Low-Precious Ag-Pd-Au-Zn Alloys for Dental Applications 63Mitsuo Niinomi, Masaaki Nakai, Junko Hieda, Ken-Cho, Yonghwan Kim, and Hisao Fukui Effect of Immersion Medium on the Degradation and Conversion of Silicate (13-93) Bioactive Glass Scaffolds 73Yifei Gu, Wenhai Huang, and Mohamed N. Rahaman Evaluation of Long-Term Bone Regeneration in Rat Calvarial Defects Implanted with Strong Porous Bioactive Glass (13-93) Scaffolds 85Mohamed N. Rahaman, Yinan Lin, Wei Xiao, X. Liu, and B. Sonny Bal Magnesium Single Crystal as a Biodegradable Implant Material 97Madhura Joshi, Pravahan Salunke, Guangqi Zhang, Vibhor Chaswal, Zhongyun Dong, and Vesselin Shanov SURFACE PROPERTIES OF BIOMATERIALS Damage Evaluation of TiO2 Nanotubes on Titanium 117Anish Shivaram, Susmita Bose, and Amit Bandyopadhyay Drug Delivery from Surface Modified Titanium Alloy for Load-Bearing Implants 129Susmita Bose, Dishary Banerjee, Sam Robertson, Solaiman Tarafder, and Amit Bandyopadhyay A Family of Novel Biostable Reticulated Elastomeric and Resilient Biointregative Crosslinked Polyurethane-Urea Scaffolds 137Arindam Datta and Larry Lavelle In Situ Nitridation of Titanium Using LENS™ 149Himanshu Sahasrabudhe, Julie Soderlind, and Amit Bandyopadhyay Magnesium Doped Hydroxyapatite: Synthesis, Characterization and Bioactivity Evaluation 161Jaswinder Singh, Harpal Singh, and Uma Batra Novel PLA- and PCL-HA Porous 3D Scaffolds Prepared by Robocasting Facilitate MC3T3-E1 Subclone 4 Cellular Attachment and Growth 175V. G. Varanasi, J. Russias, E. Saiz, P. M. Loomer, and A. P. Tomsia Dextran Coated Cerium Oxide Nanoparticles for Inhibiting Bone Cancer Cell Functions 187Ece Alpaslan, Hilal Yazici, Negar Golshan, Katherine S. Ziemer, and Thomas J. Webster Author Index 197

Read more less